C

O
PY
IF
PR
IN
TE
D
 D
TE
IN
PR
IF
OPERATION MANUAL PY
O
PART (D)
C
E D

FIXED WING
LL

TRAINING MANUAL
O
TR
N

Issue (2) Mar 15, 2017

O
C

Revision (1) Jul 1, 2017

N
U
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

CHAPTER 0 ADMINISTRATION AND CONTROL OF MANUAL --------------------------- 3

D
0.1 Foreword ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

TE
0.2 Record of Approval ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
0.3 General table of content ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
0.4 Record Of Normal Revisions --------------------------------------------------------------------- 22

IN
0.5 Record Of Temporary Revisions ----------------------------------------------------------------- 24
0.6 List Of Effective Pages ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26

PR
0.7 Training Manual Distribution List --------------------------------------------------------------- 42

IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
O
C
ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

CHAPTER 0 ADMINISTRATION AND CONTROL OF MANUAL

D
0.1 Foreword

TE
This Operations Manual Part D (Operations Training Manual) is produced by PAS Flight
Operations.

IN
It is a guide to PAS crew based on EGYPTIAN CAA requirements.

PR
Its content does not supersede any requirements mandated by the EGYPTIAN CAA nor does it
supersede or amend fleet type specific documentations such as AFM, FCOM, MMEL or any
other approved documentation.

IF
In case of conflict with the applicable EGYPTIAN CAA regulations, the EGYPTIAN CAA
regulations is the overriding authority.

PY
This manual contains guidelines, regulations and examples that adapted to PAS policies and
regulations.
O
Use and duplication (in whole or part, in all media) of this manual is authorized for internal
purposes of PAS departments only. Any commercial use is strictly excluded.
C

All references to CAT II , III approaches, Cargo, transports of dangerous goods, (MNPS,
AMU), and ETOPS are to be treated as not applicable items till PAS crew and Aircraft be
D

approved for such an operation.

E

PAS
LL

FLIGHT TRAINING DEPARTMENT

O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 5
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration
Ch:0
OM Part D Page: 5

Training Manual Administration

Administration And Control
0.2 Record of Approval
This Manual complies with the requirements of the ECAA of Egypt and is issued under the

D
0.2 Record of Approval
authority of the Operations Director.
This Manual complies with the requirements of the ECAA of Egypt and is issued under the

TE
authority of the Operations Director.
Highlights

IN
Highlights
PAS Training Manual, issue no. 02 revision no. 01 Issued due to:

PR
PAS Training Manual, issue no. 02 revision no. 00Issued due to:
1 - Updates in Egyptian Civil Aviation Regulation.
I - Updates in Egyptian Civil Aviation Regulation.

IF
2 - Complies with the IOSA requirements
2 - Complies with the IOSA requirements PY
3 - Add Appendix D to be part of this Manual.
O
Flight Operations General Manager Quality Assurance

Flight Operations General Manager

Signature: Quality Assurance Manager
C

Signature: Signature:
ED

FGPTIANCIVIL
AVIATIONAUTHORITY
LL

rh.ti
O

ocA
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar.

Issue 2017
Date :Mar.2017 Issue
Issue0202
Rev. Date
Rev.: Jul. 2017
Date :Mar.2017 Rev. 01
Rev.00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 6
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 7
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

Table of content

D
CHAPTER 0 ADMINISTRATION AND CONTROL OF MANUAL ------------------ 2

TE
0.1 Foreword ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
0.2 Record of Approval ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

IN
0.3 General table of content ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
0.4 Record Of Normal Revisions --------------------------------------------------------------- 28

PR
0.5 Record Of Temporary Revisions ----------------------------------------------------------- 30
0.6 List Of Effective Pages ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
0.7 Training Manual Distribution List --------------------------------------------------------- 58

IF
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION AND POLICY ........................................................... 4
1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 4

PY
1.1 Administration And Control Of Operations Manual Part (D) ...................................... 4
1.1.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 4
1.1.1.1 Document Control ................................................................................................... 5
O
1.1.1.2 Distribution of Documents ...................................................................................... 5
C
1.1.1.3 Distribution of Information ..................................................................................... 5
1.1.2 Purpose of the Manual ............................................................................................... 6
D

1.1.3. Editorial conventions ................................................................................................ 8

1.1.4. Training Manual........................................................................................................ 9
E

1.1.5 Training Policy......................................................................................................... 10

LL

1.1.5.1 In the case of a trainee’s failure ............................................................................ 10

1.1.5.2 Training Retake Policy ......................................................................................... 10
1.1.6. Approval and Acceptance by the Authority ............................................................ 11
O

1.1.6.1. General ................................................................................................................. 11

TR

1.2. Responsibilities .......................................................................................................... 12

1.2.1. Authority ................................................................................................................. 12
1.2.2. Structure and Contents ............................................................................................ 12
N

1.2.3. Distribution ............................................................................................................. 12

1.2.4. Holder Responsibility. ............................................................................................ 13
O

1.2.5. Training Philosophy ................................................................................................ 13

C

1.2.5.1. Mission................................................................................................................. 13
1.2.5.2. Values .................................................................................................................. 13
N

1.2.5.3. Innovation ............................................................................................................ 13

1.2.5.4. Selection............................................................................................................... 14
U

1.2.5.5. Safety ................................................................................................................... 14

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 8
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

1.3. System of Amendments ............................................................................................. 15

D
1.3.1. Issue ........................................................................................................................ 15
1.3.2. Training Directives ................................................................................................. 15

TE
1.3.3. Notification to the Authority ................................................................................... 15
1.3.4. Amendment Process................................................................................................ 16

IN
1.3.4.1. Handwritten Amendments ................................................................................... 16
1.3.4.2. Normal Revisions................................................................................................. 16

PR
1.3.4.3. Temporary Revisions (TR) .................................................................................. 16
1.3.4.4. Filing Instructions ................................................................................................ 17
1.3.4.5. List of Effective Pages (LEP) .............................................................................. 17
1.3.5. Control Pages .......................................................................................................... 17

IF
1.4. Organization Charts .................................................................................................. 18
1.4.0 PAS Flight Operations Organization Chart.............................................................. 18

PY
1.4.1. Nominated post holders .......................................................................................... 19
1.5. Definitions.................................................................................................................. 24
1.6. Training Review Committee (TRC)........................................................................... 29
O
1.6.1 Training Memo's ...................................................................................................... 29
1.6.2 Training Material Review Policy ............................................................................. 30
C

1.7. Selection Committee .................................................................................................. 30

1.8. Areas, Routes and Airports Categories ...................................................................... 31
D

1.8.1. General .................................................................................................................... 31

E

1.8.2. Airports Categories ................................................................................................. 31

1.8.3. Route Qualifications ............................................................................................... 32
LL

1.9. Recent Experience ..................................................................................................... 33

1.9.1. General .................................................................................................................... 33
O

1.9.2. Flight crew member ................................................................................................ 33

1.9.3. Recency of Training and Checking......................................................................... 34
TR

1.9.4. (Base) Training. ...................................................................................................... 34

1.9.5. Line Training. ......................................................................................................... 34
1.10. Pilot Returning Back from leave of absence ............................................................ 34
N

1.10.1................................................................................................................................. 34
O

1.10.2................................................................................................................................. 34
1.10.3................................................................................................................................. 35
C

1.11. Use of Simulator Instructor passed 60th birthday. ................................................... 39

N

1.11.1 Use of Pilots passed 60th birthday. ........................................................................ 39

1.11.4. Training by External Instructors ........................................................................... 40
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 9
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

1.12. Flight under Supervision .......................................................................................... 41

D
1.12.1. General .................................................................................................................. 41
1.13. Zero Flight Time (ZFT) ........................................................................................... 42

TE
1.13.1. General .................................................................................................................. 42
1.13.2. Levels of Certifications and Maneuvers Credit .................................................... 42

IN
1.14. Training bag contents for simulator ......................................................................... 44
1.15. Training Time Policy. .............................................................................................. 44

PR
1.15.1. Training Syllabus Policy ....................................................................................... 44
1.16. Flight Training Department General Policies .......................................................... 45
1.16.1. Communication Protocol ...................................................................................... 45
1.16.2. Contact with the Authority.................................................................................... 45

IF
1.16.3. Instructors Meeting ............................................................................................... 45
1.16.4. Segregation of Training and Checking ................................................................. 45

PY
1.16.5. Inappropriate Interference ..................................................................................... 46
1.16.6. Change of Instructor/Examiner ............................................................................. 46
1.16.7. Working Hours...................................................................................................... 46
O
1.16.8. Instructor Evaluation Policy.................................................................................. 46
1.16.9 Instructor Certification ........................................................................................... 46
C

1.16.10 Introduction Of A New Type Policy .................................................................... 46

1.17. Processes to Communicate Flight Crew Qualifications to Scheduling Department.47
D

1.17.1. Air crew Licenses responsibility for renewal ....................................................... 47

1.18. Training on Aircraft ................................................................................................. 48
E

1.19. Language .................................................................................................................. 49

LL

1.19.1. Induction ............................................................................................................... 49

1.19.2. Instructors ............................................................................................................. 49
O

1.19.3. Recurrent Training ................................................................................................ 50

1.19.4. English Language Test .......................................................................................... 50
TR

1.19.5. Test Location. ....................................................................................................... 50

1.19.6. Test Results ........................................................................................................... 50
1.20. Co-Pilots Take-off and Landings ............................................................................. 50
N

1.21. Training Records ...................................................................................................... 51

O

1.22. Administration ........................................................................................................ 53

1.22.1 General ................................................................................................................... 53
C

1.22.2. Training records .................................................................................................... 55

1.22.3. Course Attendance Records .................................................................................. 55
N

1.22.4. Training and Assessment Forms ........................................................................... 55

U

1.22.5. Certificate of Test.................................................................................................. 55

1.23. Training Quality Audits ........................................................................................... 56

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 10
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

1.23.1. Quality Control of Training Courses .................................................................... 56

D
1.24. Trend analysis .......................................................................................................... 56
1.25. PAS Pilots Selection Process ................................................................................... 56

TE
1.26. Newly Hired Type rated Pilots................................................................................. 56

IN
CHAPTER 2 FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR CHECK AIRMAN EXAMINER .................. 2
2.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 2

PR
2.1.1 Instructors Number Required Policy.......................................................................... 3
2.2 Flight Instructor Duties and Responsibilities .............................................................. 4
2.2.1 Examiner Duties and Responsibilities ....................................................................... 4
2.2.2 Check Airman Duties and Responsibilities ............................................................... 4

IF
2.2.3 Instructor Pilot Duties and Responsibilities ............................................................... 4
2.3 Selection System and Qualification of Instructor Pilots .............................................. 5

PY
2.3.1 Instructor Pilot (IP) Initial/Transition Training.......................................................... 6
2.3.3 Instructor Pilot Upgrade to Check Airman ................................................................ 6
2.4.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 7
O
2.4.2 Selection ..................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.3 Initial Training ........................................................................................................... 8
C

2.4.3.1 Qualifications .......................................................................................................... 8

2.4.4 Examiner Recurrent Training..................................................................................... 8
D

2.5 Supervision Policy ........................................................................................................ 9

E

2.5.1. Newly Appointed Instructors .................................................................................... 9

2.5.2 All Instructor Pilots .................................................................................................... 9
LL

2.5.3 Instructor Pilot Retention Policy ................................................................................ 9

2.6 General Rules ................................................................................................................10
O

2.6.1 Purpose .......................................................................................................................10

2.6.2 Scheduling..................................................................................................................10
TR

2.6.3 Training Time Limitation...........................................................................................10

2.6.4 Training Syllabus .......................................................................................................10
2.6.5 Training and Checking ............................................................................................. 11
N

2.6.5.1 General .................................................................................................................. 11

O

2.6.6 Line Training Requirements .................................................................................... 12

2.6.7 Records .................................................................................................................... 12
C
N

CHAPTER 3 TRAINING TESTING AND CHECKING PROCESS .......................... 3

U

3.0. General Rules, Limitations, Requirements. ................................................................. 3

3.0.1. Training and Checking .............................................................................................. 3

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 11
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

3.0.2. Simulator briefing and debriefing. ............................................................................ 5

D
3.0.2.1. Briefing: ................................................................................................................. 5
3.0.2.2. Debriefing: ............................................................................................................. 5

TE
3.0.3. Initial Ground Training courses required for newly hired Crew Member ................ 6
3.1. Training. ....................................................................................................................... 7

IN
3.1.1. Philosophy of the Training courses is based on the following three principles ........ 7
3.1.1.1. Systematic approach to instructions ....................................................................... 7

PR
3.1.1.2. Learning by doing: ................................................................................................. 7
3.1.1.3. Training to proficiency .......................................................................................... 7
3.1.2. Training Objectives aim to cover the following: ...................................................... 8
3.1.3. Types of Training. ..................................................................................................... 9

IF
3.1.4. Rostering and Scheduling. ........................................................................................ 9
3.2. Checking .................................................................................................................... 10

PY
3.2.1. Type Rating check (certification) ........................................................................... 10
3.2.2. Proficiency check .................................................................................................... 10
3.2.3. Instructions governing periodic checks /Tests for pilots......................................... 11
O
3.2.4. Pilot: Extended Envelope Training (ECAR 121.423) ............................................. 12
3.3. Assessment ................................................................................................................. 14
C

3.3.1. Grading Scale .......................................................................................................... 15

3.3.2. Training Progress Grading Guidance ...................................................................... 15
D

3.3.2.1. Effect of repeated events ...................................................................................... 16

3.3.2.2. Pilot Assessment Markers (PAMS) ..................................................................... 16
E

3.3.3. Acceptable Performance Guide lines and tolerances. ............................................. 17

LL

3.3.3.1. Knowledge (Oral or written) ................................................................................ 17

3.3.3.2. Flying skills .......................................................................................................... 17
O

3.3.3.3. Management ......................................................................................................... 17

3.3.4. Tolerances ............................................................................................................... 18
TR

3.3.4.1. Take-off and Area Departure ............................................................................... 18

3.3.4.2. Rejected take off .................................................................................................. 18
3.3.4.3. STEEP Turn ......................................................................................................... 19
N

3.3.4.4. Approach to Stall ................................................................................................. 19

O

3.3.4.5. Cruise ................................................................................................................... 19

3.3.4.6. Area Arrival and Holding .................................................................................... 19
C

3.3.4.7. Instrument Approach (Precision and Non-Precision) .......................................... 20

3.3.4.7.1. Final Approach................................................................................................ 21
N

3.3.4.7.2. Circling Approach ........................................................................................... 21

U

3.3.4.7.3. Missed Approach .............................................................................................. 21

3.4. Testing........................................................................................................................ 22

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 12
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

3.4.1. Oral / Knowledge Test ............................................................................................ 22

D
3.4.1.1. Oral Test shall be administered in the following conditions................................ 22
3.4.1.2. Oral Test............................................................................................................... 22

TE
3.4.1.2. Knowledge Test ................................................................................................... 22
3.4.2. Written Examinations ............................................................................................. 23

IN
3.4.2.1. Re-Take Policy..................................................................................................... 23
3.5. Personnel that do not achieve or maintain required standards ................................... 24

PR
3.5.1. Poor Progress of a student ....................................................................................... 24
3.5.2. Failure of a Student/Candidate................................................................................ 24
3.5.3. Remedial training following failure of a line or simulator check ........................... 24
3.5.4. Termination of training. .......................................................................................... 24

IF
3.5.5. Poor Performance of an Instructor / Examiner ....................................................... 24
3.5.1. Poor Progress of a student ....................................................................................... 25
3.5.2. Failure of a Student/Candidate................................................................................ 26

PY
3.5.2.1. Procedures in the event of a failed Flight or Simulator Check ............................ 26
3.5.2.2. Additional Procedures in the event of a Failed Initial or Recurrent PPC ............ 26
O
3.5.2.3. Additional Procedures in the event of a failed Upgrade PPC ...............................27
3.5.2.4. Additional Procedures in the event of a failed Upgrade LOE ............................. 27
C

3.5.2.5. Additional Procedures to be followed in the event of a failed Line Check (FLC, ALC,
PC) 31
D

3.5.3. Remedial training following failure of a line or simulator check ........................... 28

3.5.3.1. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failed Ground Exam ....................... 28
E

3.5.4. Termination of training ........................................................................................... 28

LL

3.5.5. Poor Performance of an Instructor / Examiner ....................................................... 29

3.6. Training facilities ....................................................................................................... 30
O

3.6.1. General (Ref. ECAR 121.402) ................................................................................ 30

3.6.2. Classroom Facilities ................................................................................................ 30
TR

3.6.3. Computer Based Training ....................................................................................... 30

3.6.4. Training Devices ..................................................................................................... 31
N

CHAPTER 4 GROUND TRAINING ................................................................................ 2

O

4.0 General .......................................................................................................................... 2

4.1. Basic Indoctrination. (Ref. ECAR 121.415) ................................................................ 3
C

4.1.1 Flight Crew ................................................................................................................ 3

N

4.1.2. Cabin Crew ............................................................................................................... 9

4.2. Initial Ground Training ..................... ....................................................................... 13
U

4.3. Transition Ground Training ................... .................................................................... 18

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 13
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

4.4. Recurrent Ground Training. ....................................................................................... 23

D
4.5. Difference Ground Training....................................................................................... 25
4.5.1 Cross Crew Qualification (CCQ) ............................................................................. 25

TE
4.5.1 Cross Crew Qualification (CCQ) ............................................................................. 26
4.5.1.1 Objectives ............................................................................................................. 26

IN
4.5.1.2 Prerequisite ........................................................................................................... 26
4.5.1.3 Course Layout ....................................................................................................... 26

PR
4.5.1.4 Training Aids ........................................................................................................ 26
4.5.1.5 Program hours ....................................................................................................... 26
4.5.1.6 Training Location.................................................................................................. 26
4.5.2.6 Training Location.................................................................................................. 27

IF
4.6. Instructor Pilots Initial / Transition Ground Training ................................................ 29
4.7. Examiner/Check Airman Initial and Transition Ground Training. ............................ 31

PY
4.8. Traffic Alert And Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) ........................................... 33
4.9. Command UP-Grade Ground Training. ..................................................................... 35
4.10. Adverse weather operations. .................................................................................... 37
O
4.11. Route and Airport Qualification. ............................................................................. 40
4.11.1. Qualification for CAT C Airport .......................................................................... 43
C

4.12. Crew Resources Management (CRM) Training Course (Joint with Cabin Crew & Flight
Dispatchers). (Ref. ECAR 121.419 (viii)) ........................................................................ 46
D

4.13. Dangerous Goods and Hazardous Material Training ............................................... 48

E

4.14. Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM) ....................................................... 50

4.15. Low Visibility Operation ........................................................................................ 51
LL

4.16. Wind Shear Ground Training................................................................................... 52

4.17. Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT) ..................................................................... 54
O

4.18 Aircraft Upset Recovery .......................................................................................... 55

TR

4.19. P-RNAV (RNP1) ..................................................................................................... 56

4.20 English Language Test Standard............................................................................... 58
4.21. SMS Course (Safety Management System Course)................................................. 59
N

4.22 General Safety Training ............................................................................................ 60

4.22.1 Initial General Safety Training .............................................................................. 60
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 14
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

4.22.2 Recurrent General Safety Training ........................................................................ 65

D
4.22.2.1 General Safety Training - 12 Calendar Month.................................................... 66
4.22.2.2 The 24 Calendar Month Recurrent Training ....................................................... 68

TE
4.23 Electronic Flight Bag Training (EFB) (IF APPLICABLE) ...................................... 70

IN
CHAPTER 5 FLIGHT TRAINING ................................................................................ 3
5.1. General ......................................................................................................................... 3

PR
5.1.1. Purpose ...................................................................................................................... 3
5.1.2. Evaluations ................................................................................................................ 3
5.1.3. Initial, Transition and Recurrent Training Maneuvers and Procedures .................... 3
5.1.4. Proficiency Check Maneuvers and Procedures ......................................................... 4

IF
5.1.5. Additional Time ........................................................................................................ 4
5.2. Instructor / Check Airman Initial / Transition Flight Training. ................................... 5

PY
5.2.1. Instructor Pilot .......................................................................................................... 6
5.2.2. Check Airman. .......................................................................................................... 7
5.2.3. Right Hand Seat Qualification. ................................................................................. 8
O
5.2.3.1. Right hand seat qualifications for Instructor Pilots ................................................ 8
5.2.3.2. Right hand seat qualifications for Normal Line Captain. .................................... 10
C

5.2. Instructor, Check Airmen & Examiner Recurrent Flight Training. (Proficiency Training).
........................................................................................................................................... 12
D

5.3. Initial Flight Training ................................................................................................. 14

E

5.4. Transition Flight Training. ......................................................................................... 16

5.5. Recurrent Flight Training. (Proficiency Training) ..................................................... 18
LL

5.6. Route Training (Line Training) Initial Operating Experience (IOE). ........................ 23
5.6.8. Planned Sectors (IOE)............................................................................................. 25
O

5.6.9. PAS requirements ................................................................................................... 28

5.6.9.1. Initial (newly hired) ............................................................................................. 28
TR

5.6.9.2 First time Captain with experience on Type ......................................................... 28

5.6.9.3 First time Captain without experience on Type .................................................... 28
5.6.9.4. Transition ............................................................................................................. 29
N

5.6.10. Pilot operating limitations and pairing requirements ............................................ 30

O

5.7. Proficiency Check. ..................................................................................................... 31

5.8. Line Check. ................................................................................................................ 33
C

5.9. LOFT Training. .......................................................................................................... 35

N

5.9.1. Introduction. ............................................................................................................ 35

5.9.2. Basic LOFT elements.............................................................................................. 36
U

5.9.3. LOFT Philosophy.................................................................................................... 37

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 15
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

5.9.4. LOFT Pre-flight Briefing ........................................................................................ 37

D
5.9.5. LOFT Debriefing. ................................................................................................... 37
5.9.6. Proficiency Level .................................................................................................... 37

TE
5.9.7. LOFT course validity. ............................................................................................. 37
5.9.8. Session Details ........................................................................................................ 38

IN
5.10. Line Oriented Simulation (LOS) Training ............................................................... 39
5.11. Low Altitude Windshear Training. .......................................................................... 40

PR
5.12. Command Upgrade Flight Training. ........................................................................ 41
5.12.1. Simulator Training. ............................................................................................... 43
5.12.2. Base Training. ....................................................................................................... 44
5.12.3. Line Training ........................................................................................................ 44

IF
5.13. Volcanic Ash Training. ............................................................................................ 48
5.14. P-RNAV ...................................................................................................................... 49

PY
5.15. Pilot Incapacitation. ................................................................................................. 51
5.16. Aircraft Upset Recovery ..................................................................... .................... 52
5.17. Adverse weather operations ..................................................................................... 53
O
5.18. CONTROLLED FLIGHT INTO TERRAIN (CFIT) ............................................... 55
5.19. TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (TCAS) ............ 56
C

5.20. Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM) ....................................................... 57

5.21 Low Visibility Training ............................................................................................ 58
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 16
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

Chapter 6 : Cabin Crew Training Program

D
6.1 Cabin Crew Training Program ____________________________________ 3

TE
6.1.1 Introduction ____________________________________________________ 3
6.1.2 Cabin Crew Training Program Quick Reference ________________________ 4
6.1.3 Cabin Crew Training Program Elements. _____________________________ 4

IN
6.1.4 Cabin Crew license ______________________________________________ 12
6.2 Initial Training_________________________________________________ 13

PR
6.3 Transitional Training ___________________________________________ 13
6.4 Type Differences Training _______________________________________ 13

IF
6.5 Recurrent Training _____________________________________________ 13
6.6 Re-qualification Training ________________________________________ 13
6.7
6.8
PY
Purser Training ________________________________________________ 13
Instructor Training _____________________________________________ 13
O
6.9 Examiner _____________________________________________________ 13
C

6.10 Line Evaluation. ________________________________________________ 13

D

6.11 Testing and Evaluation __________________________________________ 13

E

6.12 Training records _______________________________________________ 13

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 17
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

Chapter 7: Flight Dispatcher Initial Training. (On Job Training)

7.0 General.............................................................................................................................................. 2

D
7.1 Basic Indoctrination. ....................................................................................................................... 3

TE
7.2 Flight Dispatcher Transition Training. (A/C Type) ........................................................................... 7
7.3 Flight Dispatcher Recurrent Training. ............................................................................................. 8

IN
7.4 Flight Dispatcher Re-qualification Training................................................................................... 10
7.5 Flight Dispatcher Instructor Training. ........................................................................................... 11

PR
7.6 Safety Management System Course ............................................................................................. 13
7.9 Cargo Operational Procedure ....................................................................................................... 16
7.10 Dangerous Goods Operational Procedure ................................................................................... 17

IF
7.11 Special Airports ............................................................................................................................. 18
7.12 Reserved .......... ........................................................................................................................... 19

PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 18
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

D
CHAPTER 8 SIMULATOR EVALUATION POLICY ........................................................... 2
8.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 2

TE
8.2 TRAINING DEVICES ................................................................................................................. 2
8.1.1 Simulator Approval ....................................................................................................... 3

IN
8.2. TEST REQUIRED FOR SIMULATOR EVALUATION ....................................................................... 4
8.2.1....................................................................................................................................... 4

PR
8.2.2 Validation Tests .......................................................................................................... 4
8.2.3 Functions and Subjective Tests ................................................................................... 4
8.2.4 Minimum Serviceability Requirements ...................................................................... 5
8.3 COMPARISON OF SIMULATOR LEVEL BY DIFFERENT REGULARITY ...................................... 6

IF
8.4 PAS REQUIREMENTS TO APPROVE A FLIGHT SIMULATOR FOR TRAINING. .............................. 6
8.5 ECAA REQUIREMENTS TO APPROVE FLIGHT SIMULATOR ....................................................... 6
Appendix A .................................................................................................................................. 8

PY
Appendix B .................................................................................................................................. 23
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 19
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

CHAPTER 9 AVIATION BASIC COURSE .......................................................................... 2

D
9.1. Objective ............................................................................................................................. 2

TE
9.2. Location ............................................................................................................................... 2
9.3. Course Documents .............................................................................................................. 2
9.4. Training Media / Aids ......................................................................................................... 2

IN
9.5. Ground Training .................................................................................................................. 3
9.5.1. Course Layout (description) ......................................................................................... 9

PR
9.5.2. Basic Indoctrination ...................................................................................................... 4
9.5.2.1. Objective ............................................................................................................... 4
9.5.2.2. Course Outline ...................................................................................................... 4

IF
9.5.2.3. Programmed Hours ............................................................................................... 7
9.5.3. Tailored Basic Indoctrination Course For Re-qualification Training ........................... 7

PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 20
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

Chapter 10 Security Training ........................................................................................................... 2

10.1 Objective: .................................................................................................................................... 2

D
10.4 Course Duration: Initial (3Days) 21 hrs. ..................................................................................... 2

TE
10.5 Security Training......................................................................................................................... 2
10.5.1 Curriculum Topics: ...................................................................................................................... 2

IN
10.6 Course Layout for Cockpit Crew (2 DAYS) ............................................................................... 3
10.7 Course Layout for Cabin Crew (2 DAYS) .................................................................................. 3

PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 21
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

D
Chapter 11: TRAINING FORMS

TE
11.1 AREA, ROUTE AND AIRPORT QUALIFICATION FORM ....................................................... 3
11.2 TRAINING / PROFICIENCY FORM .............................................................................................. 4

IN
11.3 LINE CHECK FORM .................................................................................................................... 6
11.4 IOE / USV EVALUATION / DISCUSSION ITEMS ....................................................................... 8

PR
11.5 INSTRUCTOR RHS TRAINING FORM ........................................................................................ 10
11.6 INSTRUCTOR EVALUATION ..................................................................................................... 11
11.7 FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR TRAINING RECORD............................................................................. 12

IF
11.8 BASE FLIGHT TRAINING FORM ............................................................................................... 13
11.9 ZERO FLIGHT TIME TRAINING FORM ...................................................................................... 14

PY
11.10 AIR TRANSPORT PILOT LICENSE IDENTIFICATION ............................................................. 16
11.11 INSTRUCTOR'S RECOMMENDATION ....................................................................................... 17
O
11.12 COMPETENCY CHECK (for dispatcher) ....................................................................................... 18
C
11.13 CABIN CREW IN FLIGHT SECTORS AND COMPETENCY CHECK ..................................... 19
11.14 GROUND TRAINING AND WALK AROUND (Cabin Crew) ..................................................... 20
D

11.15 CABIN CREW INSTRUCTOR IN-FLIGHT PROFICIENCY CHECKS ........................................ 21

E
LL

OM Part D Training Manual APPENDIX D --------------------------------------------------------- **

O

1 C.R.J Initial Training------------------------------------------------------------------------------------**

TR

2 Dash 8 Initial Training ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------**

3 Recurrent Training - ALL TYPES -------------------------------------------------------------------**

N
O

4 Upgrade Training - ALL TYPES -------------------------------------------------------------------- **

C

5.Instructor Course - initial--------------------------------------------------------------------------------**

N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 22
Training Manual Ch:0
Administration Administration
OM Part And D Control Page.22

Training Manual Administration

Administration And Control
0.4 Record Of Normal Revisions
Revision to this Manual shall be made by all authorized users without delay. After inserting the

D
0.4 Record Of Normal Revisions
revision enter the appropriate data in the revision sheet below. The compliance has to be signed
Revision to this Manual shall be made all authorized
byissued retainAfter
without delay. inserting sheet
the until

TE
under "Inserted by". Revision will be usersintervals,
at irregular this revision
revision enter
officially the appropriate data in the revision sheet below. The compliance has to be signed
replaced.
under "Insefted by". Revision will be issued at irregular intervals, retain this revision sheet until

IN
officially replaced.

Issue No. Revision No. Revision Date Effective Date Inserted by

PR
Issue No. Revision No. Revision Date Effective Date Inserted by
1 1. NOV 2002 FEB 2003 Reda
1 1
2. NOV 2002
MAY 2008 FE,BJUN
2OO3
2008 Reda Reda

IF
1
I 2. MAY 2OO8 JLTN 2008 Reda
1 3. JUL 2008 AUG 2008 Reda
1
1
a
1
4.
JUL
PY
2OO8
OCT 2010
AIIG 2008 Reda
21 DEC 2010 Reda
1 4. ocT 2010 2t DEC 201,0 Reda
1 5. JAN 2012 MAR 2012 Reda
O
1 5. JAN 2012 MAR 2OI2 Reda
1 6. JUL 2015 SEP 2015 Reda
C

1 6. JUL 2015 SEP 2015 Reda

1 7. DEC 2015 8 MAR 2016Reda Reda
I DE,C 2015 8 MAR 2016
ED

7.

1
1 8.
8. JAN 2017
JAN 2017
15 JAN
15 JAN 20172017 Reda Reda

22 0.0.-r- MAR 2017 15 01 MAR

MAR 20172017 Ghanim
LL

MAR 2OI7
2 1.
/rurr,orclvlL \
Jul 2017 01 Jul 2017 Ghanim
O

fulilliii,ffirv\
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar.2017 Issue 02

IssueRev.
DateDate:Mar.2017
:Mar. 2017 Issue 02
Rev.00
Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 23
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
O
C
ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 24
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

0.5 Record Of Temporary Revisions

D
Temporary Revision to this Manual shall be made by all authorized users without delay. After

TE
inserting the temporary revision enter the appropriate data in the revision sheet below. The
compliance has to be signed under "Inserted by". Revision will be issued at irregular intervals,
retain this revision sheet until officially replaced.

IN
PR
TR. NO. ISSUE DATE DATE FILED FILED BY SIGNATURE REMARKS

01 Mar 2017 01 Oct 2017 Hady Ch 7 Insert

4 Page

IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 25
Training Manual Administration
Administration And Control

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 26
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

0.6 List Of Effective Pages

D
Chapter 00 Administration And Control Of Training Manual

TE
Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IN
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PR
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IF
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PY
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
15. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C
16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
D

18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

19. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
E

20. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

LL

21. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

22. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
23. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O

24. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

25. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
TR

26. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

27. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
N

28. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

29. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O

30. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

31. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C

32. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

N

33. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

34. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
U

35. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017

36. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 27
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

Chapter 00 Administration And Control Of Training Manual

D
37. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

TE
38. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
39. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
40. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

IN
41. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
42. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
Jul. 2017

PR
43. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01
44. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
45. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
46. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 28
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

Chapter 01 Introduction And Policy

D
Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date

TE
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IN
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PR
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IF
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PY
13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
15. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C
17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
19. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
D

20. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

E

21. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

22. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
LL

23. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

24. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O

25. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul . 2017

26. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
TR

27. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

28. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
29. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul . 2017
N

30. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

O

31. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

32. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C

33. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

34. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
N

35. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

U

36. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

37. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 29
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

Chapter 01 Introduction And Policy

D
38. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

TE
39. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
40. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
41. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IN
42. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
43. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PR
44. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
45. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
46. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
47. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IF
48. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
49. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
50. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PY
51. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
52. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 30
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

Chapter 02 Flight Instructor Check Airman Examiner

Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date

D
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

TE
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IN
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PR
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IF
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 31
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

D
Chapter 03 Training Testing And Checking Process
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

TE
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IN
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PR
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul . 2017
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IF
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PY
13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
15. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C

18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

19. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
D

20. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

E

21. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

22. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
LL

23. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

24. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O

25. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

26. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
TR

27. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

28. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
29. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
N

30. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

31. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O

32. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 32
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

D
Chapter 04 Ground Training
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

TE
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IN
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PR
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IF
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PY
13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
15. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C
18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
19. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
D

20. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

21. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
E

22. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

LL

23. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

24. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
25. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O

26. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

27. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
TR

28. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

29. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
30. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
N

31. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

O

32. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

33. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C

34. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

35.
N

Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

36. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
U

37. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

38. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
39. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 33
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

D
Chapter 04 Ground Training
40. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

TE
41. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
42. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
43. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IN
44. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
45. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PR
46. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
47. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
48. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IF
49. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
50. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
51. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PY
52. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
53. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
54. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
55. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
56. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C

57. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

58. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
D

59. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

60. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
E

61. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

LL

62. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

63. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O

64. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

65. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
TR

66. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

67. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
68. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
N

69. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

70. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 34
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

Chapter 05 Flight Training

D
20. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
21. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

TE
22. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
23. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
24. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IN
25. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
26. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PR
27. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
28. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
29. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
30. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IF
31. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
32. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PY
33. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
34. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
35. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
36. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
37. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C

38. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

39. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
D

40. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

41. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
E

42. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

LL

43. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

44. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
45. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O

46. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

TR

47. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

48. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
49. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
N

50. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

51. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O

52. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

53. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C

54. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

N

55. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

56. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
U

57. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

58. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 35
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

Chapter 06 Cabin Crew Training

D
Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date

TE
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017

IN
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017

PR
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017

IF
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017
JUl. 2017

PY
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01
13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017
14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 JUl. 2017
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : JUl. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 36
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

D
Chapter 07 Dispatch Training

TE
Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IN
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PR
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IF
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PY
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
15. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C
16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
D

18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

19. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
E

20. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 37
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

Chapter 08 Simulator Evaluation Policy

D
Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date

TE
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IN
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PR
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IF
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PY
13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
15. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C
17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
19. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
D

20. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

E

21. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

22. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
LL

23. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

24. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 38
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

Chapter 09Aviation Basic Course (ABC) AB-Initio Training

D
Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

TE
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

IN
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PR
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

Chapter 10 Security Training

IF
Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

PY
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O
Chapter 11 Forms
C

Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date

1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
D

2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
E

4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

LL

5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O

8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

TR

9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
N

12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
O

14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

15. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
C

16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

N

17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
U

19. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

20. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 39
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

Chapter 11 Forms
Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date

D
21. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017
22. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 00 Mar. 2017

TE
APPENDIX D SECTION 1.CRJ Initial Training
Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date

IN
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

PR
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

IF
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

PY
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
O
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
C

14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

15. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
D

16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
E

18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

LL

19. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

20. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
Mar. 2017
O

21. Issue 02 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

22. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
TR

23. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

24. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
25. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
N

26. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

27. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
O

28. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

Mar. 2017
C

29. Issue 02 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

30. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
N

31. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 40
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

APPENDIX D SECTION 2 Dash 8 Type rating course

Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date

D
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

TE
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
Mar. 2017

IN
5. Issue 02 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

PR
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

IF
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

PY
14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
15. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
O
17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
C

APPENDIX D SECTION 3. Recurrent

D

Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date

1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
E

2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

LL

3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
O

5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
TR

7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
N

10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
O

12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

C

13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
N

15. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
U

17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
19. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 41
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

APPENDIX D SECTION 4.Upgrade

D
Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

TE
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

IN
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

PR
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

IF
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

PY
13. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
14. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
15. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
O
16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
C

18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

19. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
D

20. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

21. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
E

22. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

LL

23. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

24. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
O

25. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

26. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
TR

27. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

28. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
29. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
N

30. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 42
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

APPENDIX D SECTION 5.Instructor Course - initial

D
Page Issue Issue Date Rev. Rev. Date

TE
1. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
2. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
3. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

IN
4. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
5. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

PR
6. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
7. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
8. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
9. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

IF
10. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
11. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
12. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
13.
14.
15.
Issue 02
Issue 02
Issue 02
Mar. 2017
Mar. 2017
Mar. 2017
PY Rev. 01
Rev. 01
Rev. 01
Jul. 2017
Jul. 2017
Jul. 2017
O
16. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
C
17. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
18. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
19. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
D

20. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

E

21. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

22. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
LL

23. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

24. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
O

25. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

26. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
TR

27. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

28. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
29. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
N

30. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

O

31. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

32. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
C

33. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

34. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
N

35. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

U

36. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

37. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 43
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

APPENDIX D SECTION 5.Instructor Course - initial

Page Page Page Page Page

D
38. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017
39. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

TE
40. Issue 02 Mar. 2017 Rev. 01 Jul. 2017

IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 44
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 45
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

D
0.7 Training Manual Distribution List

TE
The approved master copy of the OM is kept at the Operation General Manager office, an hard copy is
delivered to the ECAA and the electronic copy is available through INTRANET. Any change, revision or
amendment shall be notified by the Operation General Manager to the following Managers by e-mail once
any amendment is loaded in ........ :

IN
Operation Manual Holder
Name of holder Signature
Serial Control Nr.

PR
1. Egyptian Civil Aviation Authority
2. Accountable Executive
3. Flight Operations General Manager

IF
4. Chief Pilot (E)

PY
5. Quality General Manager (E)
6. safety general manager (E)
Navigation & Air Traffic General Manager (E)
O
7.
8. ODCC
C

Assistance General Manager for Crew

9.
Training
D

10.
E

Flight Deck Crew Members (E)

LL
O
TR

E = Electron
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 0
OM Part D Page: 46
Training Manual
Administration And Control Administration

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION AND POLICY ............................................................................. 4

D
1. Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 4

TE
1.1 Administration And Control .............................................................................................. 4
1.1.1 General............................................................................................................................. 4
1.1.1.1 Document Control ........................................................................................................... 5

IN
1.1.1.2 Distribution of Documents .............................................................................................. 5
1.1.1.3 Distribution of Information.............................................................................................. 5

PR
1.1.2 Purpose of the Manual. .................................................................................................... 6
1.1.3. Editorial conventions ....................................................................................................... 8
1.1.4. Training Manual. ............................................................................................................. 9

IF
1.1.5 Training Policy .............................................................................................................. 10
1.1.5.1 In the case of a trainee’s failure ..................................................................................... 10
1.1.5.2
1.1.6. PY
Training Retake Policy .................................................................................................. 10
Approval and Acceptance by the Authority .................................................................. 11
O
1.1.6.1. General........................................................................................................................... 11
1.2. Responsibilities............................................................................................................... 12
C

1.2.1. Authority ........................................................................................................................ 12

1.2.2. Structure and Contents ................................................................................................... 12
D

1.2.3. Distribution .................................................................................................................... 12

E

1.2.4. Holder Responsibility. ................................................................................................... 13

LL

1.2.5. Training Philosophy ...................................................................................................... 13

1.2.5.1. Mission .......................................................................................................................... 13
O

1.2.5.2. Values ............................................................................................................................ 13

1.2.5.3. Innovation ...................................................................................................................... 13
TR

1.2.5.4. Selection ........................................................................................................................ 14

1.2.5.5. Safety ............................................................................................................................. 14
N

1.3. System of Amendments. ................................................................................................ 15

O

1.3.1. Issue. .............................................................................................................................. 15

1.3.2. Training Directives ........................................................................................................ 15
C

1.3.3. Notification to the Authority ......................................................................................... 15

N

1.3.4. Amendment Process ...................................................................................................... 16

U

1.3.4.1. Handwritten Amendments ............................................................................................. 16

1.3.4.2. Normal Revisions .......................................................................................................... 16
1.3.4.3. Temporary Revisions (TR) ............................................................................................ 16

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

1.3.4.4. Filing Instructions .......................................................................................................... 17

1.3.4.5. List of Effective Pages (LEP) ........................................................................................ 17

D
1.3.5. Control Pages ................................................................................................................. 17

TE
1.4. Organization Charts. ....................................................................................................... 18
1.4.1. Nominated post holders. Ref. to OM-A 1.8 .................................................................... 19
1.4.1.1 Duties and Responsibilities of each Post .......................................................................... 19

IN
1.4.1.2 Standards Flight Training ............................................................................................... 19
1.4.1.2.2 Job specifications ........................................................................................................... 19

PR
1.5. Definitions ..................................................................................................................... 20
1.6.1 Training Memo's ............................................................................................................ 25
1.7. Selection Committee. ....................................................................................................... 26

IF
1.8. Areas, Routes and Airports Categories. ........................................................................... 27
1.8.2. Airports Categories. ....................................................................................................... 27
1.8.3.
1.9.2. PY
Route Qualifications. ..................................................................................................... 28
Flight crew member. ...................................................................................................... 29
O
1.9.3. Recency of Training and Checking ............................................................................... 30
1.9.4. (Base) Training. ............................................................................................................. 30
C

1.9.5. Line Training. ................................................................................................................ 30

1.10. Pilot Returning Back from leave of absence. ................................................................ 30
D

1.11.1 Use of Pilots passed 60th birthday. ................................................................................. 35

E

1.11.2. Training by External Instructors ...................................................................................... 36

LL

1.12. Flight under Supervision................................................................................................ 37

1.13. Zero Flight Time (ZFT). (If Applicable) ....................................................................... 38
O

1.13.2. Levels of Certifications and Maneuvers Credit: ............................................................ 38

1.14. Training bag contents for simulator. .............................................................................. 40
TR

1.15. Training Time Policy. .................................................................................................... 40

1.15.1. Training Syllabus Policy ................................................................................................. 40
N

1.16. Flight Training Department General Policies. ............................................................... 41

O

1.16.2. Contact with the Authority ............................................................................................ 41

1.16.3. Instructors Meeting ........................................................................................................ 41
C

1.16.4. Segregation of Training and Checking .......................................................................... 41

N

1.16.5. Inappropriate Interference ............................................................................................. 42

U

1.16.6. Change of Instructor/Examiner...................................................................................... 42

1.16.7. Working Hours .............................................................................................................. 42
1.16.8. Instructor Evaluation Policy. ......................................................................................... 42

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

1.16.9 Instructor Certification................................................................................................... 42

1.16.10 Introduction Of A New Type Policy ............................................................................. 42

D
1.17. Processes to Communicate Flight Crew Qualifications ............................................... 43

TE
1.17.1. Air crew Licenses responsibility for renewal................................................................. 43
1.18. Training on Aircraft ....................................................................................................... 44
1.19. Language ....................................................................................................................... 45

IN
1.19.1. Induction ........................................................................................................................ 45
1.19.2. Instructors ...................................................................................................................... 45

PR
1.19.3. Recurrent Training ......................................................................................................... 46
1.19.4. English Language Test. ................................................................................................. 46
1.19.5. Test Location. ................................................................................................................ 46

IF
1.19.6. Test Results.................................................................................................................... 46
1.20. Co-Pilots Take-off and Landings................................................................................... 46
1.21.
1.22. PY
Training Records ........................................................................................................... 47
Administration ............................................................................................................... 49
O
1.22.2. Training records. ............................................................................................................ 51
1.22.3. Course Attendance Records ........................................................................................... 51
C

1.22.4. Training and Assessment Forms .................................................................................... 51

1.22.5. Certificate of Test .......................................................................................................... 51
D

1.23. Training Quality Audits. (Refer to corporate manualch.3) ........................................... 52

E

1.23.1. Quality Control of Training Courses. ........................................................................... 52

LL

1.24. Trend analysis . .............................................................................................................. 52

1.25. PAS Pilots Selection Process ....................................................................................... 52
O

1.26. Newly Hired Type rated Pilots ...................................................................................... 52

TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
TE
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION AND POLICY

1. Introduction

IN
1.1 Administration And Control Of Operations Manual Part (D)

PR
1.1.1 General.
Part D of the Operations Manual (OPERATION TRAINING MANUAL) is issued in
accordance with the EGYPTIAN CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY (ECAR 121). This manual

IF
complies with the requirements of ECAR 121, Subparts E, N, O and Appendix E, F, the
applicable ECARs and the terms and conditions of the PAS Operator’s Certificate. The format
of this manual is as specified in ECAR 121 Subpart P Section2.

PY
Operations manual Part D is for the use of those Flight Operations personnel assigned to
operational duties in connection with the training of flight, cabin crew and flight dispatcher.
O
Copies of Part D shall also be made available to non-PAS personnel who may be authorized to
carry out training on the Company’s behalf (e.g. ECAA personnel authorized to conduct check
C

or evaluation flights or subcontractor instructor).

D

It is the Company’s policy that all requirements of ECAR's are to be complied with. Moreover,
training courses and procedures are to be developed and conducted in accordance with the
E

guidance material contained in the associated regulatory Interpretive and Explanatory Material
LL

and Acceptable Means of Compliance. However, an alternative method of compliance may be

developed and implemented subject to the regulatory authority’s approval or acceptance, as
appropriate. When appropriate other reference documents may be used when designing and
O

developing training courses. The use of such reference sources is to be explicitly documented.
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 5
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.1.1.1 Document Control

TE
(REF to corporate manual )
To ensure that manual and documents used to support, control or provide guidance for the

IN
conduct of operation are relevant, valid and up to date and revised for expeditious dissemination
of information to appropriate personnel.

PR
A “Controlled Copy” mark printed on the first page of every manual indicates that the said
manual is updated, current and controlled. It bears the Document Control Number of the holder.
An “Uncontrolled Copy” mark shall be stamped over the printed “Controlled Copy” for manuals

IF
that are not updated and shall not have Document Serial Number.

PY
“CONTROLLED DOCUMENT”
O
“COPY NO ….. “
C
D

1.1.1.2 Distribution of Documents

E

The Manuals / Amendments are distributed through a process of distribution list which shall be
LL

acknowledged with the date of receipt of the manual /amendments / revisions and returned to the
Flight Training Office within period of ten (10) days. The Manager of Flight Training is
responsible for the timely distribution of the documents and to ensure the prevention of
O

unintentional use of obsolete documents and further ensure that such documents are suitably
TR

identified if they are used for any purpose.

1.1.1.3 Distribution of Information
N

PAS management will distribute urgent information (bulletins) by means of internal

memos, faxes, intranet and emails. This information will be used for a time
O

specified on the bulletins and may be later incorporated into the applicable manual.
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 6
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.1.2 Purpose of the Manual.

TE
The main objective of the flight Training Manual is to outline policies related to all training and
checking activities in order to achieve the overall goal of the air safety. The training programs
and procedures, set herein are the tools of implementing those policies.

IN
All policies shall be in accordance with the conditions contained in the Air Operator Certificate

PR
(AOC) and with the relevant provisions of EGYPTIAN CIVIL AVIATION REGULATIONS
(ECAR). In addition the Training Manual contains the applicable national rules and regulations
in addition to relevant ICAO standards and procedures for air navigation services. It reflects the
valid company policies, regulations and procedures derived from and part of the Operation

IF
Manual.
The Egyptian Civil Aviation Authority has been provided with a copy of the Training Manual,

PY
and will receive all amendments and revisions there too.
PAS Flight Training Manual will provide the following:
O
1) To ensure that flight crew proficiency is of the required standard, a variety of ground
C
and flight training schedules are set to meet the requirement of the ECAA as a
minimum.
2) Each new pilot shall attend the type rating course relevant to his previous experience.
D

3) At the end of each training course, an evaluation form will be filled by trainees.
E

4) Training Department shall monitor, record and evaluate the results of all successful
and unsuccessful ground and flight training and examination for the purpose of
LL

achieving continuous improvement of the flight crew training and evaluation program.
5) This section covers all ground and flight training programs shall ensure training is
O

conducted on the type of aircraft for which the flight crew member is assigned to
operate and shall include all initial, recurrent, transition or conversion, re-qualification,
TR

upgrade to Commander (PIC), recency, familiarization, and differences or any other

specialized training. When applicable, evaluations to ensure flight crew members are
competent to perform assigned duties.
N

6) All ground and flight training examination programs are approved by ECAA.
7) All instructors, examiners, line check airmen and flight crew (whether employed or
O

subcontracted) are trained, qualified and standardized for their assigned tasks, and
are certified by PAS and approved by ECAA when required.
C

8) The Training Manual which includes the training programs and syllabi for all initial,
N

recurrent, transition, re-qualification, upgrade, recency, familiarization, and differences

is approved by ECAA (Egyptian Civil Aviation Authority). And shall be reviewed
U

annually or when condition warrant to ensure compliance with ECAA approved

standards.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 7
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
9) Training Department shall ensure that all flight crew members receive training

TE
that supports the introduction of:
a. New policies, rules, instructions and procedures.
b. New aircraft types, systems and fleet modifications / upgrades.

IN
The content of the Training Manual shall be updated to reflect current procedures.
10) All operations personnel shall have easy access to the applicable sections of the

PR
current Training Manual.
11) Training Manual shall include curricula for ground training, simulator training, aircraft
training, examination and certification, line flying under supervision, and any
specialized training.

IF
12) Training Manual shall include comprehensive syllabi to include lesson plans,
procedures for training and the conduct of evaluations.
13) Training Manual shall include the training Programme for the development of

PY
knowledge and skills related to human performance (Crew Resource
Management, CRM).
O
14) All training facilities, devices, instructors, Check Airmen shall have the required
C
approval from the ECAA.
15) Training department shall ensure that PAS have sufficient Instructors, Examiners,
Line Check Airmen and support personnel to conduct the training and
D

examination programs.
E

16) Training Department will ensure that Instructors, Check Airmen (employed or
subcontracted) and all training facilities, course materials meet the required
LL

qualifications and performance standards.

17) Training department shall ensure that training facilities, devices and course materials
O

reflect the configuration of the fleets for which the respective training is being
conducted.
TR

18) All Flight crews (Check Airmen, Instructors, Pilots, and Trainees) shall adapt and
use only the authorized training Manuals, documents and records which are
published and submitted by Training Department.
N

19) In order to abide by OM-A policy, English & Arabic languages to be considered as
the common language throughout training and examinations.
O

20) All Examinations shall be administered by a qualified examiner.

21) All Crew members have to carry with them the required licenses/ certificates to
C

exercise their duties (as issued/ agreed by the authority ECAA).

N

22) All Crew members are responsible for the renewal of their Licenses/ certificates.
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 8
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.1.3. Editorial conventions

TE
The meaning of specific terms and definitions is in accordance with that list of definitions and
explanatory remarks contained in the Operations Manual Part D.

IN
The following definitions apply when interpreting the intent of the contents of this manual:
 “Shall” or “Must” means that the application of the criteria is mandatory

PR
 “Should” means that the application of the criteria is recommended.
 “May” means that the application of the criteria is optional.
 “Will” indicates a mandatory requirement and serves to advise that action is incumbent
on the Authority.

IF
 “The Authority” means the ECAA.
 “The Company” means PAS .

PY
 “The appropriate training manger” means the appropriate manager chosen from chief pilot.
 ‘The applicable type specific training manual” means the appropriate training
manual applicable to the aircraft type being considered.
O
 “Suitably qualified” means having the required experience, qualifications and training
to conduct training in accordance with the provisions required by the Authority.
C
 “Training Captain” is a generic term referring to a TRE, TRI.
 “Ground Instructor” is a generic term referring to an suitably qualified PI, SFI, TRI,
D

SFE, TRE or other nominated and authorized person conducting ground or classroom
based instructional duties.
E

 “Check” normally indicates that the exercise referred to is a mandatory simulator or

airplane assessment.
LL

 “Examination” normally indicates a ground based or classroom test of knowledge.

 “Evaluation” normally indicates that a non-mandatory simulator or airplane assessment.
O

 Low Visibility Operations (LVOPS) may be termed All Weather Operations (AWOPS)
in other manuals.
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 9
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.1.4. Training Manual.

TE
This is comprised all instructions and information for the training of flight operations personal
needed to conduct a safe operation. It is divided into different volumes.

IN
The ECAA approved training manual contains standards for flight crew training and
examinations including:

PR
1) Training policies/directives.
2) Comprehensive syllabus, including lesson plans, procedures for training and the
conduct for examinations.
3) Maneuver tolerances for normal and non-normal situations for training and

IF
examinations for the following flight parameters:
a) Heading

PY
b) Airspeed
c) Height/altitude
d) Course tracking
O
4) Procedures to properly train and examine abnormal and emergency conditions.
5) All simulated aircraft, weather and environmental conditions are standardized,
C
and appropriate for the training/examination being administered.
6) Limits for the number of times maneuvers may be repeated and examination
D

still considered acceptable.

7) Procedures for remedial training and subsequent examination for flight crew unable to
E

achieve or maintain required standards.

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 10
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.1.5 Training Policy

TE
1.1.5.1 In the case of a trainee’s failure
For qualification on a type, a second chance maybe given only through a committee chaired by

IN
Training Manager
 During Line Training:

PR
i. No Evaluation to continue or stop training before the training reaches half
the Limit sectors.
ii. Extension beyond the Limit sectors shall be done through a committee
chaired by Training Manager

IF
1.1.5.2 Training Retake Policy

PY
As a principal Initial / Transition training is one (1) chance training:
 In case of trainee’s failure during Initial / Transition training a committee will be formed
and chaired by training Manager to decide the remedial actions on a case by case basis.
O
 The remedial actions shall include but will not be limited to :
C
i. Time period required before the trainee could start another Initial /
Transition training
D

Note:
The policy may allow for a second chance training (Initial / Transition) based on:
E

File.
LL


 History.
 Training history.
O

 Training progress.
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 11
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.1.6. Approval and Acceptance by the Authority

TE
1.1.6.1. General
The word ‘approval’ or requirement to be ‘approved’ invariably implies that a responsible person

IN
designated by the regulatory body gives signature to a document. This document then expresses
the Authority’s legal finding and, as such, will be drawn up in accordance with the provisions of

PR
that Authority’s national law. The approval may stipulate various conditions which the Authority
wishes to attach. It follows that the Authority must first make a satisfactory technical finding
before issuing such approval. It is the Company’s policy to support the Authority’s technical
investigation by supplying statements of regulatory compliance or other such documents

IF
required by the Authority.
The expression ‘acceptable to’ refers to those subjects or proposals that the Authority may

PY
exercise greater discretion upon how its agreement is to be given.
The following courses / materials of training require regulatory approval:
O
 Flight Crew Initial, Transition and upgrade.
C
 Flight Crew Recurrent training and checking.
 Flight Crew Differences training.
 Type rating and ATPL skill tests and proficiency checks scenarios.
D

 LVOPS training and checking.

E

 Cabin Crew Initial, Conversion, Differences and Recurrent training.

 Instructor training.
LL

 Examiner training.
 Flight Dispatcher Initial, Conversion, Differences and Recurrent training.
O

 All related Ground, Simulator and flight training courses.

 Changes to approved training courses shall be approved by ECAA.
TR

 Training arrangements with other training organizations shall be

approved. All training courses / materials must:
 Meet the required qualification and performance standards;
N

 Be periodically reviewed to require compliance with approved standards.

O

Personnel nominated for the following training positions require approval from the Authority
before exercising the privileges of that position:
C

 Type rating instructor (TRI)

N

 Type rating examiner (TRE)

Simulator Flight instructor SFI
U


 Simulator Flight examiner SFE

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 12
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.2. Responsibilities

TE
1.2.1. Authority
The Operations Manual Part D is published under the authority of the Operations Manager.

IN
1.2.2. Structure and Contents

PR
The structure and contents of the Operations Manual Part D are in accordance with ECAR
121, Operations Manual, Flight Crew Training Manual , Flight Crew Operation Manual and
contain the following Chapters:

IF
 Chapter 1 : introduction and Policy
 Chapter 2 : Flight Instructor, Check Airman & Examiner

PY
 Chapter 3 : Training testing and checking process
 Chapter 4 : Ground Training
 Chapter 5 : Flight Training
O
 Chapter 6 : Basic Course AB-INITIO training
 Chapter 7 : Dispatch Training
C

 Chapter 8 : Simulator Evaluation Policy

 Chapter 9 : Cabin Crew Training Program
D

 Chapter 10: Security

 Chapter 11: Forms
E

 Appendix D
LL

1.2.3. Distribution
O

The Training Department will keep a “Master” copy of this manual that will include all
TR

Approval letters issued by the Authority. Several hard copies are distributed to selected
appointment holders and the Authority. The Company maintains an up-to-date list of manuals
together with their copy numbers and the name/appointment of each copy holder as appropriate.
N

Amendments will be issued to all such holders, who will be required to amend their copies and
return their certificates of incorporation to the Company as soon as possible after the
O

amendments have been completed. (Refer to chapter 0 for Training Manual distribution list).
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 13
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.2.4. Holder Responsibility.

TE
Each holder of the Training Manual and each person responsible for a copy of the Training
Manual in his keeping, shall revise the manual at the time specified with the amendment and
complete the record of Revision (ROR) of the Training Manual.

IN
The rules and regulations contained in the Training Manual shall be adhered to by the relevant

PR
personnel at all times, in the event of negligence or disobedience to those rules and regulations
the personnel concerned may become subject to disciplinary measures, legal or disqualification
from the training team.

IF
1.2.5. Training Philosophy
All training should be learner focused, instructor facilitated and form part of a comprehensive

PY
system of knowledge management.
All Instructors should be aware of the various processes that enhance learning and should
measure the validity and effectiveness of all training programs.
O
1.2.5.1. Mission
C

Flight Training supports the conduct of safe and efficient flight operations through integrity,
compassion, honesty (by having consistent assessment and evaluation standards), and by
D

providing training of the highest quality.

E

1.2.5.2. Values
LL

Flight Training’s values reflect those of the PAS , giving guidance to training personnel
maximizing the relationship with our customers and colleagues. Our values help our training
O

personnel respond to the challenges and opportunities they face daily, in the manner expected
of a member of the Flight Training team.
TR

1.2.5.3. Innovation
N

Flight Training builds on a strong heritage of training excellence incorporating tried and true
methods and the latest techniques available. Through research and a commitment to continuous
O

quality improvement.
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 14
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.2.5.4. Selection

TE
We select pilots of the highest caliber to be our instructors and support them to improve their
skills and knowledge. We respect our training staff for the vital role they play in supporting
flight operations and, ultimately, the continued success of the Company. We foster a working

IN
environment that encourages teamwork, loyalty and commitment to supplying the best possible
training product. We recognize our students to be aviation professionals and treat them as a

PR
collaborative partner in the training and assessment process.
1.2.5.5. Safety

IF
Focusing on quality and integrity in training design, delivery and assessment supports PAS
commitment to safety. Training personnel should seek every opportunity to improve the services
provided. We encourage and actively support constructive challenge and debate within Flight

PY
Training in order to improve safety and efficiency outcomes. We utilize proven risk
management principles to tailor the training product in order to address the Company's unique
and challenging operational environment.
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 15
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.3. System of Amendments.

TE
1.3.1. Issue.
The Operations Manual Part D is issued on the authority of PAS , and all amendments to it, as

IN
required by the Company or the Authority, shall be authorized by the Flight operation Training
Department.

PR
1.3.2. Training Directives
Details of revisions which may be urgently required in the interests of flight safety, or which
are supplementary to processes and procedures incorporated in this manual, will be

IF
promulgated as Training Directives. Those of a temporary nature will be cancelled as soon as
they are no longer relevant. Those of long-term application will be incorporated into the

PY
manual when it is next amended, or within six months of their effective date, whichever is the
sooner.
Only the Training Department is authorized to issue Training Directives and all
O
Training Directives must be approved by the operations director.
C

1.3.3. Notification to the Authority

All intended amendments and revisions must be supplied to the Authority in advance of the
D

effective date. When the amendment/revision concerns any part of the Training Manual which
E

must be approved by means of the Operations Approval document, this approval must be
obtained before the amendment or revision becomes effective. When immediate amendment or
LL

revisions are required in the interest of safety, they may be published and applied immediately,
provided that application for approval has been made.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 16
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.3.4. Amendment Process

TE
This manual shall be revised at regular intervals of 6 months by the Training Department. Six
weeks prior to the next revision cycle date, the Training Department will review the
accumulated Training Directives and determine the work schedule required to meet the

IN
deadline. Any changes in policy after this date will not be included in the revision, but rather
take the form of a Training Directive that will be incorporated at the next regular cycle.

PR
All amendments shall be in the form of printed, replacement pages for the paper copy of this
part. Revisions shall be annotated to show the month of issue (and date of effect if different).

IF
Amendments requiring immediate revision in the interest of safety shall be initiated and put
into force by an information bulletin signed by training manager, subsequently the ECAA shall
be informed immediately. Bulletins shall be followed by a formal amendment as soon as
practicable.
PY
With each normal amendment an updated "List of Effective pages" (Which forms part of the
O
Training Manual) shall be issued, which will enable the user to check whether his manual is up
- to – date or not.
C

1.3.4.1. Handwritten Amendments

D

Handwritten amendments shall not be used throughout this Manual.

E

1.3.4.2. Normal Revisions

LL

Issued periodically to cover non-urgent corrections, changes and/or to add new data. They are
accompanied by Filing instructions and an updated List of Effective Pages (LEP).
O

1.3.4.3. Temporary Revisions (TR)

TR

Temporary revisions, printed on yellow paper are issued to cover urgent matters arising
between normal revisions. They are accompanied by filing instructions.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 17
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.3.4.4. Filing Instructions

TE
Use the filing instructions as follows:
REMOVE: The page must be removed. It may be replaced by a new page if associated with an

IN
INSERT instruction. If not, the page is cancelled.
INSERT: The page must be inserted. If not associated with a REMOVE instruction, the page is

PR
new and does not replace an existing one.
1.3.4.5. List of Effective Pages (LEP)

IF
The manual after revision must comply with the LEP, which lists all the pages that are in the
manual. The new pages are indicated by ‘N’ and the revised pages by ‘R’.

PY
1.3.5. Control Pages
Several control pages are inserted into the manual immediately preceding the Master Table of
Contents. These pages are inserted in the following order:
O
 ECAA Control Page
C

 List of Effective Pages

 Record of Revision
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 18
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.4. Organization Charts.

TE
1.4.0 PAS Flight Operations FW Organization Chart.

IN
Accountable Executive

PR
IF
Assistance General Manager Flight Operations
Flight Operations for General Manager Chief Pilot
Crew Training

PY EXAMINERS
O
Training CHECK AIRMEN
Staff INSTRUCTORS
C

SENIOR
CAPTAINS
E D

LINE CAPTAINS
LL

FIRST OFFICERS
O
TR

Flight Schedules Assistance General

Assistance General Manager Assistance General Manager
Manager Planning & Follow Up Manager Flight Operations
Reporting for Cabin Crew
N
O

Flight Schedules
Staff REPORTING Planning & CC
C

Follow Up Staff
Staff
Staff
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 19
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.4.1. Nominated post holders. Ref. to OM-A Ch.1

TE
1.4.1.1 Duties and Responsibilities of each Post

Refer to Manager Job Description in the OM-A (Ch.1).

IN
1.4.1.2 OPERATIONS GENERAL MANAGER ASSISTANT FOR F/W TRAINING

PR
Refer to Manager Job Description in the OM-A (1.9.1).

IF
1.4.1.3 Check Airman/ Examiner: Refer to OM-A (Ch.1) & Training Manual(Ch. 2).

1.4.1.4 Instructor Pilot: Refer to OM-A (Ch.1) & Training Manual (Ch. 2).

PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 20
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.5. Definitions

TE
Airplane
Groups

IN
 Group I. Propeller driven, Including-Reciprocating powered, and Turbo-propeller powered.
 Group II. Turbojet power.

PR
Base Month "Training/Checking"
The calendar month during which a Crewmember or Dispatcher is due to receive required
recurrent training, required flight check and required Proficiency Check.

IF
Calendar Month

PY
The first day through the last day of a particular month.
Grace Period
O
It is a period of three calendar months as follows:
C
 The calendar month before the Base Month,
 The Base Month,
 The calendar month after the Base Month.
D

During this period, a Flight Crew or Dispatcher must receive recurrent training, flight Check,
E

Proficiency Check to remain in qualified status. Training or Checking completed during grace
period is considered to be completed during the Base Month “training/checking month”.
LL

Example
O

A Flight Crew or Dispatcher whose base month is January receives the required recurrent
training in February; January remains the base month “training/checking month”. Also, if a
TR

Crewmember or Dispatcher fails to complete the required training during the base month, the
Crewmember or Dispatcher is not in violation of ECARS since the month following the Base
N

Month is still considered part of the Grace Period.

O

Difference Training
C

The training required for crewmembers and dispatchers that qualified and served on a
particular type airplane, when difference training is necessary before a crew member serves in
N

the same capacity on a particular variation of that type.

U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 21
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
Initial Training

TE
The training required for crewmembers and dispatchers who have not qualified and served in the
same capacity on other airplane of the same group.

IN
E.g. newly hired pilots with no past experience.

PR
Transition Training
The training required for crewmembers and dispatchers who have qualified and served in the
same capacity on other airplane of the same group.

IF
Cross Crew Qualification (CCQ)
The training required for crew members rated on one type and experienced on that type (at least

PY
6 months ) to be promoted to one other type .
Upgrade Training
O
The training required for crewmembers that have qualified and served as Second in Command
C
on a particular airplane type before they serve as Pilot in Command on that type.
In-Flight Training (Base Training)
D

Refer to maneuvers, procedures or functions that must be conducted in the airplane.

E

Recurrent Training
LL

Recurrent training must ensure that each crewmember or dispatcher is adequately trained and
currently proficient with respect to the type aircraft (including differences training, if applicable)
O

and crewmember position involved.

TR

The above mentioned recurrent training shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of
ECARs subpart N.
N

Ground Training
O

Ground training shall include the following:

C

 General subjects required by ECARs.

 Emergency equipment and evacuation procedures (Safety Training).
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 22
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
Safety and Emergency Procedures (SEP)

TE
Ground and practical programmed training given as required enabling pilots and cabin crew to
reach and maintain the required level of proficiency in using emergency equipment and
performing emergency procedures.

IN
Proficiency Check

PR
It is a check, to be carried out every 6 calendar months in the simulator. For all pilots.
Proficiency check is a requirement for license renewal.

IF
Line Check
A check on the line, minimum two (2) sectors (1PF & 1PM), or one (1) sector for flights more than 4 hours.

PY
Line check could be annual, final, during instructor selection process, after route qualification,
during re-qualification process, or due to a training committee recommendation.
O
Annual line check is to be carried out once every 12 calendar months for pilots, Line Check is a
requirement for license renewal.
C

Line Check in general term should be oriented to check the compliance of Flight Crews with the
Flight Operations Manual (OM-A) and FCOM.
E D

Random Checks
LL

Random checks are company requirements to observe crew compliance with PAS standard
operating procedures, during line operation when they are not under any scheduled checks or
training.
O

To check flight crew compliance with standard policies and procedures laid down in Flight
TR

Operations Manual (OM-A) and FCOM.

To check the performance of newly promoted Captains, especially with low command or route
N

experience.
O

Programmed hours
C

 The Hrs. of training prescribed in a specific training program.

 The program Hrs. may be reduced by the ECAA upon submitting a request by PAS Training
N

Manager Explaining and Justified circumstances

U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 23
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
A complete list of abbreviations appears in Operation Manual. The following

TE
abbreviations appear in this part:
LC – Line Check (see also ALC and PC)
ACAS – Airborne Collision
LIFUS – Line Flying Under Supervision

IN
Avoidance System
LOFT – Line Oriented Flight Training
AFM - Airplane Flight Manual
LOS – Line Oriented Simulation

PR
A AOC - Air Operator Certificate L
LOSA – Line Operations Safety Audits
ATPL – Airline Transport Pilot
LPC – License Proficiency Check
License
LT – Line Training
AWO – All Weather Operations
LVOPS – Low Visibility Operations

IF
MEL – Minimum Equipment List
B-RNAV – Basic Area Navigation MNPS – Minimum Navigation Performance
B M

PY
BT – Base Training Specification
MTOW – Maximum Take-Off Weight
CBT – Computer Based Training
O
CCQ – Cross Crew Qualification
CDL - Configuration Deviation List
C
CFE – Certified Flying Examiner OM-A – Operations Manual Part A (General /
CFI – Certified Flying Instructor Basic)
Chief pilot – Chief Pilot OM-D – Operations Manual Part D (Training
D

C O
CM 1 – Pilot In Command Manual)
E

CM 2 – Co-Pilot OPC – Operator Proficiency Check

CPL – Commercial Pilot License
LL

CRM- Crew Resource Management

O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 24
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
TE
RCU – Route Clearance Unit
ECAA – Egyptian Civil Aviation RHS – Right Hand Seat
Authority RNAV – Area Navigation

IN
ECARS – Egyptian Civil RNP – Required Navigation Performance
E Aviation Regulations R
RVSM – Reduced Vertical Separation

PR
ETOPS – Extended Twin (Engine) Minima
Operations

FAA – Federal Aviation Authority SEP – Safety and Emergency Procedures

IF
FAA AC – FAA Advisory Circular SET – Simulator Examiner Training
FANS – Future Air Navigation SFE – Simulator Flight Examiner

PY
System SFI – Simulator Flight Instructor
F S
FBS – Fixed Base simulator SIT – Simulator Instructor Training
FCOM – Flight Crew Operations
Manual
O
FFS – Full Flight Simulator
C
TC – Training Captain
TCAS – Traffic Collision Avoidance System
GNSS – Global Navigation Satellite TRC – Training Review Committee
D

G System T TRE – Type Rating Examiner

E

GPS – Global Positioning System TREL – TRE Line Training

TRI – Type Rating Instructor
LL

TRIL – TRI Line Training

H HOT – Hold Over Time Y
O

IOE – Initial Operating Experience ZFT – Zero Flight Time

I IP – Instructor Pilot Z
TR

IR – Instrument Rating
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 25
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.6. Training Review Committee (TRC)

TE
The Training Review Committee (TRC) meets every 6 months to review trends and evaluation
of the training program that includes as a minimum the monitoring, recording and evaluation of

IN
successful and unsuccessful flight crew evaluation and feedback from the outputs of the training
and assessment systems. The committee’s prime responsibility is to address training system

PR
issues and improvements related to trend analysis of training system output and audit activities.
The committee represents fleet, training, audit and safety interests. The committee also
addresses the impact of regulatory, procedural, technical, fleet and schedule change as well as

IF
international best practice upon future training requirements. The committee shall review the
training plane for the next six months to decide the sufficient number of instructors, examiners,
line check Airman and the support personal to conduct the training and examination programs.

 Operations Training Manager

PY
The TRC will be comprised of the following personnel:
O
 Operations General Manager.
C
 Chief pilot.
 Instructor(s) and / or Examiner(s).
 Flight crew members.
E D

Chief Pilot shall attend the TRC regular meeting even if he is not an instructor, he shall be
responsible to transfer technical and meeting materials to update the flight crew.
LL

1.6.1 Training Memo's

O

Upon receiving of a new policy or rule, a training MEMO of information shall be sent to the
instructors before it is documented in the OM -D.
TR

Training Memos or Bulletins shall be sent via Emails to the instructors, and it’s their
responsibility to check the email on routine Basis. At least once every 24hrs.
N

It is published and distributed in the simulator’s documents by type personnel for a period of 3
O

month or until it is documented in the OM-D.

C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 26
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.6.2 Training Material Review Policy

TE
Training Manual and Training
Memos

IN
The Training Manual (OM -D) should be reviewed every six months or when needed by a
committee composed of:

PR
 Training Manager
 Standardization Responsible of training.
 Staff Responsible for updating and editing.

IF
The Training Manual (OM -D) comprises the following:

PY
 Training manual chapters.
 Training forms.
 Training Memo’s.
O
 Appendixes.
C
Using Training Hand Outs Policy.
No personal training papers prepared by Instructors shall be used as briefing notes and
D

distributed to trainees unless prepared with and approved by the training department.
E

1.7. Selection Committee.

LL

Purpose: -
1) Hiring New Pilots
O

2) Upgrading F/O’S
TR

3) Selecting, Training and checking of instructors, check airmen & Examiners

4) Doing all necessary Evaluation for the pilots.
N

Composition.
O

The selection committee, as appropriate, will comprise of the following members:

1) Operations General Manager
C

2) Flight Training Manager

N

3) Operations Safety Representative

4) Administration representative
U

5) Chief Pilot

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 27
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.8. Areas, Routes and Airports Categories.

TE
1.8.1. General.
All PAS Pilots must get current information concerning areas, routes and airports over which

IN
they are to fly, and to each airport and terminal area into which they operate while ensuring that
they have adequate knowledge and ability to use this available information.

PR
PAS shall ensure each pilot, prior to being used as PIC in operations, is currently qualified for
operations into airports of intended landing in areas, on routes or route segments to be used in
operations for PAS . If an instrument approach is required into an airport for which the PIC has

IF
not made an actual approach, the PIC shall be accompanied by a pilot flight crew member or
pilot observer on the flight deck who is qualified for the airport unless either:

PY
a. The approach to the airport is not over difficult terrain and the instrument approach
procedures and aids available are similar to those with which the pilot is familiar, and
the normal operating minima are adjusted by a process that adds a margin of safety that
O
is approved or accepted by ECAA, or there is reasonable certainty that the approach and
landing can be made in visual meteorological conditions, or
C
b. Descent from the initial approach altitude to landing at the airport can be made by day
in VMC, or
c. PAS qualifies the PIC to land at the airport by means a pictorial representation
D

approved or accepted by the authority (Jeppesen Instrument Approach Charts)

E

d. The airport is adjacent to another airport at which the PIC is currently qualified to land.
LL

On all other routes and in exceptional circumstances the chief pilot is authorized to permit a
captain to operate in command on a sector without having completed a route experience flight.
O

When such authority is exercised chief pilot will notify captains in writing.
TR

1.8.2. Airports Categories.

 Airports category A
 Airports category B
N

 Airports category C
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 28
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.8.3. Route Qualifications.
Route qualification shall be conducted by one of the following methods:

TE
Airport Class (A) By self-briefing.

IN
Airport Class (B) By self-briefing with route documentation or by means of
programmed instruction.

PR
Airport Class (C) By means of programmed instruction and briefing in the (Special
routes and airports).
And

IF
In-flight familiarization with a route and type qualified Instructor
Pilot (IP), supervisor or a senior captain.

PY Or
Familiarization in an approved flight simulator, using a database of
O
the route. With full customized visual details for airport concerned.
C

1.8.3.1. A captain qualified on a route and airport class A in a specified area shall be
D

qualified to operate as a Pilot in Command on all airports in this area provided that they are
E

of the same class.

LL

1.8.3.2 Routes and/or airports qualification are not related to aircraft type and are valid for a
period of twelve (12) calendar months, and if not flown within (12) calendar months, a
requalification on the Route and Airport is required.
O

1.8.3.3. Operating on the route and / or airport within the previous period of validity (12
TR

months) will revalidate routes and/or airports competence.

1.8.3.4 Area, Route and Airport Qualification form must be completed, signed and entered in
N

the F/O’s file before line check flight takes place for flying to category C airport.
O

1.8.3.5 The Training Manager may conduct an additional line check to specific
route/airport based on special nature of that route or airport and weather.
C

1.8.3.6 Flight Crew shall be considered qualified on routes and airports which has been
N

flown during IOE and USV, however chief pilot may randomly check the performance of the
U

newly promoted Captains on case by case bases, also Chief pilot shall conduct route
qualification to the Flight Crew on special routes.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 29
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.9. Recent Experience.

TE
(Ref. ECAR 121.439)
1.9.1. General

IN
Company pilots who are type qualified and hold a type rating endorsement on their license, but
have not flown in an operational capacity on type or has not made at least three takeoffs landing

PR
for 28 days and not exceeding 90 days and at least has previously logged 100 hours of flight
time in the same type aircraft in which he is serve are subject to the requirements listed in OM-
A Ch.5 For regaining Recency.

IF
Should a line check or line training be required then the specific requirements, in accordance
with the minimum requirements tabulated below, should be recommended by Chief pilot.

PY
For revalidation after not performing a take-off and landing, in any PAS aircrafts for which the
pilot holds or has held a type rating, in the previous 90 days or more, the following apply:
O
1.9.2. Flight crew member.
C
Flight crew member shall perform under the supervision of a check airman at least three takeoffs
and landing using the company aircraft or in a visual simulator approved level D.
D

a. When a visual simulator is used, takeoffs and landing maneuvers must include:
 At least one takeoff with a simulated failure of one power plant.
E

 At least one landing from an ILS approach to the lowest ILS minimum authorized for
LL

PAS .
 At least one landing to a full stop.
b. A required pilot cockpit crewmember who performs the maneuvers prescribed above of
O

this section in a visual simulator must:

1) Have previously logged 100 hours of flight time in the same type aircraft in which he is
TR

to serve; and
2) The flight crew shall be observed on the first two takeoffs and landing in line operation
by an approved check airman who acts as pilot in command and occupies a pilot seat.
N

The landing must be made in a weather minimum that are not less than PAS minimum in
O

the operations specifications, and must be made within 45 days following completion of
the simulator training.
C

c. When using a simulator to accomplish any of the requirements of paragraph (a) or (b) of
this section, each required cockpit crewmember position must be occupied by an
N

appropriately qualified person and the simulator must be operated as if in a normal in-
U

flight environment without use of the repositioning features of the simulator.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 30
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
d. A check airman who observes the takeoffs and landings prescribed in paragraphs

TE
(b)(1) and (c) of this section shall certify that the person being observed is proficient
and qualified to perform flight duty in operations under this Part and may require any
additional maneuvers that are determined necessary to make this certifying statement.

IN
1.9.3. Recency of Training and Checking
In general, should the Recency requirements listed below not be met, a successful re-

PR
qualification check shall be completed prior to undertaking further training/examining duties.
If no training/checking events have been conducted during the preceding 24 months, the
complete qualification process shall be undertaken.

IF
Further specific minimum requirements associated with revalidation or the maintenance of
instructor/examiner Recency are also listed below.
1.9.4. (Base) Training.
PY
O
Base training shall be conducted within a period that shall not exceed 21 days after completing
the simulator training.
C

1.9.5. Line Training.

D

If more than 90 days has passed before the start of line training, the provisions of re-
qualifications set forth in item 1.11. Table 1 shall be applied.
E
LL

1.10. Pilot Returning Back from leave of absence.

Pilots returning from a period of absence will be required to undergo different individual re-
qualification procedure according to their flying status during the period of leave as follows:
O

1.10.1. Pilots who were not flying at all during their absence.
TR

Provisions of re-qualification item 1.10. and table (1) shall

apply
N

1.10.2. Pilots who during their absence were flying the same aircraft type and still have a
O

valid license and type rating with recent experience.

C

Requirements for re-qualification

N

 Line check (minimum 2 sectors)

U

 Re-qualification on routes if applicable.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 31
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.10.3. Pilots flying the same a/c type, but have only a foreign license for that type with

TE
recent experience.
Requirements for re-qualification:

IN
 Re-validation of his Egyptian license.
 Line check (minimum 2 sectors)

PR
 Re-qualification on routes if applicable.

IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 32
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
Table (1): Requirements (REF. ECAR 121.428)

TE
Re-qualification curriculums for cockpit crew members overdue training

IN
Required flight
Time past Required ground Additional qualification
re-qualification

PR
month due re-qualification segment Segments
segment

The modules not

Up to 12

IF
The portion of ground The elements not accomplished in
calendar Recurrent training not accomplished when due: the eligibility
Proficiency check.

PY
months accomplished when due.
Period: Line check or special
airports.
O
All qualification
16 hours including
C
8 Hours modules of the
12 to 35
safety and emergency
Including proficiency transition curriculum,
D

months training hands on.

check.
Line check, or special
E

airports. Airports.
LL

24 hours Including All qualification

O

16 hours modules of the transition

36 to 59 HAZMAT, safety and
TR

emergency training hands Including curriculum, line check,

months on.
Proficiency check. Or special airports.
N
O

More than
--Same as initial equipment training --
C

59 months
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 33
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
Re-qualification curriculums for cabin crewmembers overdue training

TE
Time elapsed
without exercising Valid license Non valid license
license privilege

IN
91 days – 12 4 sectors with a certified trainer and a Recurrent 12 month or 24 month

PR
months competency check. depending on his last recurrent.

12 months – up to A recurrent 24-month and 4 sectors with a certified trainer and a competency

IF
36 months check.

- Initial general emergency training on A/C types.

more than 36
months PY
- A tailored basic indoctrination program & civil aviation regulations.
O
- 10 sectors and competency check on one A/C type, in addition to 4 sectors
and competency check on each A/C type required with certified trainer
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 34
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
Re-qualification curriculums for aircraft dispatcher

TE
Re qualification Training

IN
Time past month due Ground Training Qualification

Up to 3 calendar months Any training not accomplished in

PR
Recurrent training ( if not
eligibility: CC or OF
accomplished in eligibility period)

8 hours remedial and ( if not

IF
More than 3 and less than 6 CC and (if not accomplished in
accomplished in eligibility period )
months eligibility OF
recurrent training

More than 6 and less than 12 PY

8 hours remedial ,recurrent training,
CC and OF
O
months and OJT to proficiency
C
D

More than 12 and less than 16 hours remedial ,recurrent

CC and OF
36 months training, and OJT to proficiency
E
LL

More than 36 months Initial training CC and OF

O
TR

KEY : CC = Competency check

OF = Operational familiarization
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 35
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.11. Use of Simulator Instructor passed 60th birthday.

TE
(Ref. ECAR 121.412 (d))
A Simulator instructor may be used for simulator training duties provided that approval has

IN
been gained from the appropriate authority ECAA. No special requirements are needed from
PAS expect the same requirement needed for renewal his/her instructor / examiner licenses

PR
from the ECAA.
PAS will provide the ground, simulator training and flight familiarization for him/her to
validate him/her licenses.

IF
1.11.1 Use of Pilots passed 60th birthday.
A person who has reached his or her 60th birthday, but has not reached his or her 65th birthday,

PY
shall not act as Pilot In Command as a required flight crewmember of an aircraft unless the other
pilot engaged in the same flight has not reached his or her 60th birthday.
O
Regarding the age requirements established by Country regulations over which PAS aircraft
C
shall fly or land, must be fulfilled and monitored.
ECAA may allow a person has reached his (her) 60th birthday, but has not reached his (her)
D

65th birthday, to act a flight crewmember on any aircraft engaged in international commercial
and transport operations.
E

PAS shall not:

LL

 Hire any person to serve as a pilot over 60th year’s age, unless authorization is issued by
O

the ECAA to PAS for each person once after reaching his or her 60th birthday and once
each year when reaching his or her 63rd birthday.
TR

 Assign any pilot that has reached his or her 60th birthday with any kind of duties except
actual flying duties on PAS aircraft, Max flying hours for pilots over 60 years is 75% of
normal pilot as mentioned at OMA chapter 7 (flight limitations).
N

 Pilot that has reached his or her 60th birthday may serve as flight instructor, check airman
or designated pilot examiner on simulator or PAS aircraft.
O

 Such person shall meet all requirements to act in the capacity of flight crewmember,
including meeting the requirements of class I medical assessment not less than once every
C

six calendar months.

N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 36
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.11.2. Training by External Instructors

TE
The Training Department may authorize the use of external instructors for training. External
instructors will only be utilized for training duties. The Company Examiners will carry out all
required checking. In all cases, the Company will retain responsibility for the standards of

IN
training.

PR
Training Department shall check all documents and license are approved and valid by the
authority for the subcontracted instructors.
For flight instructor designated by manufacturer, they only require an instructor pilot license

IF
validation from ECAA.
Approval requirements to use foreign instructors:

PY
 A copy of the instructor license will be attached to the Approval request to the ECAA.
 If simulator training only is required, the training can be started after receiving the
approval from the ECAA.
O
 Instructors are periodically evaluated to ensure compliance with required qualification
and performance standards.
C

 In case Flight Training (ZFTT) or Line Training is required the following procedures
shall apply: -
E D

Administration Procedures
LL

 Security Release
 Work Permit / Resident Visa.
 Insurance Release.
O

 Medical Check.
 License validation from ECAA.
TR

Technical Procedures
N

 Basic Indoctrination (Refer to OM -D Chapter 4).

O

 Line Check of minimum 4 sectors (line check could include Area, Route and
C

Airport Qualification for type).

N

Note: Only after completion of the administration procedures may the Technical
U

procedures could be carried out.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 37
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.12. Flight under Supervision

TE
1.12.1. General
Upon the recommendation of the safety committee, a flight or a series of flights may be required

IN
as a form of additional training before a person may be released as an active crew member.
Cases requiring flight under supervision are stated below, but not limited to:

PR
 If required for re-qualification.
 Unsatisfactory proficiency check.
 Unsatisfactory line check.

IF
 Crew member involved in accident/incident due to a poor standard of conduct.
Note: The instructor pilot/Check Airman shall normally occupy the observer seat. The captain
flying under supervision shall occupy the left seat acting as pilot-in-command however, the

PY
IP/Check Airman shall relieve him from command whenever safety is in question.
Line flying under supervision shall include specialized training in the following areas:
O
 Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM).
C
 Required Navigation Performance (RNP).
D

Line flying under supervision for Co-pilot shall include amount of PF/PM duties sufficient
E

to develop and display proficiency.

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 38
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.13. Zero Flight Time

TE
(ZFT). (If Applicable)
1.13.1. General

IN
Statistics on commercial jet transport accident and incidents shows the importance of flight path
control during the critical phases of flight when the airplane is close to ground. Although only

PR
5% of the flight time is spent in takeoff, initial climb, final approach and landing, these phases
of flight together account for more than 60% of all commercial jet transport accidents.
Bearing in mind the above mentioned statistics, and also the very high number of actual

IF
aircraft training accidents in commercial jet transport industry during last three decades, we
can see the very high safety hazard during a touch and go maneuver.

PY
In the old days, flight simulator and visual systems were not able to meet the requirement to
simulate takeoff and landing maneuvers. That is why we were conducting aircraft base
training as a part of type rating certification requirements.
O
Due to the huge advancement in flight simulators in the last 30 years, most of the flight
C

maneuvers required for type rating can be conducted in flight simulators, depending on its level
of certification.
D

1.13.2. Levels of Certifications and Maneuvers Credit:

E

A. Simulator Level C (or Equivalent):

LL

All maneuvers required for type rating initial training, transition training, takeoffs and
landings shall be credited in lieu of the aircraft except walk around which can be conducted by
O

using a slide presentation.

B. Simulator Level D (or Equivalent):
TR

All maneuvers required for type rating initial training, transition training, including takeoffs
and landings shall be credited in lieu of the aircraft except walk around which can be
conducted by using a slide presentation.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 39
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1) Base training shall be conducted in flight simulators Level D for type rating

TE
initial training.
2) ZFTT shall be conducted in flight simulators level D for type rating initial training.
3) ZFTT shall be conducted after successful completion of the type rating

IN
proficiency check.
4) ZFTT syllabus and training conditions are the same for Captains and F/O’s Refer
to BASE TRAINING FORM (ZERO FLIGHT TIME).

PR
5) Zero flight time consists of minimum 1:30 hrs. Training & 00:30 minutes zero flight
time check and shall be conducted by Check Airmen or Examiners.
6) A total of three manually controlled landings must be conducted in normal
landing configuration without ILS reference.

IF
7) One engine out landing must be conducted during zero flight time rating check.
8) In case of un-satisfactory result in the ZFTT remedial action should be given

PY
only through a committee chaired by training manager.

Note:-
O
 Zero Flight Time Shall be done under the supervision of an evaluator (Check airman
C
or Examiner) Approved by PAS and ECAA.
 Minimum pilot experience: - commercial pilot license
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 40
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.14. Training bag contents for simulator.

TE
1) 2 sets of simulator approach charts
2) FCOM
3) QRH

IN
4) MEL
5) Simulator MEL

PR
1.15. Training Time Policy.
 Training time shall not be reduced without prior approval.
 An approval from Training Manager is required if additional training time is required

IF
during Initial, Upgrade, and Recurrent Training.
 Additional training in excess of 4 hrs. Shall be approved only by training Committee.
 Trainee Pilots (Maximum 4 hrs. per day as PF and/or PM).

PY
 Instructor Pilots (4 hrs. per day and may be increased to 6 hrs. as a Maximum).
 Provisions of Flight Time, Duty Time and Rest period shall be applied (Refer to OM
A- chapter 7).
O
1.15.1. Training Syllabus Policy
C

 Instructor Pilot/Check Airman shall adhere to the training syllabus without additions
nor omissions.
D

 Instructor Pilot/Check Airman shall adhere to FCOM, SOP. Operation and Training Manuals.
 Training time cannot be reduced without a previous approval.
E

 IF additional training is required during Initial, Transition or upgrade Training, no

LL

approval is needed up to 4 hours. Additional training in excess of 4 hours will be subject

to Chief Pilot’s approval.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 41
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.16. Flight Training Department General Policies.

TE
1.16.1. Communication Protocol
PAS shall permits formal and regular communication between and among management,

IN
instructors, examiners, line check airman and flight crew (via approved PAS communication
tools) to achieve continuous improvement of ground, simulator and aircraft training, and line

PR
operations.
The normal communication protocol within Flight Training is through your respective manger or
his deputy.

IF
1.16.2. Contact with the Authority
The normal procedure for contact with the Authority is via chief pilot who will liaise

PY
with Operations Director.
1.16.3. Instructors Meeting
O
 Training Review Committee meeting to discuss standardization and training matters
relevant to the fleet.
C

 Chief pilot shall ensure that each Instructor/ Check Airman attend at least one meeting
per year.
D

 Minutes of the meeting shall be distributed to all Instructors and Check Airmen, and
relevant issues shall be circulated to concerned crew members.
E
LL

1.16.4. Segregation of Training and Checking

If necessary, with the approval of Operations Director, training duties may be assigned to a
O

TRE. With the exception of recurrent, Recency, familiarization, differences or other specified
training, trainees shall not be trained and examined by the same person. It is not a policy for
TR

managers to be checked by other managers.

N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 42
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.16.5. Inappropriate Interference

TE
Instructors and Examiners shall not be subjected to inappropriate interference from management
and/or external organizations.

IN
1.16.6. Change of Instructor/Examiner
A trainee may request a change of Instructor/Examiner. Each request will be dealt with by

PR
the appropriate Operations Director or chief pilot.
1.16.7. Working Hours
Normal working hours for Office Duties and Projects are:

IF
Sun – Thu: 0800 - 1600

PY
1.16.8. Instructor Evaluation Policy.
Each instructor shall be evaluated as follows:
O
1) Annual check on his performance by company approved instructor/ examiner.
2) A copy of his reports shall be filed back for inspection by chief pilots.
C

1.16.9 Instructor Certification

D

Required instructors certification and approval or acceptance from the state shall be kept in the
E

instructors file in the training department.

LL

1.16.10 Introduction Of A New Type Policy

When a new type is introduced to PAS the following procedures apply:
O
TR

1) A contract between PAS and the company offering the new type, in this contract the
number of crewmembers to be trained by the offering company is stated.
2) A meeting is organized between the offering company of the new type and training
N

manager before the new type first aircraft delivery by at least 6 months to prepare
for crew training.
O

3) After this meeting, the training process starts so that crewmembers are ready with
first aircraft delivery.
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 43
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.17. Processes to Communicate Flight Crew Qualifications to Scheduling Department.

TE
1) The instructor hands over crew training form indicating that the crew have
completed satisfactory certain type of training to Flight Training Administration.
2) The Flight Training Administration shall responsible to submit a Flight

IN
Crew qualification change form to Scheduling department.

PR
1.17.1. Air crew Licenses responsibility for renewal
Flying staff are personally responsible for ensuring that their professional licenses are kept
currently valid in accordance with regulations in relation to the appropriate license which may
be, for the time being, in force.

IF
Minimum Requirements for Renewal of a Professional Pilot's License:

PY
 An applicant for renewal of a Commercial or Airline Transport Pilot's License shall certify
on the official form of application that he has, during the preceding six months completed
not less than six landings in each class of aircraft for which the license is valid. He should
O
have passed the prescribed medical examination.
 To retain a type in Part 1 (pilot-in-command) of the aircraft rating of a license, the six hours
C
specified above shall have been completed as pilot-in-command or as certified co-pilot
performing under supervision as pilot-in-command. In addition one flight, including take-
D

off and landing, as pilot-in-command, or as certified co-pilot performing under supervision

as pilot-in-command, shall have been carried out in the type of aircraft concerned during the
E

preceding twelve months.

 Time spent as co-pilot performing under supervision as pilot-in-command, will be
LL

credited only if has been carried out in accordance with the conditions outlined in
subparagraph.
O

 To retain a type in Part 2 (co-pilot) of the aircraft rating of a license, the hours specified
above may have been completed as co-pilot, and the take-offs and landings may have
TR

been performed under the supervision of pilot-in-command.

 If for any reason a pilot finds that he does not possess the necessary minimum flying
experience for the renewal of his license or maintenance of his current type rating in -Part
N

1, he shall inform the Chief Pilot without delay so that arrangements can be made for the
necessary experience to be obtained.
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 44
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.18. Training on Aircraft

TE
The following Training / Examining exercises are permitted on Public Transport Flights:
 Line flying under supervision

IN
 Supernumerary flying for the purposes of familiarization on an aircraft type. Pilots flying
on supernumerary fights are required to have the normal operation of the aircraft systems
demonstrated to them. Supernumerary pilots are not to occupy a crew member’s seat

PR
 Familiarization flights along routes and into Airfields designated Cat A, B & C in the
Route Manual
 Line Checks

IF
PAS shall ensure that no abnormal or emergencies training exercise are simulated
during commercial air transport flights.

PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 45
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.19. Language

TE
All Flight Operations and training activities are conducted in English and Arabic.
PAS shall require for all flight members, who conduct flight into areas where English is the

IN
primary language of Air Traffic Control (ATC) and whose duties include communication with
ATC, to demonstrate a sufficient level (min 4) of English Language proficiency to ensure

PR
effective communication during performance of such duties and Understand information in the
OM pertaining to duties and responsibilities.
Note: - Level 4 is subject to evaluation every 3 years, level 5 every 5 years while level 6 has

IF
no further evaluation.
1.19.1. Induction

PY
As part of the recruitment process, pilots will be tested by Operations Director, chief pilot to
ensure effective English language verbal and written communication skills. Cadet pilots obtain
a minimum standard using the ICAO standard.
O
1.19.2. Instructors
C

All instruction is undertaken in English. New instructors are assessed on their ability to use
effective English language verbal and written skills.
D

instructors and evaluators whose native language is not English will complete an evaluation
E

prior to being assigned to operational duties to demonstrate a level of proficiency in English

LL

language to ensure that flight crew members are able to:

1) Effectively communicate during the performance of operational duties;
O

2) Understand information in the OM pertaining to duties and responsibilities.

TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 46
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.19.3. Recurrent Training

TE
No formal language recurrent training is provided to pilots, however all documents, instruction
and exams are written and conducted in English. Should a language problem be identified, the
Training Department will arrange for appropriate remedial training until a satisfactory standard

IN
is reached.

PR
1.19.4. English Language Test.
All PAS Pilot Crew Members and instructors must demonstrate sufficient level of proficiency
in aviation English Language with a minimum of level 4 according to ICAO.

IF
1.19.5. Test Location.
Egypt air training center
1.19.6. Test Results.
70% is the minimum passing grade. PY
O
C

1.20. Co-Pilots Take-off and Landings.

D

An aircraft commander is authorized to allow, at his discretion, a Co-pilot to carry out take-
offs and landings under supervision.
E

Newly promoted captains must, however have more than 100 hours experience in command
LL

prior to allowing co-pilots to carry out take-offs and landings.

All take-offs and landings carried out by a co-pilot shall be from the right hand seat and with: -
O

1) Dry Runway
TR

2) Cross wind comp less than 15 KT

3) CAT I Airports.
N

Note:
O

 The ultimate responsibility of the safety of the aircraft rest with the pilot in
command, regardless of who is at the controls.
C

 Not with standing the foregoing, the pilot-in-command must take over all flying duties in
N

the event of any malfunctions.

U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 47
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.21. Training Records
The Company is required to maintain complete records of all training and checking which

TE
must be certified by the instructor or check airman and available for inspection by the
Authority.

IN
Flight Training stores the following information and documentation in original form, for the
periods shown in the table below. Furthermore, a copy of the documents marked with an
asterisk shall also be sent to the Authority for their records.

PR
INFORMATION/DOCUMENTATION PERIOD STORED FOR RESPONSIBLE
PERSON

IF
License As Long As The Flight
Crew Member Is

PY
Exercising The Privileges Refer to OM-A
Of The License For The
Company.
O
Basic indoctrination records;
C

Initial qualification records; Permanently during

Training Department
individual employment
D

Transition and upgrade training records;

and Initial Operating Experience
E

Training And Checking Records 3 Years Training Department

LL

Upgrade Command Course Training and

3 Years Training Department
Checking Records
O

Recurrent Training And Checking

TR

Includes:
N

Combined Operator Proficiency Check /

License Proficiency Check
O

3 Years Training Department

Instrument Rating Revalidation / Renewal
C

Annual Line Check

N

Triennial Emergency And Safety

U

Ground And Refresher Training

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 48
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
TE
Training and qualification for
Permanently during
specific operations. ( RVSM, TCAS, Training Department
individual employment

IN
EGPWS,….etc.)
Training And Checking To Operate In
3 Years Training Department

PR
Either Pilot’s Seat
Recent Experience 15 Months Training Department

IF
Route And Aerodrome Competence 3 Years Training Department

Dangerous Goods Training 3 Years Training Department

CRM
SMS
PY 3 Years
3 Years
Training Department
Training Department
O
Security training 3 Years Training Department
C

Pilots evaluation & monitoring 12 months Training Department

E D
LL

 The electronic copies for all records are backed-up automatically every 24 hours according to the
company I.T system for the electronic back up.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 49
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.22. Administration

TE
1.22.1 General.
Training Department is responsible for ensuring that all supporting documentation, including

IN
record keeping forms, assessment forms, student notes, instructor guides and notes, and all
courseware associated with the training courses and programs described in this manual are

PR
current and sufficient for the purpose.
The Flight Training Administration will issue a periodically (four weeks ahead) crew-training
status covering ground, simulator and flight training to:

IF
 Flight Operation Director.
 Chief pilots.

PY
 Flight Crew Planning and scheduling department.

The Flight Training Administration is responsible for the monitoring compilation and
O
distribution of the various trainee materials for the purposes of standardization, course
administration, record keeping, qualification requirements and assessment for the following
C

courses and programs;

D

 Licenses / certification.
 Recency of experience.
E

 Medical status, including medical certificate.

LL

 Initial training courses.

 Transition training courses.
 Re qualification training courses.
O

 Differences training courses.

 Pre-command assessment training course.
TR

 Command training courses.

 Line check.
 Proficiency check.
N

 Recurrent training.
O

 Specific qualifications (LVP, RVSM).

 Equipment qualifications (TCAS, GPWS/EGPWS).
C

 Airport and route competence (including special airports).

 Instructor Pilot Training course...
N

 Check Airmen/Examiner.
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 50
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
 Recurrent Training and Checking

TE
 Pilot Qualification to Operate in Either Pilot’s Seat Training and Checking
 CRM/Human Factors training.
 Dangerous goods training.

IN
 Security training.
The company retains course attendance records or Course Completion Certificate for all courses
of training undertaken.

PR
The Flight Training Administration is responsible for retaining the original copy of the
following training, checking and qualification undertaken by a flight crew;

IF
 Conversion training and checking.
 Upgrade Command training and checking.
 Recurrent training and checking.

PY
Pilot qualification to operate in either pilot’s seat.

Refer to Operation Manual Part A for retention of records associated with Route and
O
Aerodrome Competence qualification.
C

This record includes a complete summary of the flight crew member's completion of each stage
of training and checking, which must be certified by the instructor or check airman and
D

available for inspection by the Authority and made available, on request, to the flight crew
member concerned. It remains the trainee’s responsibility to maintain a copy of all completed
E

forms and assessments.

LL

Upon completion of training, Flight Training Administration will forward notice of

qualification changes and/or renewal to:
O

 Flight Operation Director.

TR

 Chief pilots.
 Flight Crew Planning and Rostering.
 Crew Records.
N

 Operation Administration.
O

For the purposes of Cabin Crew Training, all record keeping responsibilities are delegated to
C

the responsible manager for Cabin Crew.

N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 51
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.22.2. Training records.

TE
The Flight Training Administration shall be responsible for maintaining an archive of course
modules, training and checking events, and their various versions. In addition, he shall maintain
a record of when those modules are taught.

IN
1.22.3. Course Attendance Records

PR
Unless otherwise specified, course attendance record sheets are prepared for every training
course conducted by Flight Training. Participants and the appropriately designated instructor
sign the form separately for every day of the course.

IF
1.22.4. Training and Assessment Forms
Training events, such as simulator and line training, are supported by a training form. Checking

PY
events are supported by a check form.
On all training forms, the trainer shall make comments any time they can aid in identifying
O
specific areas that in the future may assist the pilot in improving his standard of performance.
In all cases, a grade of 2 or 1 requires a comment. When poor progress has been recorded on a
C

training event, the training form will contain full details of the reasons for poor progress.
On all check forms, the examiner shall make comments on all points he considers worthy of
D

note. In all cases, a grade of 2 or 1 requires a comment. When a failure has been recorded on a
E

check, the check form will contain full details of the reasons for failure.
LL

Unless otherwise specified, the applicable form will be signed by the instructor/examiner and
countersigned by the candidate. The counter-signing of the form can follow at a later date.
O

A copy of the Form will be given to the candidate; and the master copy will be retained on file.
TR

When required, the original will be forwarded to the Authority.

The file is to be classified confidential and access to it is to be restricted to the appropriate
fleet, training staff and individual.
N
O

1.22.5. Certificate of Test

Following the completion of a mandatory check, the examiner also completes the Test Form.
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 1
OM Part D Page: 52
Training Manual INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION AND POLICY AND POLICY

D
1.23. Training Quality Audits.

TE
(Refer to corporate manual)
 All instructors/ Check Airmen (employed or subcontracted) shall be audited to

IN
assure compliance with approved standards.
 All Training facilities/ Simulators shall be audited to assure compliance with
approved standards.

PR
 All audits shall be retained as per quality assurance program requirements.
 All training results and examinations shall be monitored and analyzed for future
training program improvement.

IF
1.23.1. Quality Control of Training Courses.
Feedback shall be sought from trainers and trainees on the quality of training courses and

PY
instruction. Fleet Management and the Authority should also be encouraged to provide feedback.
Feedback regarding course content and structure shall be forwarded to the Training Review
Committee for review and incorporation as appropriate.
O
1.24. Trend analysis .
C

The Flight Training Administration shall be responsible to record all the grade included in the
training forms for training deficiencies and examination trends. Trend analysis is every 6
D

months.
E

1) Trend analysis covers many areas of training

LL

2) Trend analysis is numerical value of trends in PAS training and operation's.

The trend analysis report will be discussed during the regular meetings between the
O

Training Manager and Instructors, to improve the training program, cover all aspects of
TR

training and develop the weak points if any.

1.25. PAS Pilots Selection Process
N

(Refer to OMA CH.5)

O

1) Interview
2) Written exam
C
N

1.26. Newly Hired Type rated Pilots

After completion of all appropriate ground courses the chief pilot shall schedule him with
U

a company examiner or check airmen on a Line Check.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

D
CHAPTER 2 FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR CHECK AIRMAN EXAMINER ............................ 2

TE
2.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 2
2.1.1 Instructors Number Required Policy ............................................................................. 3

IN
2.2 Flight Instructor Duties and Responsibilities ..................................................................... 4
2.2.1 Examiner Duties and Responsibilities .......................................................................... 4
2.2.2 Check Airman Duties and Responsibilities .................................................................. 4

PR
2.2.3 Instructor Pilot Duties and Responsibilities .................................................................. 4
2.3 Selection System and Qualification of Instructor Pilots ..................................................... 5
2.3.1 Instructor Pilot (IP) Initial/Transition Training ............................................................. 6

IF
2.3.2 Instructor Pilot Recurrent Training ............................................................................... 6
2.3.3 Instructor Pilot Upgrade to Check Airman ................................................................... 7
2.4 Examiner .............................................................................................................................. 8

PY
2.4.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.2 Selection ........................................................................................................................ 8
O
2.4.3 Initial Training .............................................................................................................. 8
2.4.3.1 Qualifications ......................................................................................................... 8
C

2.4.4 Examiner Recurrent Training ........................................................................................ 8

2.5 Supervision Policy ............................................................................................................... 8
D

2.5.1. Newly Appointed Instructors ....................................................................................... 8

2.5.2 All Instructor Pilots ....................................................................................................... 8
E

2.5.3 Instructor Pilot Retention Policy ................................................................................... 8

LL

2.6 General Rules ...................................................................................................................... 10

2.6.1 Purpose ......................................................................................................................... 10
O

2.6.2 Scheduling. ................................................................................................................... 10

2.6.3 Training Time Limitation ............................................................................................. 10
TR

2.6.4 Training Syllabus ......................................................................................................... 10

2.6.5 Training and Checking ................................................................................................ 11
2.6.5.1 General ................................................................................................................. 11
N

2.6.6 Line Training Requirements ....................................................................................... 12

2.6.7 Records ....................................................................................................................... 12
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

D
CHAPTER 2 FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR CHECK AIRMAN EXAMINER

TE
Flight Instructor
2.1 General

IN
The Flight Instructors, Check Airmen and Examiners are considered to be the foundation and the
pillars on which the entire safe and efficient flight operations stand.

PR
Careful selection system for Instructor Pilot is developed to ensure a high standard product of the
training and checking process. The Instructor Pilot must be basically a Role Model.
The initial selection therefore shall be based on many factors, included but not limited to:

IF
 Desire to do the job.
 Self-discipline.

PY
 Experience and proficiency.
 High standard of aviation knowledge.
 Positive attitude.
O
 Ability to work in a team.
 Socially respected among colleagues.
C

 Strong work ethics.

 Leadership.
D

 Teaching ability.
 Flexibility.
E

Detailed selection system is laid down in Selection System and Qualification of Instructor Pilots;
LL

Selected Instructor Pilot shall undergo a training program to develop teaching skills, techniques
and Right Hand Seat training program.
O

The performance and adherence of flight instructors to the rules, procedures and regulations
contained in this manual shall be closely supervised by the Chief Pilot.
TR

Note: -
Minimum number of instructors is 2 including 1 Examiner per type
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

D
2.1.1 Instructors Number Required Policy
PAS ensure that training department have sufficient instructors, evaluators, line check airmen and

TE
support personnel to administer the training and evaluation programs
The training department consists of training manager, training coordinator and minimum of 2

IN
instructors including 1 Examiner

PR
This number may be increased to cover:
 Instructor’s works within the management.
 Number of initial trainees on type.
Amount of training hours required.

IF

 Frequency of training flight, which includes but not limited to line checks, spot checks,
random checks…. Etc.

2.1.2 Current composition:

PY
O
Names of current instructors, Check Airmen, & Examiners with the Title of everyone, and the
name of support personnel are:
C

Dash 8 :
D

Capt. Mohamed El Maamoun Hassan Deifalla Examiner

E

Capt. Nasr Mohamed Ali Nasr Examiner

Capt.Wagih Fawzy Ahmed El Shaarawy Examiner
LL

Capt. Mohamed Bahey Eldin Hassan Bahnasawy Examiner

Capt. Aly Mohamed Ahmed Hangal Examiner
O

Capt. Atef Mohamed AbdelBaky Abdelgalil Check-Airman

Capt.Youssef Ahmed Gamal Eldin Kadry Check-Airman
TR

Capt. Hesham Mohamed Said Bakr Instructor

Capt. ElMoez Mohamed Abdalla GadElRub Instructor
Capt. Ahmed Mahmoud Ahmed Elagamawy Instructor
N

CRJ 900 :
O

Capt. Logan Cole Examiner

C

Capt .Taher Mohamed Rashad Makhlouf Check-Airman

Capt. Saad Ibrahim Elamir Soliman Check-Airman
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

D
2.2 Flight Instructor Duties and Responsibilities

TE
2.2.1 Examiner Duties and Responsibilities
a) Ground training (if required)

IN
b) Supervision Flying
c) Initial, Transition and Recurrent

PR
d) A/C Base Training
e) Line Checks
f) IOE
g) Proficiency Checks

IF
h) ATP and Type Rating Certification

PY
2.2.2 Check Airman Duties and Responsibilities
(Check Airman Air Craft & Simulator)
a) Ground training (if required)
O
b) Supervision Flying
C
c) Initial, Transition and Recurrent
d) A/C Base Training
e) Line Checks
D

f) IOE
E

g) Proficiency Checks
(Check Airman Simulator)
LL

a) Proficiency Checks
b) Initial, Transition and Recurrent
O
TR

2.2.3 Instructor Pilot Duties and Responsibilities

a) Ground Training (if required)
b) Supervision Flying
N

c) IOE
d) Initial, Transition training.
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 5
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

D
2.3 Selection System and Qualification of Instructor Pilots

TE
Prerequisite
a) Current ATPL with current type and instrument rating.

IN
b) Medically fit pilots must be qualified on all routes of the type he is flying.
c) Total 1000 hours Pilot in Command on type for previous fixed wing aircraft flight
instructors.

PR
d) Total 1000 (As per the ECAA regulation) hours Pilot in Command on type for first time
flight instructors.
e) If the type is being introduced to PAS Fleet for the first time, nominated instructors
must be already instructors on another type. Fifty flying "up to proficiency" hours

IF
shall be conducted before the trainer can train on the new type.
f) The candidate’s file should be completely clear from any technical or administrative

PY
flaws.
Instructor Pilots Position Selection
Nominated Pilots shall undergo through, but not limited to the following:
O
a) Line check.
C

b) Oral test.
D

Training management shall conduct oral exam for the nominated pilots to check their level of
proficiency in the knowledge and understanding of the following areas:
E

a) Aircraft limitation, normal procedures, non-normal procedures, system operation and

LL

specific type performance.

b) General aeronautical knowledge which shall include, but not limited to the knowledge of:
O

Aerodynamics, performance, aviation weather, regulations, operation manual, etc.

c) OMA & SOP
TR

Failure to pass the knowledge exams shall be considered as a failure in a proficiency check,
passing oral exam does not guarantee any training position.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 6
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

D
2.3.1 Instructor Pilot (IP) Initial/Transition Training

TE
A. Ground Training
(1) Instructor skills and techniques course attended at ECAA approved training centers.
(2) Training and Flight Operations Manuals review.

IN
(3) The applicable ECARs.
(4) The limitations contained in PAS operations specifications.

PR
Note: Item (a) maybe waived for previously qualified instructors
B. Flight Training
Aircraft or simulator instructors

IF
Must conduct the following by the Training Manager:
(1) Right hand seat training:

PY
I. Tailored PC to demonstrate right seat proficiency.
II. Error recovery which will include Lateral and Vertical offsets performed by the
Chief instructor/Check Airman/Examiner occupying left seat and the recovery
O
techniques required by the Instructor Pilot under training.
(2) The under qualification Simulator/aircraft instructor must conduct:
C

I. An observation simulator for 16 Hrs.

II. An initial or transition training course on full flight simulator for one crew under
D

supervision of the Chief Pilot/Check Airman/Examiner Or

III. Conduct recurrent flight training for two crews under supervision of a Check
E

Airman/Examiner.2.3.2 Instructor Pilot Recurrent Training

LL

Recurrent training for Instructor Pilots shall be conducted once a year.

Error recovery
O

Error recovery which will include Lateral and Vertical offsets performed by the Chief
TR

Pilot/Check Airman/Examiner occupying the left seat and the recovery techniques required by
the Instructor Pilot under training.
N
O

2.3.2 Instructor Pilot Recurrent Training

C

Recurrent training for Instructor Pilots shall be conducted once a year associated with PC, such
training will be conducted from both left and right seats.
N

Flight Training: Error recovery includes Lateral and Vertical offsets performed by the check
U

airman occupying the left seat and the recovery techniques required by the Instructor Pilot under
training

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 7
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

D
2.3.3 Instructor Pilot Upgrade to Check Airman

TE
1. Minimum 40 Hours Simulator time
2. Selected by:
 Flight Operation General Manager

IN
 Training Manager
 Chief Pilot

PR
3. Pc simulator under supervision of ECAA inspector (if required).
 Examiner Training Program

IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 8
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

2.4 Examiner

D
2.4.1 General

TE
The Examiner must clearly understand that he represents the ECAA in performing the functions
of the respective positions; therefore he is responsible in front of the ECAA administrator.

IN
2.4.2 Selection

PR
a) Examiner shall be selected after qualifying as check airman.
b) Selected person shall be submitted to the ECAA for approval.

IF
2.4.3 Initial Training

2.4.3.1 Qualifications

PY
The following ground and flight training are required to qualify a Instructor Pilot to act as the
Examiner:
O
A. Ground Training
1. Flight Crew Training Manual and Flight Operations Manuals review.
C

2. The applicable ECARs.

3. The limitations contained in PAS operations specifications.
D

B. Flight Training
Examiner will be selected from current qualified Instructors therefore Flight Instructors, Flight
E

Training segment is covered.

LL

2.4.4 Examiner Recurrent Training

O

A. Flight training (Simulator)

1. Error recovery session which will include Lateral and Vertical offsets performed by the
TR

Chief Pilot/Examiner occupying the left seat and the recovery techniques required by the
Examiner under training.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 9
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

D
2.5 Supervision Policy

TE
2.5.1. Newly Appointed Instructors
Performance of newly appointed instructor shall be under supervision for the first year

IN
of appointment; the supervision shall include but not be limited to:
A. A check on his performance while giving instructions at least once a year.

PR
B. A check on his performance during a proficiency check from the right hand seat at
least once a year.

IF
2.5.2 All Instructor Pilots
A random check on the Instructor Pilot, Check Airman and Examiner performance shall

PY
be conducted by one of the Examiners or Check Airmen to ensure that they are
standardized for their assigned tasks
O
2.5.3 Instructor Pilot Retention Policy
a) Instructor Pilot will be retained based upon company needs and their ability to maintain
C

those prerequisites upon which they were selected.

b) Instructor Pilot must perform 1recurrent training sessions for 1 crew every calendar
D

year as a minimum.
E

c) To work as an Instructor Pilot, he must remain current and qualified in the crew
position and equipment for which he has been designated.
LL

d) Instructor Pilot must also maintain productivity (i.e. his ability to carry out the training
roster keeping the average training hours among other Instructors).
e) Instructor Pilot who does not maintain currency and qualifications, or with any negative
O

impact or productivity on company's image or economy will be relieved from his

TR

position at the discretion of the Operations General Manager.

f) Instructor Pilot deviation from training policies and procedures, rules set forth in the
AOM/FCOM and / or PAS Flight Crew Training Manual or non- compliance with
N

those policies and procedures shall be subject to termination of training duties through
decision of the Operations General Manager.
O

Note: - If the minimum requirement is not covered the instructor pilot should perform a training
session under supervision of examiner or check airmen for requalification.
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 10
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

D
2.6 General Rules

TE
2.6.1 Purpose
The purpose of this section is to collect all rules scattered throughout the manual to make it

IN
easy for training personnel to follow them.

PR
2.6.2 Scheduling
Refer to chapter 3 item 3.1.4

IF
2.6.3 Training Time Limitation
Refer to chapter 3 item 3.1.5

2.6.4 Training Syllabus

PY
a) Instructor Pilot shall adhere to the training syllabus without neither additions nor
O
omissions.
b) Instructor Pilot shall adhere to FCOM, SOP, OMA and Flight Crew Training Manual.
C

c) Training time shall not be reduced without prior approval.

d) If additional training time is required during Initial, Transition or Upgrade Training, an
D

approval from the Operations General Manager must be obtained. Refer to Training
Time Policy 1.15
E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 11
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

D
2.6.5 Training and Checking

TE
2.6.5.1 General
A. Training

IN
1. Initial, Transition, Upgrade and Recurrent training for Captains must include Right Hand
Seat training requirements.

PR
2. A Check Airman/Examiner or Instructor Pilot must occupy one of the pilot seats during a
Captain’s IOE until he makes the following entry in his progress report “ Captain
(Name) is fit to fly as a captain under supervision “. The Trainee Captain shall
continue flying under supervision until he is ready for final Line check.

IF
3. A Check Airman/Examiner or Instructor Pilot must occupy one of the pilot seats during
Captain IOE Transition training for at least 4 sectors.
4. IOE must consist of at least 40 hours for all pilots during Initial training and 40 hours

PY
during Transition training for First Officers only.
5. Captain IOE shall include at least two sectors from the right hand seat, one as PF and one
as PM.
O
6. A Captain flying under supervision shall occupy the left seat and will act as the pilot in
command; however the Check Airman/Examiner or instructor pilot shall relief him from
C

his command whenever Air Safety is in question.

B. Checking
D

No training is allowed during type rating certification (Final Check)

E

1. During Line or any other Check, the Check Airman/Examiner or Instructor Pilot shall
LL

normally occupy the observer seat, and he shall not interfere by giving instructions or
comments at any time especially during critical phases of flight, and he shall debrief any
comments only on ground.
O

2. However he shall retain the final responsibility for the safety of the flight
3. Company Check Airman/Examiner shall conduct line Check.
TR

4. During Route qualification/checks the Captain under check for route qualification is the
Pilot in Command of the flight.
5. During any checking activity, the Check Airman/Examiner/Instructor Pilot retains the
N

final responsibility for the safety of the operation. He shall therefore consider relieving
the Captain under check from his command whenever Air Safety is in question.
O

6. Proficiency Check shall be conducted by company Check Airman/Examiner.

C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 2
OM Part D Page: 12
Training Manual FLIGHT
FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR,CHECK AIRMAN INSTRUCTOR,
& EXAMINER CHECK AIRMA

D
2.6.6 Line Training Requirements

TE
Refer to No. of sectors required for the training program.

2.6.7 Records

IN
a) All training items listed in the Training Record/Forms should be checked by () or Not
Applicable (NA).

PR
b) The results of checking shall either be SATISFACTORY or UNSATISFACTORY.
c) Further comments and/or recommendations shall be submitted in a separate Report.
d) Comments should be as objective as possible.
e) Trainees must sign their Training /checking records after entering the dates of last 3

IF
landings and after the records being completed by Check Airman/Examiner / Instructor
Pilot.

PY
f) The expiration date is calculated by adding 7 months to the base month of the current
event.
Example
O
Base Month is: January - 01/16.
C

Expiration Date: Aug - 08/16.

D

g) Simulator training Flight Reports must be delivered by the flight instructor by hand or by
electronic means.
E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

CHAPTER 3 TRAINING TESTING AND CHECKING PROCESS .............................................. 3

D
3.0.1. Training and Checking .................................................................................................... 3
3.0.2. Simulator briefing and debriefing. .................................................................................. 5

TE
3.0.2.2. Debriefing: ...................................................................................................................... 5
3.0.3. Initial Ground Training courses required for newly hired Crew Member: ..................... 6

IN
3.1. Training. ................................................................................................................................. 7
3.1.1. Philosophy of the Training courses is based on the following three principles. ............. 7

PR
3.1.1.1. Systematic approach to instructions:............................................................................... 7
3.1.1.2. Learning by doing: .......................................................................................................... 7
3.1.1.3. Training to proficiency: .................................................................................................. 7

IF
3.1.2. Training Objectives aim to cover the following: ............................................................ 8
3.1.3. Types of Training. ........................................................................................................... 9
3.1.4.
PY
Rostering and Scheduling. .............................................................................................. 9
3.2. Checking .............................................................................................................................. 10
O
3.2.1. Type Rating check (certification).................................................................................. 10
3.2.2. Proficiency check .......................................................................................................... 10
C

3.2.4. Pilot: Extended Envelope Training (ECAR 121.423) ................................................... 12

3.3. Assessment ........................................................................................................................... 14
D

3.3.1. Grading Scale ................................................................................................................ 15

E

3.3.2. Training Progress Grading Guidance ............................................................................ 15

LL

3.3.2.1. Effect of repeated events ............................................................................................... 16

3.3.2.2. Pilot Assessment Markers (PAMS) .............................................................................. 16
O

3.3.3. Acceptable Performance Guide lines and tolerances. ................................................... 17

3.3.3.1. Knowledge (Oral or written) ......................................................................................... 17
TR

3.3.3.2. Flying skills ................................................................................................................... 17

3.3.3.3. Management .................................................................................................................. 17
N

3.3.4. Tolerances ..................................................................................................................... 18

O

3.3.4.1. Take-off and Area Departure ........................................................................................ 18

3.3.4.2. Rejected take off ........................................................................................................... 18
C

3.3.4.3. STEEP Turn .................................................................................................................. 19

N

3.3.4.4. Approach to Stall .......................................................................................................... 19

3.3.4.5. Cruise ............................................................................................................................ 19
U

3.3.4.6. Area Arrival and Holding ............................................................................................. 19

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

3.3.4.7. Instrument Approach (Precision and Non-Precision) ................................................... 20

3.3.4.7.1. Final Approach....................................................................................................... 21

D
3.4. Testing. Objective. ............................................................................................................... 22

TE
3.4.1. Oral / Knowledge Test. ................................................................................................. 22
3.4.1.2. Knowledge Test ................................................................................................................. 22

IN
3.4.2. Written Examinations ................................................................................................... 23
3.4.2.1. Re-Take Policy.............................................................................................................. 23

PR
3.5. Personnel that do not achieve or maintain required standards ............................................. 24
3.5.1. Poor Progress of a student............................................................................................. 24
3.5.2. Failure of a Student/Candidate ...................................................................................... 26

IF
3.5.2.1. Procedures in the event of a failed Flight or Simulator Check ..................................... 26
3.5.2.2. Additional Procedures in the event of a Failed Initial or Recurrent PPC ..................... 26

PY
3.5.2.3. Additional Procedures in the event of a failed Upgrade PPC ....................................... 27
3.5.2.4. Additional Procedures in the event of a failed Upgrade LOE....................................... 27
3.5.2.5. Additional Procedures to be followed in the event of a failed Line Check ................. 27
O
3.5.3. Remedial training following failure of a line or simulator check ................................. 28
C
3.5.3.1. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failed Ground Exam................................. 28
3.5.4. Termination of training ................................................................................................. 28
D

3.5.5. Poor Performance of an Instructor / Examiner ............................................................. 29

E

3.6. Training facilities ................................................................................................................. 30

3.6.2. Classroom Facilities ...................................................................................................... 30
LL

3.6.3. Computer Based Training ............................................................................................. 30

3.6.4. Training Devices ........................................................................................................... 31
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
TE
CHAPTER 3 TRAINING TESTING AND CHECKING PROCESS
3.0. General Rules, Limitations, Requirements.
The purpose of this section is to collect all rules together to facilitate training personnel’s job in

IN
following them.

PR
The functions of the Check Airman/Flight instructor are basically either Training or checking, it
is important, yet very difficult, to draw a line separating those two functions.
The main objective of the following is to:

IF
 Make a clear distinction between training and checking.
 Set up a system of evaluation, containing specified tolerances, to be followed by all Check

PY
Airmen/Examiner for the purpose of standardizing the assessment process.
3.0.1. Training and Checking
O
PAS requires that all flight crew are trained and objectively examined or evaluated
according to the published standards which approved by ECAA ensuring that:
C

 Evaluation administered in conjunction with simulator, aircraft and/or line training are
D

conducted by different organizations or individuals than those conducted the training.

 Instructors, Examiners and Line Check Airman are able to perform their duties without
E

inappropriate interference from management and/or external organizations.

LL

PAS ensures flight crew members participate in joint training activities or exercises with
cabin crew members for the purpose of enhancing onboard coordination and mutual
O

understanding of CRM and the human factors involved in addressing emergency situations and
security threats.
TR

When such coordinated training is not possible, combined flight crew and cabin crew training
should include joint discussion of emergency scenarios.
N

PAS ensures flight crew members receive training in normal and non-normal procedures and
O

maneuvers, to include, as a minimum:

C

1. PM / PF and other flight crew division of duties (task sharing).

2. Positive transfer of aircraft control.
N

3. Consistent checklist philosophy.

U

4. Emphasis on aviate, navigate, communicate" priority.

5. Proper use of all levels of flight automation.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
PAS shall ensure flight crew members receive training and, demonstrate competence in normal

TE
and non-normal procedures and maneuvers, to include, as a minimum:
1. Rejected takeoff.

IN
2. Emergency evacuation.
3. Engine fire and failure.

PR
4. Emergency descent.
PAS shall ensure flight crew members complete practical training exercises:

IF
1. In the use of all emergency and safety equipment required to be onboard the aircraft.
2. That address emergency evacuation and coordination among crew members.

PY
Theoretical and Practical training are described in chapter (9) and chapter (4) of OM-D.
During Training (Simulator and line Training) PAS Training Department shall ensure pilot
flight crew members demonstrate knowledge of the operations approved as part of PAS (AOC)
O
and according to SOP to include the following items: -
C

1. Approaches authorized by ECAA;

2. Ceiling and visibility requirements for takeoff, approach and landing;
D

3. Allowance for inoperative ground components;

E

4. Wind limitation (crosswind, headwind and tailwind)

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 5
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
TE
3.0.2. Simulator briefing and debriefing.
3.0.2.1. Briefing:
 PAS provides for all flight crew a simulator briefing which ensure a clear understanding of

IN
the required maneuvers to be performed in their respective training or examination, without
providing the flight crew the precise order of the exercise (detailed chronological sequence of

PR
the maneuver or malfunctions prior to the respective maneuver or malfunctions being
administered). This is not intended to preclude the crews from knowing the city pairs to the
flown or the general maneuver requirements prior to the examination, but merely to ensure
that the script (simulator syllabus) is not known to the flight crew.

IF
Note: - Simulated weather and environment conditions are standardized and appropriate for the
training/ evaluation being administered.

PY
 The instructor should encourage trainees to ask questions and be able to guide them through
the appropriate references and offer any additional information to help the trainee
O
understand.
 The instructor shall check the latest FCOM, SOP, and OM-A, QRH and MEL revision.
C

 The instructor shall check the flight crew knowledge for the latest bulletins, circulars and
crew notices.
D

 The instructor shall check the flight crew license and/or any medical restriction.
 The instructor shall provide the flight crew with a simulator safety briefing.
E
LL

3.0.2.2. Debriefing:
 The instructor shall register the faults and deviations during performing different maneuvers
without interruption of the session (either positively or negatively).
O

 The instructor should take snap shots for deviations (glide path, speed, direction, and
TR

heading).
 The instructor shall assess the deviation against the acceptable tolerances mentioned in
chapter three (Ref. 3.3.4) according to the phase of flight and type of maneuver and also pilot
N

position (putting into consideration the total experience).

 The instructor shall discuss all the above mentioned deviations, backed with the
O

documentation (snap shot printout) to reduce and eliminate any un-productive discussions
C

and to reduce the defensive attitude of the some trainee.

 The instructor should analyze the trainee's difficulties objectively and during debrief
N

competent phrases and terms that are simple and commonly used in aviation.
U

 The instructor shall evaluate the flight crew overall performance, task sharing, SOP and
decision making process.
 The instructor shall inform clearly the flight crew of his intentions.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 6
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
 The instructor shall write reports clearly and objectively explaining the strengths and

TE
weaknesses of trainees.

IN
3.0.3. Initial Ground Training courses required for newly hired Crew Member:
PAS shall ensure flight crew members prior to being assigned to operational duties
complete the following Initial Ground Training:

PR
1. Basic Indoctrination.
2. Initial Ground Training .
Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS).

IF
3.
4. Adverse weather operations.
5. Crew Resources Management (CRM) Training Course (Joint with Cabin Crew and Flight

PY
Dispatchers).
6. Dangerous Goods and Hazardous Material Training.
7. Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM).
O
8. Wind Shear Ground Training.
9. Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT).
C

10. Aircraft Upset Recovery .

11. P-RNAV (RNP1). (If Applicable)
D

12. English Language Test Standard

E

13. SMS Course (Safety Management System Course).

14. General Safety Training.
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 7
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
TE
3.1. Training.
3.1.1. Philosophy of the Training courses is based on the following three principles.

IN
3.1.1.1. Systematic approach to instructions:
The task of training must be considered as a whole and an instruction system must be defined to

PR
achieve the training objectives. These objectives are determined by a task analysis methods and
means necessary to implement the instructions system are chosen for their qualities and
adaptability to the objectives. Each phase in the training system is intended to fulfill part of the
objectives.

IF
3.1.1.2. Learning by doing:

PY
It is very important that practical exercises are included in every training phase. Practical system
training is provided as soon as possible:
O
 To ensure that the theoretical knowledge is retained.
 To train the crew members in their respective tasks in the cockpit environment.
C

3.1.1.3. Training to proficiency:

D

At the end of the training program, each crew member must be capable of carrying out his tasks
safely and efficiently, in accordance with the training objectives. Therefore, it is not possible to
E

permit a trainee to pass from one phase to the next phase until he has acquired the skills
LL

necessary to complete the current phase objectives.

O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 8
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

3.1.2. Training Objectives aim to cover the following:

D
To develop the trainee’s knowledge of technical understanding of the operational theory into
practical understanding of the operating standards required.

TE
All training programs is compliance to the ICAO reference mentioned in 121.401 Notes
5.,6.,7.,10. introduced to flight crew members shall emphasis on training in CRM skills

IN
during simulator and/or aircraft training.

PR
Charter operations involve many sectors every day some of the sectors are short, and thus quite
demanding on the crew, others are relatively long and involve flying to new airfields.
Pilots of various flying backgrounds are rostered to fly together, these factors all demand a high

IF
standard of pilot proficiency and standardization of operating procedures.
The training sessions must ensure that proficiency and standardization have been achieved before

PY
recommending the release of a pilot to line operations. It is the duty of Instructor Pilots to train
their trainees to the standards and proficiency that would facilitate a smooth entry into the
airline's line operations. A crew member obviously must be trained to perform tasks relevant to
O
his crew position. These tasks are defined in the task sharing section of the QRH and Flight
C
Crew Operating Manual.
To develop the practical operating skills required of each pilot in the crew.
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul.2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 9
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
TE
3.1.3. Types of Training.
 Initial Training.
 Transition Training.

IN
 Difference Training.
 Command Up-Grade Training.

PR
 Re-Current and LOFT Training.
 Line Training.
 Ground Training, refresher course, CRM. Training, required number of training hours and
duration as mentioned in chapter (4).

IF
 Curriculum and detailed hours for each subject as per each training course individually in
relevant chapter (4) of this Training Manual.

PY
 Fixed Base and Full Flight simulators training required number of sessions and training hours
as mentioned in chapter (5) and individually in relevant chapters of this manual.
 Detailed training maneuvers (normal-abnormal and Emergency) & lesson plans are
O
mentioned individually in Appendix D
 Flight Training and Line training required hours and Number of sectors as mentioned in
C

chapter (5).
D

Note: All Maneuvers and procedures required and included in Pilots Initial, Transition, upgrade
E

flight Training (Simulator & A/c Training) are in accordance and compliance with ECAR. (121)
LL

appendix (E)
3.1.4. Rostering and Scheduling.
O

Training rosters and simulator schedules should be adhered to;

TR

 There shall be no change without prior approval.

 Instructor Pilot shall not leave the training location without prior approval and this will be
limited to emergency cases only.
N

 Flight time and Duty Time limitation should be adhered to during Line Training and under
O

all circumstances.
 Normally three days in a row of training, followed by a day off, will be scheduled for any
C

crew during initial or transition training. However, no more than four days in a row of
N

training shall be planned or conducted under any circumstances.

U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 10
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.2. Checking

TE
 Bearing in mind that we have based our training guidelines on Proficiency, we have to
establish our basis of checking on Competence.
 Since experience is an asset that cannot be taught, the Examiner/Check Airman should bear

IN
in mind the level of experience of each individual Pilot undergoing the check, especially if
the pilot is recently hired or newly promoted.

PR
 The role of the Examiner/Check Airman during a type rating check is not to provide
Training, it is solely to observe and evaluate the pilot's performance and to determine his
competence & capability to apply correct procedures within the specified tolerance.

IF
 During proficiency check, if the pilot being checked fail any of the required maneuvers, the
Examiner/Check Airman shall at the end of the session repeat the failed item for 3 times
maximum. If there is 2 failed items, then each should be repeated for 1 time only. The check

PY
to be suspended if more than 2 maneuvers failed
 If the pilot undergoing the check is unable to demonstrate a satisfactory proficiency level of
performance. Remedial training will be requested.
O
 Acceptable performance guide-lines and tolerances set forth in ECAA practical test standards
C
shall be applied.
 The instructor of the crew being evaluated shall not perform the evaluation.
D

3.2.1. Type Rating check (certification)

E

 All evaluation maneuvers sequence shall be unknown to the trainee being evaluated.
LL

 Examiners are the only persons authorized to sign the type rating check.
 The check result is either satisfactory or unsatisfactory depending on the compliance of the
pilot under check to the specified tolerances set forth in ECAA practical test standards.
O

3.2.2. Proficiency check

TR

Examiners and Check Airmen are authorized to conduct proficiency checks.

 During line or any other check, the Check Airman shall normally occupy the observer seat,
N

and he shall not interfere by giving instructions or comments at any time, especially during
O

critical phases of flight, and he shall debrief any comments only on ground.
 However, he shall retain the final responsibility for the safety of the operation, he shall
C

therefore consider assuming command of the flight at any time relieving the captain under
check form his command.
N

 Line checks shall be conducted by company Examiner or Check Airman.

U

 During Route Checks the captain under check for route qualification is the pilot-in-command
of the flight.
 Proficiency checks shall be conducted by company Examiner or Check Airman.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 11
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
Note: All maneuvers and procedures required for pilot proficiency checks utilizing the aircraft,

TE
visual simulator, non-visual simulator or any other training device will be strictly adhered to and
are in accordance and compliance with ECAR. (121) appendix (F).

IN
3.2.3. Instructions governing periodic checks /Tests for pilots.

PR
Base Checks (Proficiency Checks) - Pilots (Ref. ECAR 121.441)
The following are required by the flight crew be clear understanding.
Status: Mandatory

IF
Equipment: Aircraft approved Simulator

PY
Periodicity:
 One Proficiency Check in a period of 12 calendar months and in addition, within the
preceding 6 calendar months, Proficiency Training.
O
 After initial endorsement, the next following base check has to be within six (6) months.
C

Objective:
D

Crew member shall be tested and their continued competence verified and certified.
E

Mandatory items:
LL

 Emergency maneuvers in instrument flight conditions including :

 Takeoff with engine failure at or after V1 instrument approach to decision height with one
O

engine inoperative.
 "Go-around" on instrument from decision height with one engine inoperative.
TR

 Landing with one engine inoperative.

Other items:
N

Emergency/Abnormal Procedures, approach and landing with flying control systems and/or
O

flight director malfunctioning. (Appropriate to aircraft type)

 Emergency drills and actions.
C

 Passenger evacuation
 Engine /APU/ fuselage fire
N

 Engine failure before V1

U

 Emergency operation of undercarriage and flap

 Fuel dumping (as applicable)
 Aircraft systems failures

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 12
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
 Engine start malfunction

TE
 Engine re-light
 Malfunction of engine or engine control
 Incapacitation of crew (once a year)

IN
 GPWS (CFIT) Escape Maneuver.
 Crew Resource Management (CRM) training.

PR
Attention should also be paid at regular intervals to the following:
 Wind shear.
 Recognition and diagnosis of aircraft system faults (where there are not set drills).

IF
 Radio failure procedures
 Use of Operations Manuals including Route Manuals.

PY
 Briefing on latest amendments to Operations Manual and other circulars of interest.
 Loading instruction.
 Checklists.
O
 Aircraft equipment like FMS, Navigation Systems, flight directors, weather radar's, TCAS.
 Precautions for winter operations, anti-icing procedures, operation from contaminated
C

runways, thunderstorms.
 Noise abatement procedures
D

 Tire failures during takeoff, engine failure at critical stages such as during noise abatement,
E

SID, over high ground, approach, etc.

 Emergency descent
LL

 Rejected Take off

 Bomb threat
O

Above applies to Pilot-in Command and Co-Pilots with difference in emphasis and Co-pilots
TR

should be checked in their own duties in Co-Pilot's seat.

Commanders required to act as Co-Pilots should be checked in Co-Pilot's seat covering
mandatory items.
N
O

3.2.4. Pilot: Extended Envelope Training (ECAR 121.423)

Compliance with the training requirements will be in a period of time not exceed March,
C

2019.
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 13
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 14
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
TE
3.3. Assessment
Assessment is the process of observing, recording, interpreting and evaluating, pilot performance
and knowledge against a required standard in the context of overall performance. It includes the

IN
concept of self-critique, and feedback which can be given continuously during training or in
summary following a check.

PR
Assessment and record keeping should be carried out in accordance with the general procedures
detailed in this section along with any specific requirements listed in the training course or
applicable appendix.

IF
This section lists any specific assessment requirements associated with the course. The following
general policies should be referred to when conducting or preparing for the following

PY
assessments.
The Assessment and Examination Scheme
O
This section provides guidance for assessment and grading of crews undergoing all forms of
C
Training, Checking and Progress Reviews.
General
D

The instructor/examiner should:

E

 Refer the trainees to the applicable grading criteria during their initial briefing.
LL

 Refer the trainees to the applicable grading criteria during the debriefing (as an explanation
for their grading).
O

 Acquaint the trainees with the assessment procedure that will be used.
TR

Objective
To ensure that all Company crews:
N

 Meet and exceed the performance standards set by the Authority.

 Are evaluated according to a uniform set of parameters.
O

 Are given a fair and accurate representation of their performance.

C

 Are assessed accurately and fairly for Upgrade and Instructor potential.
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 15
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
TE
3.3.1. Grading Scale
grading system has been developed Flight Training to accurately grade pilots against a
common scale and to assess the standards reached.

IN
The Grading Scale shall be used during any training activity (Minimum passing grade is 70%).

PR
US Unsatisfactory or Failed (Training committee meeting required).
S1 70% - 79%
S2 80% - 89%
S3 90% and Above

IF
Note:
- In case of more than (3) S1 in the same PC a training committee may be formed to decide for

PY
any necessary remedial action.
- In case of repetitive S1 for the same item in (2) consecutive PC’s a committee may be formed
to decide for any remedial action.
O
- The Check Airman shall review the trainee’s last PC before conducting the New PC check.
C
3.3.2. Training Progress Grading Guidance
During training it is expected that a trainee’s performance will progress through the various
D

stages of skill attainment until competence or proficiency is reached toward the end of training. It
is not appropriate to assess trainees against the fixed standards applied to a previously qualified
E

or already proficient pilot. During training, the trainee and training system should receive
LL

feedback on the rate of progression or training achievement compared against that expected.
Grading should reflect the trainee’s level of performance compared to what would normally be
O

expected from a trainee at this stage of training.

The trainee is also assessed on achievement in the technical and non-technical categories. The
TR

categories should provide the instructor with a standardized way of providing feedback about
the trainee’s areas of strength and weakness. Trends also provide the training system with more
information about how to best tailor training to benefit individual trainees.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 16
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
TE
3.3.2.1. Effect of repeated events
To achieve a pass or competent assessment no assessable item should have a final grade of less

IN
than three. Limited repeats are allowed to achieve a final grading of three. In the event of a
repeat, all attempts should be graded .

PR
The Instructors observe a level of performance in knowledge, skill, attitude or behavior.
These will turn define the grade of a pilot achieves for a particular marker.
This grading structure is used for all pilots training and assessment. When a pilot is graded

IF
Unsatisfactory, the Behavioral Markers should be used to define the problem in more detail.
For each of the 4 individual assessment markers the Instructor should note what it was that

PY
the pilot did that characterized the performance in a particular area. The instructor then makes
an overall judgment of performance and refers to refine the score. Research indicates that it is
unreliable to decide on a score .
O
Specific events need to be recorded to explain a poor score while overall attainment can be used
C
to justify an excellent one. Generalities such as "Overall, poor standard of knowledge" is not an
acceptable comment to make in support of a poor grading.
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 17
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.3.3. Acceptable Performance Guide lines and tolerances.

TE
It is the factor which will be taken into account by the Examiner in deciding whether candidate
has met the objective of the maneuver or procedure at the required level of competence and has
met the objectives of the three major areas of training.

IN
3.3.3.1. Knowledge (Oral or written)

PR
Evaluation shall be based on the trainee's practical knowledge of the aircraft
a) Airplane systems
- Power plant

IF
- System components
- Operational performance

PY
- Limitations
- Normal procedures
- Abnormal procedures
O
- Emergency procedures
b) General aeronautical knowledge
C

3.3.3.2. Flying skills

D

Evaluation shall be based on complying with:

E

 General standard Operating Procedures.

LL

 FCOM standard operating procedures under normal, abnormal & emergency situations under
various meteorological conditions.
 Flying technique and accuracy.
O

 Airplane configuration, altitude and speed control.

TR

3.3.3.3. Management
Evaluation shall be based on:
N

 General standard Operating Procedures.

O

 Good planning in all phases of flights

 Timely correct decision
C

 Crew Co-ordination
N

 Use of available resources

 Situations awareness
U

 Adherence to clearance and safe heights

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 18
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.3.4. Tolerances

TE
The air speed, altitude and heading tolerances given hereunder represents the minimum
performance expedited in good flying conditions, exceeding those tolerances before corrective
action is initiated is an indication of an unsatisfactory performance.

IN
It is a fact that even a good pilot may be distracted or relax his attention to accuracy for a few

PR
moments under certain circumstances, and exceed these tolerances without being classified
unsatisfactory is left to the Examiner's discretion.
A trainee performance within tolerance does not mean that he may ignore applying correct
procedures.

IF
3.3.4.1. Take-off and Area Departure

PY
a) Normal, cross wind, Instrument and Engine failure
o
Heading ±5
O
Target speed + 10 Kts
C

- 5 Kts
D

b) Area Departure
E

o
Heading
LL

± 10
Target speed +10 Kts
O

- 5 Kts
TR

Altitude ± 100 feet

N

3.3.4.2. Rejected take off

Evaluation shall be based on:
O

 Prompt thrust levers retarding, application of braking & reversing thrust.

C
N

 Keeping aircraft within the physical limits of the runway and its center line.
 Application of the correct Abnormal or Emergency procedures and check list as laid down in
U

FCOM.
 Application of the correct evacuation procedures as laid down in FCOM.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 19
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.3.4.3. STEEP Turn

TE
o
Roll out Heading ± 10 (of the entry or specified heading)
Target speed ± 10 Kts

IN
Altitude ± 100 feet

PR
o o
Bank angle 45 ±5

IF
3.3.4.4. Approach to Stall
Evaluation shall be based on maneuver entry and recovery techniques, as per FCOM

PY
3.3.4.5. Cruise
Evaluation shall be based on:
O
 Flight level selection
 Awareness of maneuver margins
C

 Awareness of fuel management, examination (specific ranges, step climb)

 Use of weather radar, avoidance and actions in turbulent weather.
D

 Cruise flight path accuracy.

Raw data En-route navigation.
E


LL

3.3.4.6. Area Arrival and Holding

Evaluation shall be based on the trainee's capability to
O

 Plan, initiate, correct descend profile as prescribed in FCOM

TR

 Complete the appropriate approach and landing preparation, as per FCOM

 Complete the appropriate approach briefing as per FCOM
 Adherence to actual or situated ATC clearances and assigned radials, altitude and use of
N

available navigation facilities as appropriate.

 Aberrance to minima's prescribed in Operation Manual.
O

 Radio and Navigation back up procedures preparation (Radio magnetic panel & secondary
flight plan)
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 20
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
o
Heading ± 10

TE
Target speed + 10 Kts
- 5 Kts

IN
Altitude ± 100 feet

PR
3.3.4.7. Instrument Approach (Precision and Non-Precision)

IF
The instrument approach begins when the aircraft is over the Initial approach Fix (I.A.F.) for the
approach procedure being used (or handed-over to the final approach controller in the case of a
long final approach), and ends when the transmission to a missed approach configuration is
completed.
PY
Evaluation shall be based on A/C configuration and air speed as prescribed by FCOM.
O
o
Heading ± 10
C

Target speed + 10 Kts

D

- 5 Kts
E

Altitude ± 100 feet

LL

ILS deviation One-quarter scale deflection (Glide slope

or Localizer).
O

o
Non-Precision VOR ½ dot or 2-5
TR

o
Non-Precision ADF ± 5 (of RMI or bearing pointer from the
desired bearing).
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 21
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.3.4.7.1. Final Approach

TE
MDA / DH + 50 ft.
- 0 ft.

IN
Speed + 10 Kts

PR
- 5 Kts

3.3.4.7.2. Circling Approach

IF
o
Heading / Track ±5
Target speed + 10 Kts

PY - 5 Kts
O
Altitude + 50 feet
C
- 0 feet
E D

3.3.4.7.3. Missed Approach

Evaluation shall be based on the trainee's capability to: take the missed approach decision at the
LL

correct time, accurate and safe transition from approach and landing configuration to climb
configuration, fly the airplane throughout the missed approach procedure from MDA/DH to the
O

missed approach altitude under normal conditions & with a simulated engine failure.
TR

Pilots are encouraged to continue down to their certified minimum MDA / DH, and then initiate
a missed approach if the runway is not in sight. The mentioned below will apply during the
missed approach.
N

o
Heading / Track
O

±5
Target speed + 10 Kts
C

- 5 Kts
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 22
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.4. Testing.

TE
Objective.
Oral or Written tests shall be administered by Flight Crew Training Department to evaluate the

IN
trainee's competence in acquiring the knowledge required for each training phases.

PR
3.4.1. Oral / Knowledge Test.
3.4.1.1. Oral Test shall be administered in the following conditions:
A. As a part of the approved ECAA approved training programs (proficiency check).

IF
B. At the end of SIM, Initial and Transition training (Type rating certification oral).
C. At the end of line training (company requirements).
D. Upon the recommendation of the training committee.

PY
3.4.1.2. Oral Test required by c. or d. in 3.4.1.1. above shall be administered by Flight Crew
Training Department as follows:
O
1. Two Instructor Pilots.
C
2. Each instructor pilot shall hand over the result of the test in percent to the Chief Pilot and
enter the appropriate box of the Oral Test Form.
D

3. The result of the test shall be the average of the two numbers given with a passing grade
of 70%.
E

4. The instructor pilot and trainee shall sign the form and hand it over to Flight Crew
LL

Training Department to be approved by Chief Pilot.

3.4.1.2. Knowledge Test
O

Knowledge test shall be administered before any initial or transition or up-grade training, it shall
TR

conducted before the start of the fixed base covering the following areas:
 General Aeronautical knowledge.
 FCOM .
N

 SOP.
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 23
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.4.2. Written Examinations

TE
All questions for examinations shall comply with the following:
 Meet the desired training objective and approved by ECAA if required.

IN
 Be derived from a recognized, audited and authorized database.
 Be relevant to the instruction given or self-study required.

PR
 Be focused towards the roles and responsibilities of the person being examined.
 Be chosen to elicit levels of knowledge and understanding.
All trainees are required to take written examinations as part of initial/ transition, recurrent,

IF
upgrade and other courses that may be required from time to time. In all cases, the score will
simply be a percentage of correct responses to the total.

PY
The pass mark will be set at 70%.
3.4.2.1. Re-Take Policy.
O
In case of failure during Oral or Written test a re-take shall be conducted within one week from
the date of the first test take.
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 24
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.5. Personnel that do not achieve or maintain required standards

TE
If at any stage of training, or as the result of a test, it is evident that a pilot has not reached the
necessary standards, the trainer/instructor/examiner should refer the case to the Chief Pilot or
delegate for a decision on whether or not further training should be given.

IN
The progress of the pilots is monitored throughout any training/checking carried out by Flight

PR
Training.
3.5.1. Poor Progress of a student.

IF
3.5.2. Failure of a Student/Candidate.
3.5.3. Remedial training following failure of a line or simulator check

PY
3.5.4. Termination of training.
3.5.5. Poor Performance of an Instructor / Examiner.
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 25
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.5.1. Poor Progress of a student

TE
If at any time an Instructor/Examiner feels that a trainee is exhibiting poor progress during
training he should contact the training manager for further guidance. Poor progress may be
characterized by the student failing to show progress in required skills, knowledge or application

IN
of procedures, without necessarily scoring less than three in assessed tasks.

PR
Should a student score two or less for the overall training event or consistently score three or less
for any specific training task, the trainer should inform the training manager.
That Training Manager will:

IF
 Review the trainee’s progress to date.
 Consider any mitigating factors.

PY
The Chief Pilot can then recommend the following actions.
O
 Additional training
 Change of instructor
C
 Continue with the course
 Other action, as the situation warrants
E D

The Chief Pilot, may authorize up to a maximum of four extra simulator sessions or flight sectors
without specific approval from Operation Director.
LL

Prior to the Upgrade PPC or LOE, one extra session of remedial training will be made available
to an upgrade candidate if he is experiencing difficulty in reaching the required standard.
O

Should a candidate score an overall grading of three during any recurrent check, the
TR

Administration will notify the Chief Pilot who will forward the result to the Operations Director.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 26
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.5.2. Failure of a Student/Candidate

TE
The following procedures are to be followed for pilots who fail to achieve the required standards
during specific training or evaluation exercises.

IN
3.5.2.1. Procedures in the event of a failed Flight or Simulator Check
A pilot who fails a Flight or Simulator Check will have achieved an OVERALL EVALUATION

PR
score of two or less in accordance with the Grading System.
When a pilot fails a Check, the Examiner should:

IF
 Inform the pilot and provide him with details and evidence of areas of unsatisfactory
performance
 Provide him with methods or techniques of how to correct or rectify areas of unsatisfactory
performance for the future
PY
 Inform the pilot that they are unable to act as operating crew until the issue has been resolved
 Inform crew scheduling that the pilot is removed from flying and simulator duties until
O
further notice
C
 Inform the Chief Pilot
 Provide recommendations for additional training or other appropriate actions to assist the
D

pilot regain proficiency

E

3.5.2.2. Additional Procedures in the event of a Failed Initial or Recurrent PPC

LL

The Chief Pilot is to advise the Operation Director of the circumstances of the failure and
recommend an appropriate course of training or other action to be taken. In all cases, the Chief
Pilot can then recommend either:
O

Additional training or other appropriate actions to assist the pilot regain proficiency followed by
TR

a further re-check.
Further action as deemed necessary with consideration given to amount of retraining that might
N

be required and the available training assets. Any decisions regarding further action should be
taken by the Operations Director in consultation with the Chief Pilot if appropriate.
O

In all cases of re-training and/or re-checks, the training or check is to be carried out by a different
C

TRE from that performing the original training or check.

N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 27
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.5.2.3. Additional Procedures in the event of a failed Upgrade PPC

TE
The Chief Pilot is to advise the Operations Director of the circumstances of the failure. The
Upgrade PPC are regarded as PASS or FAIL sessions, failure will result in termination from the
course.

IN
3.5.2.4. Additional Procedures in the event of a failed Upgrade LOE

PR
The Chief Pilot is to advise the Operations Director of the circumstances of the failure. Normally
no more than one additional LOS session followed by a further LOE check may be
recommended. Failure of the subsequent LOE will result in termination from the course.

IF
3.5.2.5. Additional Procedures to be followed in the event of a failed Line Check (FLC,
ALC, PC)

PY
The Chief Pilot is to advise the Operations Director of the circumstances of the failure and
recommend an appropriate course of training or other action to be taken. In all cases, the Chief
Pilot can then recommend either:
O
 Further Line Training or other appropriate actions followed by another Line Check
C

 Another Line Check only

 Further action
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 28
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.5.3. Remedial training following failure of a line or simulator check

TE
Additional training may be provided by any appropriate trainer. The Chief Pilot is to be advised
when additional training is required.

IN
Any re-checks should be conducted by a different TRE.

PR
3.5.3.1. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failed Ground Exam
A pilot who fails a Ground Training written examination will not have achieved the required
pass mark for the subject being examined.

IF
A pilot on any training course that requires a pass in a written examination may be permitted one
examination re-sit. When a pilot fails a written examination, the FCTI should:

PY
Inform the pilot and provide the candidate with details and evidence of areas of unsatisfactory
performance.
Advise the respective CFP.
O
The Chief Pilot will then recommend either:
C

 Additional ground instruction followed by another examination

D

 Another ground examination only

 Further action
E
LL

3.5.4. Termination of training

Where termination of training or other action is recommended, the Operations Director should
make that decision in consultation with the Training Manager and the Chief Pilot.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 29
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.5.5. Poor Performance of an Instructor / Examiner

TE
Should poor performance be evident for an Instructor/Examiner the following procedure shall be
followed:

IN
 A detailed set of documents will be prepared in which a clear description of the poor
performance of the examiner/instructor is contained. A de-briefing of the examiner/instructor

PR
will take place. The debriefing will be led by the respective CFP.
 A representative from Human Resources will be present if appropriate.
 The examiner/instructor concerned will be allowed a colleague who will act as an observer.
 Formal notification in writing from the respective Chief Pilot in which the Operations

IF
Director is also copied will precede all action of this nature.
 Any relevant documentation will go on the training file of the respective examiner/instructor

PY
but not his personal file.
 Operations Director Presence is required if disciplinary action may result.
 Should an instructor or examiner be removed from instructional or checking duties then
O
immediate notification to withdraw his Authority shall be addressed to the ECAA and his
Certificate and Letter of Appointment are to be surrendered to the ECAA.
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 30
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.6. Training facilities

TE
3.6.1. General (Ref. ECAR 121.402)
Training or checking will be performed in the airplane or an approved flight simulator or, in the

IN
case of emergency and safety equipment training, in a representative training device. The type of
equipment used for checking should be representative of the instrumentation, equipment and

PR
layout of the airplane type operated by the flight crew member.
All training facilities such as PAS Classroom, PAS Computer Based Training, Training
Centers (i.e. EGYPT AIR OR CAE) and Training Devices must be approved by the Egyptian

IF
Civil Aviation Authority for the conducting ground courses, safety courses and simulator
training or any training center certified under Part 142.

PY
All training facilities, devices, course materials and equipment whether owned or subcontracted
must:
O
 Meet the required qualification and performance standards;
 Reflect PAS fleet configuration.
C
 Be periodically reviewed to require compliance with approved standards.
All approvals for the training centers used by PAS and PAS facilities are available in Training
D

Department.
E

3.6.2. Classroom Facilities

LL

Classroom training aids and equipment including computers should reflect the content of the
course and the complexity of the aircraft. For airplanes certified for multi-pilot operations, the
O

minimum level of ground training aids for approval should include equipment that provides a
realistic cockpit working environment. Task analysis and the latest state of the art training
TR

technology are encouraged by the Authority and should be fully incorporated into the training
facilities wherever possible.
N

3.6.3. Computer Based Training

O

Where CBT aids are used as a training tool, the organization should ensure that a fully qualified
ground instructor is available at all times when such equipment is being used by course students.
C

Other than for revision periods, CBT lessons should be briefed and debriefed by a qualified
N

ground instructor.
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 31
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
3.6.4. Training Devices

TE
The Approved Full Flight Simulators are compliant with international standards laid down by the
JAA specifically JAR STD 1A. The target accreditation for all FFS devices operated by the
Company is a minimum Level 'C' or optimally Level 'D' where the data package from the aircraft

IN
manufacturer supports it. Where this is not the case, the standard manufacturer’s data package is
used and a differences course is provided. Simulators are subject to an annual check as specified

PR
by the Authority.
An Aircraft simulator approved under this section must be used instead of aircraft to satisfy the
pilot flight training requirements prescribed in the extended envelope training set .

IF
PAS shall require minimum serviceability requirements include any major malfunction such

PY
as simulator motion, visual systems, instrumentation that may affect the session plan even in
training and/or examination. Less important malfunction will be judged by the instructor to
continue or terminate the training.
O
The Authority has approved the following simulators and training devices, located at the Montreal
C

Bombardier Training Center, Madrid & Copenhagen CAE TRAING CENTERS, for the purposes of
carrying out pilot training and testing as detailed:
D

 Full Flight Simulator (Level ‘D’)

E

 Pilot Transition Training

LL

 Pilot Proficiency Checks

 Instrument Rating Checks
 All Weather Operations Training and Checking
O

 Pilot Recency Type Experience

TR

 Recurrent Training
 LOFT/LOS and LOE Training
 Procedures Training
N

 Technical Systems Training

 Technical Refresher Training
O

 Zero Flight Time Training

C

Additional simulator centers approved by the Authority are listed in ECAA.

N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 3
OM Part D Page: 32
Training Manual TRAINING
TRAINING TESTING & CHECKING TESTING
PROCESS

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

CHAPTER 4 GROUND TRAINING .................................................................................................... 2

4.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................ 2

D
4.1. BASIC INDOCTRINATION. (REF. ECAR 121.415) ............................................................................... 3

TE
4.1.1 Flight Crew ............................................................................................................................. 3
4.1.2. Cabin Crew ............................................................................................................................ 9
4.2. INITIAL GROUND TRAINING ........................................................................................................... 13
4.3. TRANSITION GROUND TRAINING ..................................................................................................... 18

IN
4.4. RECURRENT GROUND TRAINING .................................................................................................... 23
4.5. DIFFERENCE GROUND TRAINING ................................................................................................... 25

PR
4.6. INSTRUCTOR PILOTS INITIAL / TRANSITION GROUND TRAINING .................................................. 28
4.7. EXAMINER/CHECK AIRMAN INITIAL AND TRANSITION GROUND TRAINING ................................. 30
4.8. TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (TCAS) ........................................................ 32
4.9. COMMAND UP-GRADE GROUND TRAINING .................................................................................... 34

IF
4.10. ADVERSE WEATHER OPERATIONS ............................................................................................... 36
4.11. ROUTE AND AIRPORT QUALIFICATION ....................................................................................... 39
4.11.1. Qualification for CAT C Airport ........................................................................................ 42
PY
4.12. CREW RESOURCES MANAGEMENT (CRM) TRAINING COURSE (JOINT WITH CABIN CREW AND
FLIGHT DISPATCHERS). (REF. ECAR 121.419 (VIII)) ............................................................................ 45
4.13. DANGEROUS GOODS AND HAZARDOUS MATERIAL TRAINING ................................................... 47
O
4.14. REDUCED VERTICAL SEPARATION MINIMA (RVSM). ..................................................................... 49
4.15. LOW VISIBILITY OPERATION . ....................................................................................................... 51
C

4.16. WIND SHEAR GROUND TRAINING ................................................................................................. 52

4.17. CONTROLLED FLIGHT INTO TERRAIN (CFIT)................................................................................ 54
4.18 AIRCRAFT UPSET RECOVERY ........................................................................................................ 55
D

4.19. P-RNAV (RNP1) (IF APPLICABLE) ......................................................................................... 56

4.20 ENGLISH LANGUAGE TEST STANDARD ........................................................................................... 58
E

4.21. SMS COURSE (SAFETY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COURSE): ............................................................. 59

LL

4.22 GENERAL SAFETY TRAINING .......................................................................................................... 60

4.22.1 Initial General Safety Training ............................................................................................ 60
4.22.2 Recurrent General Safety Training...................................................................................... 65
O

4.22.2.1 General Safety Training - 12 Calendar Month. ............................................................................ 66

4.22.2.2 he 24 Calendar Month Recurrent Training................................................................................... 68
TR

4.23 ELECTRONIC FLIGHT BAG TRAINING (EFB) (IF APPLICABLE) .................................................... 70

N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

CHAPTER 4 GROUND TRAINING

4.1 General.

D
a) Purpose.
The purpose of this chapter is to detail the specific Ground Training Courses

TE
administered by the Training Department or other Courses administered by an
approved Training center.

IN
b) Evaluations.
The trainee must obtain a minimum of 70% corrected to 100% on all examinations

PR
and demonstrate the required skills and knowledge in order to pass a unit of
instruction and satisfactory complete a course
c) ground courses required for initial hired pilots

IF
GROUND COURSES HOURS
Basic Indoctrination. (initial).
PY 40
Basic Indoctrination. (Training for past airline experience). 20
Initial Ground Training 105
Traffic Alert And Collision Avoidance System (TCAS). 2
O
Adverse weather operations. 7
Crew Resources Management (CRM) Training Course (Joint with
C

16
Cabin Crew and Flight Dispatchers).
Dangerous Goods and Hazardous Material Training. 5
D

Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM). 2

Wind Shear Ground Training. 4
E

Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT). 2

LL

Aircraft Upset Recovery 4

P-RNAV (RNP1). 7
O

English Language Test Standard 2

SMS Course (Safety Management System Course). 8
TR

General Safety Training. 24

N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.1. Basic Indoctrination. (Ref. ECAR 121.415)

4.1.1 Flight Crew.

D
Objective.

TE
To prepare new pilots for appropriate ground and flight training.
Is to familiarize the crew member joining the company with general company rules,

IN
regulations, duties and all related aspects of the company to achieve the highest level
of safety, economical and passenger care.

PR
Furthermore, to achieve highest level of standardization through the understanding of
all local and international rules and regulations.

IF
PAS shall ensure flight crew members complete Basic Indoctrination training during
initial ground training.
Prerequisite.
PY
Crew members attending initial, transition and Re-qualification training courses.
O
Course Duration.
C

 40 Training hours for a newly hired crew member with no operational or airline
experience.
D

 20 Training hours for a newly hired crew member with past operational or airline
experience.
E

Recurrent Training.
LL

N/A
O

Training Location.
TR

PAS company training class rooms.

Methods of Instruction.
N

 Lecture.
Demonstration.
O


 Class participation.
C

 Follow-up reading material.

N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Curriculum.
Company Organization. 4 hours

D
Authorized operations; 4 hours

TE
Duties and responsibilities. 5 hours

IN
ECAR Regulations. 5 hours
Company back ground and History and operations 4 hours

PR
specifications.
General forms. 4 hours

IF
Manuals and sections of the OMA. 7 hours
Safety Management System.PY 4 hours
Electronic Flight bag training (EFB) If Applicable 3 hours
O
TOTAL 40 hours
C

Training for past operational or airline experience.

D

Curriculum.
E

Company Organization. 2 hours

LL

Authorized operations; 2 hours

O

Duties and responsibilities. 2 hours

TR

ECAR Regulations. 2 hours

Company back ground and History. 2 hours
N

General forms. 2 hours

O

Manuals and sections of the OMA. 3 hours

C

Safety Management System. 2 hours

N

Electronic Flight bag training (EFB) If Applicable 3 hours

U

TOTAL 20 hours

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 5
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Course Layout.
No. Subject Hours

D
A Company Organization. 4:00

TE
 Managing Director.
 Operation Department.
 Engineering Department.

IN
 Cabin Services Department.
 Commercial Department.

PR
 Ground Handling Department.
B General Discipline and conduct. 4:00
 Uniform.
 Company properties.

IF
 General conduct between crew members.
 General conduct during night stops.
PY
 General conduct while operating for other airlines
(wet lease).
 Cockpit discipline.
O
 Conduct with other company staff and out stations.
C Duties and responsibilities. 6:00
C

 According to operations manual.

D ECAR Regulations. 6:00
D

 According to operations manual regulations.

According to ECAR publications and amendments.
E


E Company back ground and History. 4:00
LL

 Goal.
 Authorized Type of operations.
O

F General forms. 4:00

 Voyage reports.
TR

 Confidential reports.
 Leave forms.
 Sickness report forms.
N

 Incident report forms.

Incident report forms (Bird strikes, GPWS, Lighting,
O


etc.).
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 6
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

G Manuals. 8:00
 Operations Manual.
 Aircraft operating Manual.

D
 Ground operations Manual.

TE
 MEL Manual.
 Cabin Emergency Manual.
 Operations Specifications.

IN
 Standard operating procedures Manual.

PR
H Safety Management System 4:00
 Safety overview.
 Hazard Identification and Reporting.
 Risk Management.

IF
 SMS and Airline Operation.
Total Hours 40:00
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 7
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Training for past operational or airline experience.

Course Layout.

D
No. Subject Hours

TE
A Company Organization. 2:00
 Managing Director.

IN
 Operation Department.
 Engineering Department.

PR
 Cabin Services Department.
 Commercial Department.
 Ground Handling Department.
B General Discipline and conduct. 2:00

IF
 Uniform.
 Company properties.
 General conduct between crew members.
PY
 General conduct during night stops.
 General conduct while operating for other airlines
(wet lease).
O
 Cockpit discipline.
C

 Conduct with other company staff and out stations.

C Duties and responsibilities. 3:00
D

 According to operations manual.

D ECAR Regulations. 3:00
E

 According to operations manual regulations.

LL

 According to ECAR publications and amendments.

E Company back ground and History. 2:00
O

 Goal.
 Authorized Type of operations.
TR

F General forms. 2:00

 Voyage reports.
N

 Confidential reports.
 Leave forms.
O

 Sickness report forms.

C

 Incident report forms.

 Incident report forms (Bird strikes, GPWS, Lighting,
N

etc.).
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 8
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

G Manuals. 4:00
 Operations Manual.
 Aircraft operating Manual.

D
 Ground operations Manual.

TE
 MEL Manual.
 Cabin Emergency Manual.
 Operations Specifications.

IN
 Standard operating procedures Manual.

PR
H Safety Management System 2:00
 Safety overview.
 Hazard Identification and Reporting.

IF
 Risk Management.
 SMS and Airline Operation.
PY
Total Hours 20:00
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 9
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.1.2. Cabin Crew.

Objective.

D
The objective of this course is to serve as an introduction for the new hire crew

TE
member to PAS and also server as the Basis for sub- sequent crew member
training.

IN
Prerequisite.
Cabin Crew members attending initial, transition and Re-qualification training

PR
courses.
Course Duration.

IF
 40 Training hours for a newly hired crew member with no operational or airline
experience.
 20 Training hours for a newly hired crew member with past operational or airline
PY
experience.
Recurrent Training.
O
Refer to OM-A Vol V "6.1.2"
C

Training Location.
Training shall be conducted by PAS trainers in the company training class rooms.
D

Methods of Instruction.
E

 Lecture.
LL

 Demonstration.
 Class participation.
O

 Follow-up reading material.

TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 10
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Curriculum.
Company Organization. 4 hours

D
General Discipline and conduct. 6 hours

TE
Duties and responsibilities. 6 hours

IN
ECAR Regulations. 8 hours
Company back ground and History. 4 hours

PR
General forms. 4 hours
Manuals. 8 hours

IF
TOTAL 40 hours
PY
Training for past operational or airline experience.
O
Curriculum.
C

Company Organization. 2 hours

General Discipline and conduct. 3 hours
D

Duties and responsibilities. 3 hours

E

ECAR Regulations. 4 hours

LL

Company back ground and History. 2 hours

O

General forms. 2 hours

TR

Manuals. 4 hours
TOTAL 20 hours
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 11
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Course Layout.
1. Company orientation:

D
 Over view Of PAS
 Type of operation conducted.

TE
 Company structure.
 Route structure.
 Organization chart.

IN
(Rules & Regulation manual)

PR
2. ECAR's and other applicable regulations and guidance materials:
 Over view of appropriate provision of ECAR's.
 Over view of appropriate regulations of Egypt.
3. Aviation terminology:

IF
 The International Phonetic Alphabet.
 Abbreviations.
 Theory of flight. PY
 The 24 hour clock.
 Time changes.
Ticketing.
O

 Air Craft definition.
C

 Meteorology.
 (Rules & Regulation manual)
D

4. PAS policies and procedures:

 Authority of pilot in command
E

 Chain of command
 Emergency Briefing
LL

 Emergency exits
 Cabin crew stations /call name
O

 Seating policy
 Passengers handling
TR

 Permissible size and weight of hand baggage

 Securing Cabin
 Servicing of aircraft
N

 Multiple occupancy of A/C seats

O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 12
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

5. Duties and responsibilities of crew members:

 Pre, during, and post flight duties.
 Night flight duties

D
 Special care cases duties and responsibilities

TE
 Handling of company material
 Accident / illness
 Crew hotels, night stops

IN
 Crew transportation to /from airport
6. Crew rules and regulations:

PR
 Behavior in public
 Personal documents
 Crew member certificates
 Uniform

IF
 Work performance
 Conversation
 Sleeping PY
7. Flight time limitation:
 Applicability
 Flight & duty time limitations and requirements
O
 Definition
General principles of control of flight, duty, rest time
C


 Limitation on single duty periods flight crew
 Extension of flight duty period by in-flight relief
D

 Extension of flight duty period by split duty

E

 Positioning
 Traveling time
LL

 A/C commander’s discretion to extend flying duty period.

 Delayed reporting time
O

 Rest periods.
 A/C commanders discretion to reduce a rest period
TR

 Stand by duty.
 Days off
 Accumulated duty & flying hours
N

 Cabin Crew required

 Records to be maintained
O

 Commanders discretion report, reduction of rest periods

C

 Voyage details
8. Crew health precautions:
N

 Alcoholic beverages
 Use of drugs
U

 Meal precautions

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 13
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.2. Initial Ground Training .

D
(Ref. ECAR 121.419 a, b)

TE
General.
The purpose of this course is to train the crewmember to be proficient in the
operational theory and procedures related to the aircraft systems, limitations, and

IN
emergency equipment. The training will prepare the trainee to meet the entry
requirements of the flight training and provide the basis for the standardized

PR
operation.
This phase of training is to supply trainees with all the technical information enabling
the application of all normal, abnormal and emergency procedures.

IF
Moreover, the aircraft performance and the theoretical part of the safety course are
also studied during the ground training phase.
PY
The objectives are:
O
 To use the complete normal procedure with each crew member performing his
own task in crew coordination.
C

 To make each trainee capable of performing his tasks in normal flight conditions
with no failures.
D

 To demonstrate aircraft characteristics in normal operation, with the maximum

degree of realism, particularly those requiring visual outside reference.
E

 For pilots, stall preventing and recovery in clean configuration, takeoff and
LL

maneuvering configuration, and landing configuration: and

 For pilots, upset prevention and recovery.
For Normal operation.
O

Having studied each system of the aircraft separately during the previous stage the
TR

trainee shall study the integration of these systems and subsequent procedures, as well
as aircraft handling in normal situations. (No failures).
N

The fixed base simulator shall be used as the training device.

O

Prerequisite.
C

A New hired Crew members attending initial training courses satisfactorily completed
the basic indoctrination course.
N
U

Course Duration.
For initial training 105 hours during 15 working days.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 14
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Recurrent Training.
Recurrent training and evaluation required every 12 calendar months.

D
Training Location.

TE
Ground training course shall be conducted at one of the well-established training
centers approved and certified by ECAA such as EGYPT AIR TRAINING CENTER,

IN
and PAS Class rooms. The duration of the Ground Training course including Aircraft
systems, limitations training and Aircraft performance and applicable examination is

PR
15 working days excluding week ends and national holidays.
Method of Instructions.
Lectures.

IF
Training aids.
 Presentation
PY
 Videos
 Handout materials
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 15
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Course Layout.
1. Aircraft general . limitations 7 hours

D
2. Communication / Navigation. 7 hours

TE
3. FMS. 14 hours

IN
4. APU / Fuel. 7 hours
5. Electrical. 7 hours

PR
6. Hydraulic / Landing Gear. 7 hours
7. Flight control. 14 hours

IF
8. Pneumatics / Air conditioning. 7 hours
9. Pressurization / Ventilation.
PY 7 hours
10. Power plant. 7 hours
O
11. Fire protection / Ice and rain protection. 7 hours
C

12. Performance. 12 hours

13. Final examination.
D

2 hours
E

Total Hours 105 hours

LL

Performance Course layout.

Shall be covered using Aircraft performance course for a duration of 2 working days
O

including a performance test for 2 hours.

TR

1. Presentation
 FCOM
 Exercises (QUIZ)
N

2. Weight / mass and Balance

O

 Reminder
C

 Center of gravity limits.

N

 QUIZ.
U

 Balance chart.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 16
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

3. Flight Planning
 FCOM presentation.

D
 Contents.
 Fuel policy.

TE
 Cruise level.
 Integrated calculation.
 Quick calculation.

IN
 Alternate flight.
 Fuel Planning.

PR
 QUIZ.
4. Take – OFF Performance.

IF
 Definitions.
 Limitations.
 Calculation optimization.
 Flex temperature philosophy.
PY
 QUIZ.
O
 FCOM presentation.
 Obstacle clearance.
C

 Speeds.
 Regulatory Take-off and
D

 Landing charts.
 QUIZ.
E

5. IN Flight Performance.
LL

 FCOM Presentation.
 Operating data.
O

 Climb.
 Cruise.
TR

 Descent.
 Holding.
 GO around.
N

 QUIZ check.
 Diversion.
O

 QUIZ.
C

6. Landing.
N

 FCOM presentation.
 General.
U

 Speeds.
 Actual landing distance.
 Available landing distance.
 QUIZ.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 17
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

7. Single Engine.
 FCOM Presentation.

D
 Regulation.
 Flight preparation.

TE
 In flight failure.
 Engine-out drift down.
 QUIZ.

IN
8. Effect of inoperative or missing components (MEL / CDL)

PR
Aircraft Ground Training Schedule.
DAY Training Subject Working days

IF
One A/C General & Limitations. 1

Two / Three FMS.

PY 2
Four Navigation - Fuel - communication. 1
APU - Electrical.
O
Five 1
Hydraulic - Landing Gear.
C

Six 1
Seven / Eight Flight control. 2
D

Nine Power plant. 1

E

Ten Air conditioning - Pressurization - Ice and 1

LL

rain protection.
Fire protection - Pneumatics.
O

Eleven / twelve 2
Performance.
TR

Thirteen / fourteen 2
Fifteen Final Exam. 1
N

Total 15
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 18
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.3. Transition Ground Training .

(Ref. ECAR 121.419 a, b)

D
Objective.

TE
The purpose of this course is to train the crewmember to be proficient in the
operational theory and procedures related to the aircraft systems, limitations, and

IN
emergency equipment. The training will prepare the trainee to meet the entry
requirements of the flight training and provide the basis for the standardized operation

PR
of all normal, abnormal and emergency procedures.
Moreover the aircraft performance and the theoretical part of the safety course are
also studied during the ground training phase.

IF
The objectives are:
PY
 To use the complete normal procedure with each crew member performing his
own task in crew coordination.
 To make each trainee capable of performing his tasks in normal flight conditions
O
with no failures.
 To demonstrate aircraft characteristics in normal operation, with the maximum
C

degree of realism, particularly those requiring visual outside reference.

For Normal operation.
D

Having studied each system of the aircraft separately during the previous stage the
E

trainee shall study the integration of these systems and subsequent procedures, as well
as aircraft handling in normal situations. (No failures).
LL

The fixed base simulator shall be used as the training device.

O

Prerequisite.
TR

A New hired Crew members operate another aircraft with the same capacity attending
Transition Training courses satisfactorily completed the basic indoctrination course.
N

Course Duration.
O

For initial training 105 hours during 15 working day.

C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 19
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Recurrent Training.
Recurrent training required every 12 calendar months

D
Training Location.

TE
Ground training course shall be conducted at one of the well-established training
centers approved and certified by ECAA such as EGYPT AIR TRAINING CENTER,

IN
and PAS Class rooms. The duration of the Ground Training course including Aircraft
systems, limitations training and Aircraft performance and applicable examination is

PR
15 working days excluding week ends and national holidays.
Method of Instructions.
Lectures.

IF
Training aids.
 Presentation
PY
 Videos
 Handout materials
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 20
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Course Layout.
1. Aircraft general & limitations. 7 hours

D
2. Communication / Navigation. 7 hours

TE
3. FMS. 14 hours

IN
4. APU / Fuel. 7 hours
5. Electrical. 7 hours

PR
6. Hydraulic / Landing Gear. 7 hours
7. Flight control. 14 hours

IF
8. Pneumatics / Air conditioning. 7 hours
9. Pressurization / Ventilation.
PY 7 hours
10. Power plant. 7 hours
O
11. Fire protection / Ice and rain protection. 7 hours
C

12. Performance. 12 hours

13. Final examination.
D

2 hours
E

Total Hours 105 hours

LL

Performance Course layout.

Shall be covered using Aircraft performance course for a duration of 2 working days
O

including a performance test for 2 hours.

TR

1. Presentation
 FCOM
 Exercises (QUIZ)
N

2. Weight / mass and Balance

O

 Reminder
C

 Reference chord.
 Center of gravity limits.
N

 QUIZ.
U

 Balance chart.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 21
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

3. Flight Planning

D
 FCOM presentation.
 Contents.

TE
 Fuel policy.
 Cruise level.
 Quick calculation.

IN
 Alternate flight.
 Fuel Planning.

PR
 QUIZ.
4. Take – OFF Performance.
 Reminder.

IF
 Definitions.
 Limitations.
 Calculation optimization.
 Flex temperature philosophy.
PY
 QUIZ.
O
 FCOM presentation.
 Obstacle clearance.
C

 Speeds.
 Regulatory Take-off and
D

 Landing charts.
 QUIZ.
E

5. IN Flight Performance.
LL

 FCOM Presentation.
 Operating data.
O

 Climb.
 Cruise.
TR

 Descent.
 Holding.
 GO around.
N

 QUIZ check.
 Diversion.
O

 QUIZ.
C

6. Landing.
N

 FCOM presentation.
 General.
U

 Speeds.
 Actual landing distance.
 Available landing distance.
 QUIZ.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 22
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

7. Single Engine.
 FCOM Presentation.

D
 Regulation.
 Flight preparation.

TE
 In flight failure.
 Engine-out drift down.
 QUIZ.

IN
8. Effect of inoperative or missing components (MEL / CDL)

PR
Aircraft Ground Training Schedule.
DAY Training Subject Working days

IF
One A/C General & Limitations. 1
Two / Three FMS. PY 2
Four Navigation - Fuel - communication. 1
APU - Electrical.
O
Five 1
Hydraulic - Landing Gear.
C

Six 1
Seven / Eight Flight control. 2
D

Nine Power plant. 1

E

Ten Air conditioning - Pressurization - Ice and 1

LL

rain protection.
Fire protection - Pneumatics.
O

Eleven / twelve 2
Performance.
TR

Thirteen / fourteen 2
Fifteen Final Exam. 1
N

Total 15
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 23
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.4. Recurrent Ground Training.

Objective.

D
The objective of this course is to ensure the competence of flight crew member on

TE
subjects related to efficient and safe flight Operations
Prerequisite.

IN
This training is designed for crew members who are currently qualified on PAS

PR
aircraft's.
Training location.
Training will be conducted by PAS approved classroom at the company location in

IF
Cairo.
Course duration. PY
This course will covered once every 12 calendar months and approximately 25 hours
during 3 working days including 2 hours exam.
O
As an integral part of recurrent training each crew member will participate in
C

continuous reading program consisting of:

1. Operations Bulletins
D

2. Flight Handbook / Flight Crew Operating Manual Bulletins.

E

3. Information Bulletins.
4. Safety Bulletins.
LL

5. Policy Bulletins.
These bulletins will be issued any time there are operational revisions which need to
O

be communicated to crewmember.
TR

Training aids.
 Visual aids.
CD ROM's.
N


 Flight crew operating manual (FCOM).
O

 Flight operation manual (OMA).

C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 24
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Methods of Instruction.
 Lectures.

D
 Class room drills.
 Written test.

TE
Curriculum. (Approximately 24 hours during 3 working day)
 Normal Operating Procedures.

IN
 Emergency Operating Procedures.
 Aircraft Systems and modifications .

PR
 FOM and General SOP.
 Emergency equipment and evacuation procedures (every 12 month). .
 Performance.
 Ground De-icing / Anti-icing.

IF
 Adverse weather and Wind Shear.
 Differences if required.
 Limitations PY
 New policies, rules, instructions and procedures;
 New aircraft types, systems and fleet modifications/upgrades.
Examination.
O

C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 25
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.5. Difference Ground Training.

Objective.

D
The Difference ground training required to provide the crew members and flight

TE
Dispatchers with the major differences between the base line aircraft and the same
family aircrafts or installing a new equipment.

IN
Prerequisite.

PR
This course is predicated on the crew member having attended the same type of initial
ground training.
Training location.

IF
Training will be conducted by PAS in the classrooms at the company's location in
Cairo. PY
Training Methods.
O
 Lectures.
 Class participation.
C

Training aids.
 Visual Aids.
D

 Relevant Manuals.
E

 Briefing Notes.
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 26
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 27
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.6. Instructor Pilots Initial / Transition Ground Training.

D
(Ref. ECAR 121.414 (c))

TE
Objective.
The course is intended to ensure that Instructor pilots under training:

IN
 Receive adequate knowledge in basic training principles, objectives, effective
methods, techniques, policies, common errors, briefings and debriefing etc....

PR
 To enhance their instructional skills including those of communication and
psychological understanding.
 To develop the participant's positive attitudes toward self-learning and transfer of
knowledge to others.

IF
Prerequisite.
Crew members who has been selected to be trained as an Instructor pilot in
PY
accordance with procedure outlined in operations training Manual (Chapter 2).
Course Duration.
O

 Training shall be 24 hours during 4 working days at PAS Approved Classrooms

C

and;
 30 hours during 5 working days at ECAA approved training centers for new
D

instructors only (instructor professional skills).

Training location.
E

 Training will be conducted by PAS sat company location in Cairo and;

LL

 ECAA approved training centers

Training Methods.
O

 Lectures.
TR

 Classroom discussions.
 Visual aids.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 28
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Curriculum.

D
 Flight instructor duties, responsibilities and function.
 Provision from applicable ECARs.

TE
 Policy and procedures contained in Training & Operation Manual.
 The approved Methods, procedures, limitation and techniques for performing the
required normal, abnormal and emergency procedures in the aircraft.

IN
 Evaluation for pilot performance, grading scale, tolerances.
 Corrective actions in case of unsatisfactory checks.

PR
 Forms and Documents.
 Teaching methods and procedures.
 The instructor – student relationship.
 Briefing and debriefing

IF
 Human performance issues
 The fundamentals of teaching and evaluation;


Lesson plan management; PY
Simulator serviceability and training in simulator operation;
 As applicable, the simulated or actual weather and environmental conditions
O
necessary to conduct each simulator or aircraft training/evaluation session to be
administered.
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 29
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 30
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.7. Examiner/Check Airman Initial and Transition Ground Training.

Examiner/Check Airman duties, responsibilities, functions and authority.

D
 Procedures, policies, requirements contained in PAS Flight Operations

TE
and Training Manuals.
 Applicable provisions from ECARs.
 Appropriate corrective actions in the case of unsatisfactory checks.

IN
 Approved methods, procedures and limitations for performing the required
Normal, Abnormal procedures of the aircraft.

PR
Objective
The objective of this course is to qualify selected PAS Instructor Pilots for assuming
duties and responsibilities as Check Airmen.

IF
Pre-requisite
PY
This training is predicated on the predicated whom have satisfactorily qualified as
Instructor Pilots, acquiring skills, techniques and adequate experience satisfying the
selection committee requirements & PAS standards.
O
Training Location
C

Training will be conducted by PAS at the company location in Cairo.

D

Training Aids
E

 EASA & TC Instructor Pilot hand book.

 Training and Operation Manual.
LL

 Briefing and de briefing hand book.

Methods of Instruction
O

 Lectures.
TR

 Class participation
 Classroom drill
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 31
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Curriculum
 Examiner/Check airman duties, responsibilities and function.

D
 Provision from applicable ECARs.
 Policy and procedures contained in Training & Operation Manual.

TE
 Methods, procedures, and techniques for conduction required checks.
 Evaluation for pilot performance, grading scale, tolerances.
 Corrective actions in case of satisfactory checks.

IN
 Forms and Documents.
Course Layout.

PR
No. Subject Hours
1. Duties, responsibilities, functions and authority 1:00

IF
2. ECARs 1:00
3. PAS Training Manual
PY 2:00
4. PAS Operation Manual. 1:00
O
5. Methods and techniques. 1:00
C

6. Evaluation and grading 1:00

D

7. Corrective actions. 1:00

E

8. Forms and documents. 1:00

LL

Total : 9:00
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 32
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.8. Traffic Alert And Collision Avoidance System (TCAS).

Course Objectives

D
This course is designed to train pilots in those areas of TCAS which they are

TE
required to know prior to operating in RVSM airspace.
Pre-requisite

IN
All pilots operating a TCAS equipped aircraft.

PR
Training Location
Training will be conducted at PAS’s classroom

IF
Course Duration.
2 hours PY
Methods of Instruction
 Class Work.
O
 Demonstration and Observations.
 PAS training aids.
C

Curriculum
D

 TCAS operating characteristics and parameters.

 Interaction between TCAS and RVSM.
E

 Transition area operations.

LL

 Planned Modifications TCAS.

 Recommended operating procedures.
 Reporting Requirement.
O

 Recurrent Training.
TCAS/RVSM quiz.
TR


N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 33
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Course Outline
a) TCAS Operating characteristics and parameters.

D
Basic TCAS operation and thresholds above FL290.
Both aircraft level.

TE
ONE or BOTH aircrafts climbing or descending.
BOTH aircrafts LEVEL.

IN
ONE or BOTH aircrafts with vertical rate.
Potential for extended RA display.

PR
In transition areas.
b) Interaction between TCAS and RVSM.
RVSM airspace operations.

IF
TA’s
RA’s
c) Transition area operations
PY
TA’s
RA’s
O
d) Planned modifications to TCAS
C

TCAS design criteria.

e) Recommended operating
D

Recommended mode during all operations

E

Recommended climb and descent rates

LL

f) Reporting requirements
Collection of data.
Reports.
O

g) Recurrent training
TR

Discussion of TA’s/RA’s.
TCAS scenario.
N

h) TCAS/RVSM quiz.
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 34
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.9. Command UP-Grade Ground Training.

(Ref. ECAR 121.419)

D
Objective.

TE
Up-grading and refreshing General, aviation, and aircraft technical information with
emphasis on ECAA and company duties, responsibilities, requirements, and

IN
regulations.

PR
Course Duration.
Training shall be 24 hours during 4 working days.
Training Location.

IF
Training will be conducted by PAS in the training class rooms at the company location in
Cairo. PY
Methods of Instruction.
O
 Lectures.
 Class participation.
C

 Visual Aids
 Follow - up reading material.
D

Curriculum.
E

 Technical refresher. *
 General subjects.
LL

 Meteorology.
 Performance and flight planning. *
O

 Aircraft Flight Manual.

 Operations Manual.
TR

* Note: In case these subjects have been completed within the previous 6 months
from the commencement of the command up-grade training then they may be omitted
from ground training.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 35
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Course layout.
No. Subject

D
Day 1  General subjects.

TE
 Determination of weight and balance.
 Runway limitation for takeoff and landing.
 Utilizing reduced flex. Temp. And reduced V1-V2-VR.

IN
 Company dispatch procedures. (documents)
 Use of navigation aids and instrument approach Procedures.

PR
 Visual cues prior to and during descent below DH or MDA.
 ATC procedures :
 Unlawful interference.
 Communication failure procedures.

IF
 Urgency and distress communication.
 Search and rescue.
Day 2 Meteorology.
PY
 Low - altitude wind shear.
 Meteorological reports.
O
 Frontal systems and thunderstorms (detection and Avoidance).
 Icing and fog.
C

 Turbulence and high altitude weather.

Day 3 Flight Crew Operating Manual (FCOM).
D

 Normal procedures.
 Emergency procedures.
E

 Supplementary techniques.
LL

 Operating emergency bulletins.

 Limitations.
O

Flight Operation Manual.

 Operating weather minims.
TR

Day 4  Take off, En-route & landing alternates.

 Authority and responsibilities of the PIC in operations, and documents.
 Flight time limitations & minimum crew rest.
N

 Responsibilities relevant to the reporting of accidents and incidents.

 PAS Fuel Policy.
O

 Review of human performance and CRM Skill Training relevant to

command, Team work, leader Ship with all crew members.
C

 Adherence to the limitations of the AOC;

N

 Responsibilities relevant to the OFP and ATL;

U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 36
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.10. Adverse weather operations.

Objectives.

D
The objective of this course is to review all possible areas of adverse weather that

TE
may be encountered on PAS’s area of operations.
Prerequisite.

IN
Crew members attending initial, transition, difference, upgrade and recurrent training

PR
courses.
Course Duration.
Initial Training shall be 7 hours during 1 working day.

IF
Recurrent Training.
PY
Every 12 months 7 hours during 1 working day.
PAS will provide training for cockpit crew as a part of recurrent ground training and
O
simulator training.
C

Training Location.
Training will be conducted by PAS in the training class rooms and ECAA approved
D

flight simulators.
E

Training aids.
LL

 Lectures (standard classroom).

 Hand out reading materials (Adverse weather operation briefing Notes – FCOM /
O

Operation Manual).
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 37
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Curriculum.
 Cold weather operations

D
• Performance considerations in cold weather conditions.
• Altimeter Corrections.

TE
 Aircraft De-icing / Anti-icing
• Inspection

IN
• Glossary / Definition.
• Flight crew information – communication.

PR
• Aircraft Surface Contamination
• De-icing / Anti-icing Procedures
• Cold Weather Pre-flight inspection
• Recognition of conditions requiring the use of aircraft anti icing systems

IF
and contaminated pavement aircraft handling techniques.
• De-icing / Anti-icing awareness – the basic requirements.
• De-icing / Anti-icing aircraft on the ground : "WHEN, WHY AND HOW"
PY
• Checks to determine the need to de-ice / anti-ice.
• Responsibilities of de-ice / anti-ice decision.
O
• Pilot techniques.
• Aerodynamics and the contaminated wing.
C

• Fluid characteristics and handling.

 Contaminated runway operations;
D

 Thunderstorm avoidance;
 Volcanic ash avoidance
E

 Flight in turbulence, turbulence penetration speed/Mach, actions and handling

LL

consequences.
 Hot weather operations;
 High altitude airports;
O

 Aircraft preparation in adverse weather.

TR

 Use of weather radar

 Performance considerations in “hot and high” conditions
 Effect of high TAS
N

 Recognition of conditions requiring the use of hot weather or high elevation

procedures
O

 Air mass characteristics leading to possible severe turbulence.

 Use of documentation: temperature and wind gradient on computer flight plan.
C

 Examination.
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 38
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Course Layout
1) Cold Weather Pre-flight Inspection

D
I. Recommended Weather Pre-flight Inspection.
II. MEL Considerations.

TE
2) De-icing / Anti-icing
Holdover Time
I. Application of De-icing or Anti-icing Fluid.

IN
II. Holdover Time Guidelines.
III. Use of Holdover Tables

PR
3) Aircraft De-icing or Anti-icing Inspections Procedures
I. Pre-flight Inspections
II. Pre-take-off Check.
III. Pre-take-off Contamination Check.

IF
4) Communication
Procedures of Communication between Crewmembers and De-icing /Anti-icing
PY
Personnel.
5) Aircraft Surface Contamination
O
I. Identification of Surface Contamination.
II. Critical Area Identification.
C

III. Aircraft Performance.

IV. Flight Characteristics.
D

6) De-icing Anti-icing Procedures

I. Types of Fluids.
E

II. Fluid Characteristics.

LL

7) Recognizing Contamination on Aircraft

I. Aerodynamics on Aircraft.
II. Definitions of Icing Conditions.
O

8) Volcanic ash avoidance

TR

9) Runway contamination
N

10) Thunderstorm avoidance

O

11) Cold weather operations

C

12) Hot weather operations

N

13) Examination
U

To verify the crewmember’s knowledge of PAS approved ground De-

icing/Anti-icing Program.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 39
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.11. Route and Airport Qualification.

Objectives.

D
The purpose of this course is to provide a Pilot-In-Command with the necessary and

TE
required current information pertinent to the routes and airports into which he will be
operating.

IN
Perquisite.

PR
This course is predicated on the Pilot-In-Command being a qualified line captain on
the aircraft to which he is assigned. The Chief Pilot will select pilots for this course
who require initial airport qualification or will be operating into a special area or
airport.

IF
Training Location.
PY
Training will be conducted by PAS in the training class rooms at the company location in
Cairo.
O
Training aids.
Visual aids.
C


 CD ROM's.
 Flight crew operating manual.
D

 Flight operation manual.

E

Methods of Training.
LL

 Lectures.
 Classroom discussions.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 40
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Course Layout.
1) Weather

D
 Thunderstorms.
 Frontal activity.

TE
 Seasonal meteorological conditions.
2) Navigation Facilities.
 Navigational facilities and procedures, including any long-range

IN
navigation procedures associated with the route along which the flight is to
take place.

PR
 VOR
 ILS
 Radar

IF
3) Communications.
 Enroute Frequencies.
 Terminal Frequencies. PY
 Visual Aids.
 Metrological, Communication and Air Traffic facilities services &
procedures.
O
4) Terrain.
 Terrain and minimum safe altitudes.
C

 Types.
 Obstructions.
D

5) Flight Levels.
 Enroute.
E

 Terminal (Approach and Departure).

LL

6) Enroute and Terminal Area Procedures.

 Procedures applicable to flight paths over heavily populated areas and
areas of high air traffic density
O

 Arrival.
TR

 Departure.
 Holding.
 Authorized Instrument Approaches.
N

 Search and rescue procedures.

O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 41
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

7) Airport Characteristics.
 Congested Area.
 Physical Airport Layout.

D
 Terminal Area.

TE
 Airport obstructions, physical layout, lighting, approach aids and arrival,
departure, holding and instrument approach procedures and applicable
operating minima.

IN
8) Notices to Airman.
9) Political Considerations.

PR
 Regional.
 Local.
Curriculum.
 Weather

IF
 Navigation Facilities.
 Communications. PY
 Terrain.
 Flight Levels.
 Enroute and Terminal Area Procedures.
O
 Airport Characteristics.
 Notices to Airman.
C

 Political Considerations.
Note: The training time for the course will vary depending on the amount of coverage
D

required for each specific area, route or airport involved.

E

Validity/Recurrent Training
LL

Recurrent training is required every 12 months only if the pilot did not fly those
routes/airports as an active crewmember during the past 12 months.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 42
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.11.1. Qualification for CAT C Airport.

Objectives.

D
The purpose of this course is to Qualify PAS Flight Crew Members with the

TE
necessary and required current information pertinent to the routes and airports into
which he will be operating.

IN
Perquisite.
This course is predicated on the Flight Crew Members being a qualified line Pilots on

PR
the aircraft to which they are assigned. Chief Pilot will select pilots for this course
who required initial airport qualification or will be operating into a special area or
airport.

IF
Training Location.
Training will be conducted by PAS in the training class rooms at the company location in
PY
Cairo.
Training aids.
O
 Visual aids.
C

 CD ROM's.
 Flight crew operating manual.
D

 Flight operation manual.

Training Methods.
E

 Lectures.
LL

 Classroom discussions.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 43
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Course Layout.
1) Weather

D
 Thunderstorms.
 Frontal activity.

TE
 Seasonal meteorological conditions.
2) Navigation Facilities.
 Navigational facilities and procedures, including any long-range

IN
navigation procedures associated with the route along which the flight is to
take place.

PR
 VOR
 ILS
 Radar

IF
3) Communications.
 Enroute Frequencies.
 Terminal Frequencies. PY
 Visual Aids.
 Metrological, Communication and Air Traffic facilities services &
procedures.
O
4) Terrain.
 Terrain and minimum safe altitudes.
C

 Types.
 Obstructions.
D

5) Flight Levels.
 Enroute.
E

 Terminal (Approach and Departure).

LL

6) Enroute and Terminal Area Procedures.

 Procedures applicable to flight paths over heavily populated areas and
areas of high air traffic density
O

 Arrival.
TR

 Departure.
 Holding.
 Authorized Instrument Approaches.
N

 Search and rescue procedures.

O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 44
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

7) Airport Characteristics.
 Congested Area.
 Physical Airport Layout.

D
 Terminal Area.

TE
 Airport obstructions, physical layout, lighting, approach aids and arrival,
departure, holding and instrument approach procedures and applicable
operating minima.

IN
8) Notices to Airman.
9) Political Considerations.

PR
 Regional.
 Local.
Curriculum.
 Weather

IF
 Navigation Facilities.
 Communications. PY
 Terrain.
 Flight Levels.
 Enroute and Terminal Area Procedures.
O
 Airport Characteristics.
 Notices to Airman.
C

 Political Considerations.
Note: The training time for the course will vary depending on the amount of coverage
D

required for each specific area, route or airport involved.

E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 45
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.12. Crew Resources Management (CRM) Training Course (Joint with Cabin Crew and
Flight Dispatchers). (Ref. ECAR 121.419 (viii))

D
Objectives.

TE
This course is intended to ensure that all crew members / flight dispatchers receive adequate
training regarding available resources, crew communication, human factor, human error and

IN
performance, situational awareness, proper team work.
PAS will provide combined CRM training between ALL flight crew, Cabin Crew and

PR
Dispatchers.
Prerequisite.

IF
This course is required for all Crewmembers and Dispatchers (Flight Operation Officers) of
PAS and will be conducted jointly as PAS implements an Operational Control system with
shared responsibilities. PY
Course Duration.
O
 For initial training and evaluation 16 hours during 2 working day.
 Recurrent training and evaluation 8 hours during 1 working day.
C

Recurrent Training.
D

Recurrent training, and evaluation required One day 8 hours every 12 calendar months.
E

Training Location.
LL

Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as EGYPT
AIR TRAINING CENTER in Cairo and/or others like CAE.
O

Training aids.
TR

 Lectures (standard classroom).

 Video.
N

 Overhead projector + slides show.

 Hand out reading materials.
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 46
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

Curriculum:
 Introduction, general.

D
 Communication.
 Stress management, Fatigue and Sleep.

TE
 Human error, chain of error, error management (Human Factor).
 Human performance.
 Situational Awareness.

IN
 Team work, synergy and leadership.
 Standard operating procedures (operator’s).

PR
 CRM loop.
 Threat and error Management
 mutual understanding of the human factors involved in joint operational control
Decision Making.

IF


PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 47
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.13. Dangerous Goods and Hazardous Material Training.

(Ref. ECAR 121.434)

D
Objectives.

TE
This course is intended to ensure that flight crew /(FOO) Flight dispatcher receive adequate
training regarding the handling, loading, identifying, packing, marking, labeling and carriage

IN
of dangerous good and hazardous materials.

PR
Prerequisite.
Crewmembers attending initial, transition, difference and recurrent training courses.
Course Duration.

IF
 Initial Training 1 working day, 5 hrs. For non-Dangerous Goods carrier.
 For recurrent training 1 working day, 5 hrs. For non-Dangerous Goods carrier.
PY
 Initial Training 3 working days, 15 hrs. For Dangerous Goods carrier.
 For recurrent training 1 working day, 5 hrs. For Dangerous Goods carrier.
O
Recurrent Training.
C

Recurrent training required every 24 calendar months.

D

Training Location.
Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as EGYPT
E

AIR TRAINING CENTER in Cairo and/or others like CAE.

LL

Training aids.
O

Lectures (standard classroom).

TR

Video.
Overhead projector + slides show.
N

Hand out reading materials.

O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 48
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
Curriculum:

TE
 Definitions, limitations.
 Classes and divisions.
 List of Dangerous goods.

IN
 Packing.
 Marking.
 Labeling.

PR
 Loading.
 Provision of information (Notification to Captain).
 Dangerous goods Emergency response.

IF
Course Layout.
 General philosophy
 Limitations
 Labeling and marking
 Recognition of undeclared dangerous goods
 Provision for Pax and Crew
PY
O
 Emergency procedures.
C
Evaluation
Written examination
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 49
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
4.14. Reduced Vertical Separation Minima

TE
(RVSM). Prerequisites:
All pilots operating in RVSM airspace.

IN
Course Objective:

PR
This course is designed to train pilots in those areas of reduced vertical separation which they
are required to know prior to operating in RVSM airspace, also training considerations for using
TCAS in those areas.

IF
Duration:
2 hrs.

PY
Training Aids:
 Visual aids
O
 Handouts
 presentation
C

Place of Training:
D

PAS certified classroom

E

Course materials:
LL

 Flight Crew Operation Manual (FCOM)

 Flight Crew Training Manual (FCTM)
O

 Quick Reference Handbook (QRH)

 OM part A
TR

 RVSM course material

N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 50
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
Course Layout:

TE
 Introduction
 Definitions
 Regulations

IN
 ATC phraseology & clearance
 Operation Procedures
 MEL & minimum requirement

PR
 Contingency procedure
 What should you do?
 Preliminary cockpit preparation.
 After T/O and before RVSM entry.

IF
 While entering or flying in RVSM.
 If you have any failures.

PY
 After the flight.
 Basic concepts for contingencies
 RVSM quiz.
O
Recurrent Training for RVSM Operations shall be incorporated into the overall recurrent
training program for flight crew
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 51
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
4.15. Low Visibility Operation

TE
According to the ECAA approval and limitations contained in PAS Ops specs.

PAS is not approved for Low Visibility Operation

IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 52
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
TE
4.16. Wind Shear Ground Training.

Prerequisites:

IN
This course is required for all crewmembers on PAS aircraft.

PR
Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to train PAS crewmembers on Windshear related problems.
Duration:

IF
2 hrs.

PY
Training Aids:
 Visual aids
 Handouts
O
 presentation
C

Place of Training:
D

PAS certified classroom

E

Course materials:
LL

 Flight Crew Operation Manual (FCOM)

 Flight Crew Training Manual (FCTM)
 Quick Reference Handbook (QRH)
O

 OM part A
TR

 Windshear course material

N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 53
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
Course Layout:

TE
Operation in Wind-shear / Downburst conditions.
1) General:
I. Wind-shear associated with Convective Clouds and Storm Cells.

IN
II. Wind-shear associated with Non–Convective Frontal systems.
III. Wind-shear associated with strong winds near the ground.

PR
2) Detection of Conditions.
Indications of Windshear presence;
3) Optional Systems integrated on the Aircraft.

IF
I. Predictive Wind-shear.
II. Reactive Wind-shear.
4) Briefing and preparation.

PY
5) Precautions during take-off and landing.
I. Decreased performance.
II. Increased performance.
O
III. Increased Performance followed by Decreased Performance.
IV. Approach through Microburst.
C

V. Climb Gradient and Acceleration Capability.

VI. Acceleration Capability.
D

VII. Climb Gradient maintainability.

VIII. Windshear Quiz
E

6) Avoidance and recovery techniques

LL

7) Windshear case studies or scenarios.

O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 54
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
4.17. Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT).

TE
Course Title:
TERRAIN AWARENESS

IN
Prerequisites:

PR
This course is required for all crewmembers flying PAS aircraft.
Course Objective:
The purpose of this course is to provide the flight crewmembers with the knowledge needed to

IF
develop competence in terrain awareness procedures and maneuvers.
Duration:
2 hrs.
PY
O
Training Aids:
 Visual aids
C

 Handouts
 presentation
D

Place of Training:
E

PAS certified classroom

LL

Course materials:
O

 FCOM
 FCTM
TR

 QRH
 terrain awareness course material
N

Course Layout:
O

 CFIT avoidance techniques;

 CFIT recovery techniques and maximizing aircraft performance;
C

 GPWS alerts and warnings;

N

 CFIT case studies or scenarios. Case studies

U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 55
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
4.18 Aircraft Upset Recovery Prerequisites:

TE
This course is required for all pilot crew members flying PAS aircraft.
Course Objective:

IN
The objective of this training is to train all crew members about upset situations and recovery
including stall and recovery.

PR
Duration:
2 hrs.

IF
Training Aids:
 Visual aids

PY
 Handouts
 presentation
O
Place of Training:
C
PAS certified classroom
Course materials:
D

Upset recovery course material

E

Course Layout:
LL

 Upset prevention;
 Factors leading to an upset or loss of control situation;
O

 Upset situation identification;

 Recovery techniques;
TR

 Emphasis on aerodynamic factors present during the upset and the recovery.

Recurrent Training shall be incorporated into the overall recurrent training program for flight
N

crew
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 56
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
4.19. P-RNAV (RNP1) (If Applicable)

TE
(Ref. EAC 91_16)
Objective.

IN
The course is intended to ensure that all crew members receive the required knowledge for
P-RNAV operation, accuracy and requirements.

PR
Prerequisite.
Crew members attending Initial, Transition, Line operation and difference training course.

IF
Course Duration.
7 hours
Training Location.
PY
Training will be conducted by PAS at the company location in Cairo and approved simulator
O
facilities
C

Training Aids.
D

 Lectures.
 Hand out reading materials (RNAV briefing notes, FCON, OM-A)
E
LL

Course layout
(a) Lecture
O

 P-RNAV NOTAMs MEL

 Data Base integrity.
TR

 Before start operation Track keeping

 Descent and arrival operation
(b) Video
N

(c) Quiz
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 57
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
Curriculum.

TE
General. 30 min.
System description. 30 min.

IN
Airworthiness certification for RNAV (RNP1). 30 min.
Functional requirements. 30 min.

PR
Acceptable means of Airworthiness compliance 30 min.
Aircraft Flight manual. 30 min.

IF
Flight Crew Training 30 min.

PY
Operational criteria. 30 min.
Normal procedure. 30 min.
O
Contingency procedure. 30 min.
C
Incident Reporting. 30 min.
Data Base integrity. 30 min.
D

Flight Operational documentation. 30 min.

E
LL

Air space and airdrome requirements. 30 min.

TOTAL 7 HOURS
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 58
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
Curriculum

TE
The curriculum for this course will contain the following subjects related to the specific areas,
route airport involved.
Weather

IN
Navigation Facilities
Communications

PR
Terrain
Flight Levels
Enroute and Terminal Area Procedures

IF
Airport Characteristics
Notices to Airman
Political Considerations

PY
Note: The training time for the course will vary depending on the amount of coverage required
O
for each specific area, route or airport involved.
C

4.20 English Language Test Standard

D

All crew members and instructors must demonstrate sufficient level of proficiency in aviation
English language with a minimum of level 4 according to ICAO standards.
E
LL

Test Location
Egypt Air Training Center
O

Test Results
TR

 ICAO Level 4
 ICAO Level 5
 ICAO Level 6
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 59
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
4.21. SMS Course (Safety Management System Course):

TE
Objective:
This course is intended to ensure that all Crew Members, Dispatchers & All PAS Staff receive

IN
the required knowledge to understand the requirements of a SMS. It covers all SMS relevant
guidelines, contents, requirements and principles on a basic level appropriate to their operational
role.

PR
Course Duration.
8 hours

IF
Training Location.

PY
Training will be conducted at PAS Approved Classrooms at the company location in Cairo or
Egypt Air Training Center.
Recurrent training
O
Every 24 moths in accordance with CSMM manual Annex 10
C

Training & Material

D

Provided by Egyptian Civil Aviation Authority Instructors and will cover SMS elements that
E

are appropriate for this level, as a minimum:

LL

 SMS Overview
 SMS Components and Elements
 SMS Development and Implementation
O

 SMS Teamwork
 Human Error
TR

 Developing a Safety Culture

 Case Studies
 Performance Monitoring
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 60
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
4.22 General Safety Training

TE
4.22.1 Initial General Safety Training

Initial General Safety Training for Crewmembers includes two distinct subject areas:

IN
A. Emergency Situation Training.

PR
B. Emergency Drill Training.

IF
Objective
The objective of emergency drill training is to provide instructions and practice in the
actual use of different emergency equipment on board necessary to cover the all type of

PY
emergencies and for the purpose of enhancing onboard coordination and mutual understanding of
the human factors involved in addressing emergency situations the flight crew members will
O
participate in a joint General Safety Training.
C

Course Layout
D

A. Emergency Situation Training

E

1. Crewmember Duties And Responsibility

LL

 Emergency assignment.
 Captain's emergency authority.
 Reporting incidents and accidents.
O
TR

2. Crew Coordination And Company Communication

 Crewmembers notification procedures.
 Ground agency notification procedures.
 Company notification procedures.
N
O

3. Aircraft Fires
 Principles of composition and classes of fire.
C

 Smoke / Fumes.
 Use of appropriate hand fire extinguishers.
N

 Lavatory fires.
 Protective breathing equipment.
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 61
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
4. Prepared or Unprepared Ground Evacuation
 Aircraft configuration.

TE
 Directing passenger flow.
 Blocked or jammed exit procedures.
 Fuel spills and other ground hazards.

IN
 Handicapped persons.

PR
5. Prepared or Unprepared Ditching
 Cockpit and cabin preparation.
 Passenger briefing.
 Crew coordination.

IF
 Primary swells, secondary swells and sea conditions.
 Ditching headings and water landings. Including night time

PY
6. Decompressions
 Slow / rapid decompression.
 Respiration.
O
 Hypoxia, hypothermia and hyperventilation.
 Time of useful consciousness.
C

 Gas expansion / bubble formation.

 Physical phenomena and actual incidents.
D

7. Previous Aircraft Accidents / Incidents

E

 Accidents.
LL

 Human factors.

8. Crewmember Incapacitation
O

 Company procedures.
 Reporting requirements.
TR

 Interference with crewmembers.

N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 62
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
9. Safety Policies And Procedures
 Sterile cockpit / DND.

TE
 Briefings.
 Pax acceptance/handling.
 Carry-on baggage.

IN
 Electronic devices.
 Fueling – passenger on board.

PR
 Turbulence.
 Oxygen administration.
 Flight deck access/protocol.
 Safety checks.

IF
 SOP.
B. Emergency Drill Training

1. Hand-Held Fire Extinguishers

PY
 Inspection tags, dates, and proper charge levels.
 Removal and stowage of extinguishers.
O
 Actual discharge of each type of extinguisher.
 Maintenance procedures, the minimum equipment list (MEL).
C

2. Portable Oxygen System

D

 Inspection tags, dates, and pressures.

 Removal and stowage of oxygen bottles.
E

 Actual operation of each type of bottle and each type of Mask.

LL

 Therapeutic oxygen.

3. Emergency Exits
O

 Actual operation (open and close) of each exit in the normal and emergency
TR

modes.
 Instructions on the use of overwing exits & transfer from one exit to another.
N
O

4. Ditching Equipment
C

 Actual donning, use and inflation of individual floatation mean (life preservers).
N

 Introductions on survival equipment.

U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 63
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
C. Ground Competency Check
 The instructor at the end of the course to determine the ability of the trainee to

TE
perform assigned duties shall conduct a competency check.
 The competency check is either satisfactory or unsatisfactory.
 Competency Check will consist of:

IN
PR
PART.1 Emergency Situation
 Crewmembers Duties and Responsibilities.
 Crew Coordination and Company Communication.
 Crew Recourses Management training (CRM).

IF
 Dangerous Goods.
 Aircraft Fires.
Illness, Injury, and Basic First Aid.

PY

 Ground Evacuation.
 Ditching.
 Rapid Decompression.
O
 Previous aircraft accidents/incidents.
C
 Crewmember Incapacitation.
 Hijack and Bomb Threat.
E D

PART.2 Emergency Drills.

 Hand-held Fire Extinguishers.
LL

 Portable Oxygen System.

O

 Emergency Exits and Slides.

 Ditching Equipment.
TR

Examination
N

By the end of the course the instructor will conduct the exam to test the understanding &
O

knowledge of the trainee with the minimum passing grade of 80%.

C

Program Hours
N

 24 hours as a part of an initial course

 8 hours as a part of a recurrent course during every 24 months period
U

 4 hours as a part of a recurrent course during every 12 months period

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 64
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
Training Location

TE
 ECAA Approved Training Center.
 ECAA Approved Classroom.

IN
Training Aids

PR
 Visual Aids
 Training Films.
 Flip chart.
 OMA

IF
Methods of Instruction



Class work.
Demonstration.
Observation.
PY
O
 Participation.
C
 Hands-on training.
ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 65
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
4.22.2 Recurrent General Safety

TE
Training Objective
The objective of this course is to ensure the competence of Crewmembers to comply with
the provisions of ECAA through the annual recurrent training on subjects related to efficient

IN
and safe flight operations.

PR
Recurrent Training will be performed on routine bases. The 12 calendar month recurrent
training program will be followed by the 24 calendar month recurrent training.
A 12 calendar month recurrent training to refresh knowledge of Flight Crew in using safety

IF
manual, instructions on Emergency equipment on board, Emergency assignments and
procedures

PY
A 24 calendar month recurrent training should include the emergency joint training course
which will be conducted for Crewmembers every 24 calendar month. They should practice the
emergency drills and the use of emergency equipment on board jointly. They have to pass a
O
ground competency check following this training.
C
Prerequisite
Crewmembers that have been trained and qualified and must achieve training within the
D

appropriate eligibility period to maintain currency.

E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 66
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
4.22.2.1 General Safety Training - 12 Calendar Month.

TE
Emergency Equipment Training
1. Crewmember Duties And Responsibility
 Emergency assignment.

IN
 Captain's emergency authority.
 Reporting incidents and accidents.

PR
2. Crew Coordination and Company Communication
 Crewmembers notification procedures.
 Ground agency notification procedures.

IF
 Company notification procedures.

3. Aircraft Fires

PY
 Principles of combustion and classes of fire.
 Smoke / fumes.
 Use of appropriate hand fire extinguishers.
O
 Lavatory fires.
 Protective breathing equipment.
C

4. Prepared or Unprepared Ground Evacuation

D

 Aircraft configuration.
 Crewmembers responsibilities.
E

 Directing passenger flow.

LL

 Blocked or jammed exit procedures.

 Fuel spills and other ground hazards.
 Handicapped persons.
O
TR

5. Emergency Equipment Training

 Hand-Held Fire Extinguishers.
 Portable Oxygen System.
 Emergency Exits
N

 Ditching & Ditching Equipment.

O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 67
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 68
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

4.22.2.2 The 24 Calendar Month Recurrent Training

D
Curriculum

TE
 General emergency.
 Aircraft ground training.

IN
The 24 Calendar Month General Safety Training.

PR
Divided into 3 phases as following:
Phase I: Emergency Situation Training.

IF
Phase II: Emergency Drill training.

PY
PHASE I: Emergency Situation Training

1. Crewmembers Duties And Responsibility

O
 Emergency assignment.
 Captain's emergency authority.
C

 Reporting incidents and accidents.

D

2. Crew Coordination And Company Communication

 Crewmembers notification procedures.
E

 Ground agency notification procedures.

LL

 Company notification procedures.

O

3. Aircraft Fires
TR

 Principles of combustion and classes of fire.

 Smoke / fumes in cabin.
 Use of appropriate hand fire extinguishers.
N

 Lavatory fires.
 Protective breathing equipment.
O
C

4. Prepared or Unprepared Ground Evacuation

N

 Aircraft configuration.
 Crewmembers responsibilities.
U

 Directing passenger flow.

 Blocked or jammed exit procedures.
 Fuel spills and other ground hazards.
 Handicapped persons

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 69
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
5. Prepared or Unprepared Ditching

TE
 Cockpit and cabin preparation.
 Passenger briefing.
 Crew coordination.

IN
 Primary swells, secondary swells and sea conditions.
 Ditching headings and water landings.

PR
 Ditching at night.

6. Decompression
 Slow / rapid decompressions.

IF
 Respiration.
 Time of useful consciousness.
 Gas expansion / bubble formation.

PY
 Physical phenomena and actual incidents.

7. Previous Aircraft Accidents / Incidents Crewmember Incapacitation

O
 Company procedures.
 Reporting requirements.
C

 Interference with crew members.

D

8. Safety Policies And Procedures

 Sterile cockpit / DND.
E

 Briefings.
LL

 Pax acceptance/handling.
 Carry-on baggage.
 Electronic devices.
O

 Fueling – Pax on board.

 Turbulence.
TR

 Oxygen administration.
 Flight deck access/protocol.
 Safety checks.
N
O

PHASE II: Emergency Equipment Training

Hand-Held Fire Extinguishers.
C


 Portable Oxygen System.
N

 Emergency Exit and Slides.

 Ditching & Ditching Equipment.
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 4
OM Part D Page: 70
Training Manual GROUND
Ground Training TRAINING

D
4.23 Electronic Flight Bag Training (EFB)

TE
Reserved

IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

CHAPTER 5 FLIGHT TRAINING .................................................................................................. 3

D
5.1. General... .......................................................................................................................... 3
5.1.2. Evaluations. ..................................................................................................................... 3

TE
5.1.3. Initial, Transition and Recurrent Training Maneuvers and Procedures. .......................... 3
5.1.4. Proficiency Check Maneuvers and Procedures. .............................................................. 4

IN
5.1.5. Additional Time. .............................................................................................................. 4
5.2. Instructor / Check Airman Initial / Transition Flight Training. Objective. ............................ 5

PR
5.2.1. Instructor Pilot. ................................................................................................................ 6
5.2.2. Check Airman. ................................................................................................................. 7
5.2.3. Right Hand Seat Qualification. General .......................................................................... 8

IF
5.2.3.1 Right hand seat qualifications for Instructor Pilots.......................................................... 8
5.2.3.2 Right hand seat qualifications for Normal Line Captain. Objective. ............................. 10

PY
5.3. Instructor, Check Airmen & Examiner Recurrent Flight Training. (Proficiency Training). 12
5.4. Initial Flight Training. Objective. ......................................................................................... 14
O
5.7. Route Training (Line Training) Initial Operating Experience (IOE). Objective. ................. 23
5.7.8. Planned Sectors (IOE). .................................................................................................. 25
C

5.7.9. PAS requirements .......................................................................................................... 27

5.7.9.1. Initial (newly hired): .......................................................................................................... 27
D

5.7.9.2. First time Captain with experience on Type .................................................................. 27

E

5.7.9.3. First time Captain without experience on Type ............................................................. 27

LL

5.7.9.4. Transition ........................................................................................................................... 28

5.7.10. Pilot operating limitations and pairing requirements Ref. ECAR 121.435 ......................... 29
O

5.8. Proficiency Check................................................................................................................. 30

5.9. Line Check............................................................................................................................ 32
TR

5.10. LOFT Training. ............................................................................................................. 34

5.10.1. Introduction.................................................................................................................... 34
N

5.10.2. Basic LOFT elements. ................................................................................................... 35

O

5.10.3. LOFT Philosophy. ......................................................................................................... 36

5.10.4. LOFT Pre-flight Briefing. .............................................................................................. 36
C

5.10.5. LOFT Debriefing. .......................................................................................................... 36

N

5.10.6. Proficiency Level. .......................................................................................................... 36

5.10.7. LOFT course validity..................................................................................................... 36
U

5.10.8. Session Details:.............................................................................................................. 37

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.11. Line Oriented Simulation (LOS) Training Objective. ................................................... 38

5.12. Low Altitude Windshear Training. General. ................................................................. 39

D
5.13. Command Upgrade Flight Training. .............................................................................. 40

TE
5.13.1 Simulator Training. ........................................................................................................ 42
5.13.2. Base Training. ................................................................................................................ 43
5.13.3. Line Training. ................................................................................................................ 43

IN
5.14 Volcanic Ash Training. Objective. ................................................................................ 47
5.16 Pilot Incapacitation. Objective. ...................................................................................... 50

PR
5.17 Aircraft Upset Recovery. ............................................................................................... 51
5.18 Adverse weather operations. (Ref. ECAR 121.404) ...................................................... 52
5.19 CONTROLLED FLIGHT INTO TERRAIN (CFIT). ................................................... 54

IF
5.20 TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (TCAS). ................. 55
5.21 Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM). Objectives. ......................................... 56

PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

CHAPTER 5 FLIGHT TRAINING

D
TE
5.1. General.

5.1.1. Purpose.

IN
The purpose of this chapter is to detail the specific Flight Training Courses administered by the

PR
Flight Training Department.

5.1.2. Evaluations.

IF
The trainee must demonstrate proficiency in the required skill and knowledge in order to
satisfactory complete a course, Evaluation guide line and specific tolerance are laid down in
chapter 3.

PY
5.1.3. Initial, Transition and Recurrent Training Maneuvers and Procedures.
O
The maneuvers and procedures utilized during Initial, Transition and Recurrent training will
conform to the requirements of ECAR 121.419.
C

During Training (Simulator and line Training) PAS Training section shall ensure pilot flight
D

crew members demonstrate knowledge and compliance with the operations approved as part of
PAS (AOC) and according to SOP , to include the following items:-
E

1. Approaches authorized by ECAA;

LL

2. Ceiling and visibility requirements for takeoff, approach and landing;

3. Allowance for inoperative ground components;
O

4. Wind limitation (crosswind, headwind and tailwind)

5. Confirmation of PF/PM duties and other flight crew division of duties (Task Sharing)
TR

according to FCOM and QRH.

6. Confirmation of Positive Transfer of Air Craft flight Control.
7. Consistent Checklist Philosophy
N

8. Emphasis on a prioritization of tasks (e.g. “aviate- Navigate- Communicate”) according

to FCOM and QRH
O

9. Proper use of all levels of flight automation according to FCOM and QRH.
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.1.4. Proficiency Check Maneuvers and Procedures.

D
TE
The maneuvers and procedures required during the Proficiency Checks will conform to ECAR
121 appendix F.

IN
5.1.5. Additional Time.

When the phrase "Additional Time" is used, the amount of time will be determined by the

PR
instructor. It will be the amount of additional time necessary to ensure that the trainee is
competent to execute the required maneuvers.
Note:

IF
 If additional training time is required during initial, Transition or Recurrent Training, an
approval from chief pilot is required.

PY
 Additional time in excess of 4 hours shall be approved only by Training committee.
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 5
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.2. Instructor / Check Airman Initial / Transition Flight Training.

D
TE
Objective.
The objective of this course is to qualify PAS crewmember for responsibilities as
flight instructor or check Airman.

IN
Prerequisite.

PR
This course is predicated on the candidate's prior qualification as a crewmember and satisfactory
completion of Flight Instructor / Check Airman Ground Training.
Training Location.

IF
Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as PAS approved class
room / approved training center in Cairo and/or others.
Training aids.
PY
O
 Full Flight Simulator (Class C or Class D).
 Aircraft.
C
Methods of Instruction.
 Briefings.
D

 Demonstration.
E

 Procedural Drills.
 Critique.
LL

Curriculum.
ECAR 121.413 / 121.414.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 6
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.2.1. Instructor Pilot.

D
TE
The initial and transition flight training must include the following:
 The safety measures for emergency situations that are likely to develop during
instructions,

IN
 The potential result of improper, untimely or non-execution of safety measures during
instructions,

PR
 For pilot flight instructor (aircraft);
1. In-flight training and practice in conducting flight instruction from the left and right
pilot seats in the required normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures to ensure
competence as an instructor under the supervision of an approved instructor; and

IF
2. The safety measures to be taken from either pilot seat for emergency situations that
are likely to develop during instruction.

PY
 The requirements of this section must be accomplished in full in a flight simulator, or in a
flight training device, as appropriate.
 The initial and transition flight training for flight instructors (simulator) must include the
following:
O
1. Training and practice in the required normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures to
C
ensure competence to conduct the flight instruction required by this Part. This
training and practice must be accomplished in full or in part in a flight simulator or in
a flight training device, as appropriate; and
D

2. Training in the operation of flight simulators or flight training devices, as appropriate,

E

to ensure competence to conduct the flight instructions.

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 7
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.2.2. Check Airman.

D
TE
The initial and transition flight training must include the following:
 The safety measures for emergency situations that are likely to develop during a check,
 The potential result of improper, untimely or non-execution of safety measures during a

IN
check,
 For pilot flight airman (aircraft);

PR
1. Training and practice In conducting flight checks from the left and right pilot seats in
the required normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures to ensure competence to
conduct the pilot checks required by EACR 121 and,
2. The safety measures to be taken from either pilot seat for emergency situations that

IF
are likely to develop during checks.
 The requirements of this section must be accomplished in full or in part in flight, in a

PY
flight simulator, or in a flight training device, as appropriate.
 The initial and transition flight training for check airman (simulator) must include the
following:
1. Training and practice in the required normal, abnormal, and emergency procedures to
O
ensure competence to conduct the flight checks required by this Part. This training
C
and practice must be accomplished in full or in part in a flight simulator or in a flight
training device, as appropriate; and
2. Training in the operation of flight simulators or flight training devices, as appropriate,
D

to ensure competence to conduct the flight checks.

E

Course Layout.
LL

 Pilots will receive sufficient flight training and practice in conducting training and flight
checks from left and right pilot seats.
 This training will include the required normal, abnormal, and emergency maneuvers to
O

ensure his competence in conducting the flight check and flight training required by
ECAA regulations.
TR

 Methods, procedures and techniques for conducting check.

 The appropriate safety measures to be taken from either pilot seat for emergency
situations that are likely to develop in training.
N

 The potential results of improper or untimely safety measures that may occur during
O

training.
 Corrective action for unsatisfactory checks.
C

 Proper completion of required forms.

N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 8
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.2.3. Right Hand Seat Qualification.

D
TE
General
There are two different types of right hand seat qualifications:

IN
1. Right hand seat qualifications for Instructor Pilots.
2. Right hand seat qualifications for normal line captain.

PR
5.2.3.1 Right hand seat qualifications for Instructor Pilots.

Objective.

IF
The objective of this course is to qualify the trainee instructor pilot to safely operate the aircraft
from the right seat and to perform the duties of an instructor as well as a qualified first officer.

PY
The training will include normal and emergency procedures and emphasize on aircraft handling
from the right seat so that he/she may after successful completion, operate PAS aircraft in a
standard, safe and efficient manner.
O
Prerequisite.
C

This course is predicated on the trainee being an PAS captain and having satisfactory completed
PAS Instructor Ground Training course.
D

Training Location.
E

Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as PAS approved class
LL

room / approved training center in Cairo and/or others.

O

Training Aids
Training aids used in this course will be the full flight simulator.
TR

Methods of Instruction.
N

 Briefings.
 Demonstration.
O

 Procedural Drills.
 Critique.
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 9
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Curriculum.

D
Normally, control and observer times for the trainee will be approximately the same. In those

TE
cases, where there is only one trainee, an extra amount of time, as determined by instructor /
check airman, may be given in lieu of observer time.

IN
 Full Flight Simulator 2 hours as PF.
This includes time for the partial PC to demonstrate right seat proficiency.

PR
Course Layout.

Full Flight Simulator.

IF
1. Cockpit preflight and normal procedures.
2. A normal take-off, an ILS approach.
3.
4.
5.
Emergency descent from right hand seat.
PC to demonstrate right seat proficiency. PY
An engine out departure take-off, and engine out ILS approach and landing.
O
6. Error recovery session which will include Lateral and vertical offsets performed by
instructor pilots occupying the left seat and the recovery techniques required by the
C

instructor pilot under training from the right seat.

E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 10
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.2.3.2 Right hand seat qualifications for Normal Line Captain. Objective.

D
The objective of this course is to train the crewmember to safely operate the aircraft from the

TE
right seat and to perform the duties of a qualified first officer. The training will include normal
and emergency procedures and emphasize on aircraft handling from the right seat so that he/she

IN
may after successful completion, operate PAS aircraft in a standard, safe and efficient manner.
Prerequisite.

PR
This course is predicated on the trainee being an PAS captain.
Training Location.

IF
Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as PAS approved
class room / approved training center in Cairo and/or others.
Training Aids
PY
Training aids used in this course will be the full flight simulator.
O
Methods of Instruction.
C

 Briefings.
 Demonstration.
D

 Procedural Drills.
Critique.
E


LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 11
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Curriculum.

D
Normally, control and observer times for the trainee will be approximately the same. In those

TE
cases where there is only one trainee, an extra amount of time, as determined by instructor /
check airman, may be given in lieu of observer time.

IN
 Full Flight Simulator 1 hours as PF.
This includes time for the partial PC to demonstrate right seat proficiency.

PR
Course Layout.
Full Flight Simulator.

IF
1. Cockpit preflight and normal procedures.
2. A normal take-off, an ILS approach.
3. An engine out departure take-off, and engine out ILS approach and landing.
4.
5.
Emergency descent from right hand seat.
PC to demonstrate right seat proficiency. PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 12
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.3. Instructor, Check Airmen & Examiner Recurrent Flight Training. (Proficiency

D
Training).

TE
Objective.
The objective of this course is to ensure the competence of PAS Instructor and to comply with

IN
the provisions of ECAA through the medium of annual recurrent training on subjects related to
efficient and safe flight operations, recurrent is conducted by PAS check Airmen or Examiner.

PR
Prerequisite.
This training is designed for Instructor who are currently qualified on PAS aircraft and who

IF
have completed Recurrent Ground Training.
Training Location.

PY
Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as PAS approved
class room / approved training center in Cairo and/or others.
O
Training Aids.
C
Training aids used in this course will be:
Full Flight Simulator.
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 13
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Methods of Instruction.

D
TE
Briefings.
Demonstration.
Procedural Drills.

IN
Critique.
Curriculum.

PR
The briefing must be conducted in the briefing room of the simulator at least for one hour.
 Full Flight Simulator 2 sessions X 4 hours = 8 hours.
 Briefing each session 1 hr. Briefing = 2 hours.

IF
 DAY 1 Training
 DAY 2 PC

PY
Course Layout.
Briefing:
O
Bulletin Review.
Aircraft Limitations.
C

Simulator activity review.

Full Flight Simulator:
D

Systems.
E

Proficiency check.
LL

Error Recovery from right hand seat.

Note: -
O

As a part of recurrent qualification program for instructors, evaluators, and line check airmen,
they should attend at least one training review committee meeting per year.
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 14
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.4. Initial Flight Training.

D
TE
Objective.
The objective of this course is to train the crewmember in the operation of the aircraft. The
training will include aircraft systems, operation, flight characteristics and airline procedures so

IN
that he may, after successful completion, operate PAS aircraft in a standard, safe and efficient
manner. The training will prepare the trainee to meet the entry requirements of Initial

PR
Operating Experience (IOE).
Prerequisite.

IF
This course is predicated on the trainee being a PAS Crew member and having satisfactory
completed PAS Initial Ground Training course.

PY
Training Location.
Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as PAS approved
O
class room / approved training center in Cairo and/or others.
Training Aids.
C

Training aids used in this course will be:

D

Fixed Base Simulator

E

Full Flight Simulator.

Aircraft.
LL

Methods of Instruction.
Briefings.
O

Demonstration.
TR

Procedural Drills.
Critique.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 15
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Curriculum.

D
Normally, pilot flying and pilot not flying times for the trainee will be approximately the same.

TE
In those cases where there is only trainee, an extra amount of time, as determined by instructor /
check airman, may be given in lieu of observer time.

IN
PR
PF PM

FBS hrs. (PF) 12 12

FFS hrs. (PF) 12 12

IF
Evaluation 2 2

PY
ZFT 2 2
Total hrs. 28 28
O
(for details ref. initial Training Syllabus form)
Course layout
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 16
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.5. Transition Flight Training.

D
TE
Objective.
The objective of this course is to train the crewmember in the operation of the aircraft. The
training will include aircraft systems, operation, flight characteristics and airline procedures so

IN
that he may, after successful completion, operate PAS aircraft in a standard, safe and efficient
manner. The training will prepare the trainee to meet the entry requirements of line training.

PR
Prerequisite.
This course is predicated on the trainee being an PAS Crew member and having satisfactory

IF
completed PAS Transition Ground Training course.
Training Location.

PY
Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as PAS approved
class room / approved training center in Cairo and/or others.
O
Training Aids.
C

Training aids used in this course will be:

Fixed Base Simulator
D

Full Flight Simulator.

E

Aircraft.
Methods of Instruction.
LL

Briefings.
Demonstration.
O

Procedural Drills.
TR

Critique.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 17
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Curriculum.

D
Normally, pilot flying and pilot not flying times for the trainee will be approximately the same.

TE
In those cases where there is only trainee, an extra amount of time, as determined by instructor /
check airman, may be given in lieu of observer time.

IN
PR
PF PM

FBS hrs. (PF) 12 12

IF
FFS hrs. (PF) 12 12
Evaluation 2 2
ZFT
Total hrs.
2
28
PY 2
28
O
(for details ref. initial Training Syllabus form)
C

Course layout
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 18
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.6. Recurrent Flight Training. (Proficiency Training)

D
TE
Objective.
The objective of this course is to ensure the competence of PAS flight crewmember
and to comply with the provisions of ECAA through the medium of bi-annual recurrent training

IN
on subjects related to efficient and safe flight operations. The overall plan for recurrent simulator
training and checking is approved by the ECAA, which specifies the general content of the 3

PR
year recurrent training cycle. It will ensure that all regulatory training and checking requirements
are met.
The actual lesson plan for each session does not require the ECAA approval. However, the

IF
lesson plan shall be designed in accordance with the applicable regulatory requirements and shall
also cover additional training requirements identified by PAS as deemed necessary for recurrent

PY
training.
Prerequisite.
O
This training is designed for crewmembers who are currently qualified on PAS aircraft and who
have completed Recurrent Ground Training.
C

Training Location.
D

Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as PAS approved
E

class room / approved training center in Cairo and/or others.

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 19
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Training Requirements: -

D
The following table details the minimum Simulator Training and Checking Cycle as

TE
required by the ECAA.
Training And Checking

IN
Events and System Requirement YEAR 1 YEAR 2 YEAR 3
Day 1 Day 2 Day 1 Day 2 Day 1 Day 2

PR
Abnormal Conditions X
Engine X X
Volcanic Ash-Dual Eng. Failure X
Pressurization and Air Conditioning X

IF
Pitot and Static System X
Unreliable air speed X X

PY
Fuel System X
Electrical System X
Hydraulic System X
O
Flight Control X
Anti and De-ice system, Glare shield X
C

heat
Autopilot / Flight Director X
D

Stalling Protection X
EGPWS, Weather, Radar, Radio X
E

Altimeter, Transponder
LL

Radios, Navigation, Equipment, X

Instruments, FMS
Landing Gear and Brakes X
O

Slat and Flap System X

APU (Fail / Fire) X X
TR

TCAS RA maneuvers X X X
Fire Drills X
N

Smoke Control and Removal X X

Engine failures / Shutdown / Restart X X X
O

Windshear (Take-off / Landing) X X X

C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 20
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Training And Checking

D
Events And System Requirement YEAR 1 YEAR 2 YEAR 3

TE
Day 1 Day 2 Day 1 Day 2 Day 1 Day 2
Cabin pressurization / Emergency CM1 CM2 CM1 CM2 CM1 CM2
descent

IN
Incapacitation (practical) X X X
Thunderstorm Avoidance X

PR
(Briefing/practical)
Incapacitation (discussion) X X X
Adverse Weather as appropriate:
Ground De-icing, Cold weather

IF
operations and Contaminated runway
X X X X X X
operations; (discussion)

PY
OR
Hot Weather Operations
Pax Evacuation X
Jet Upset recover, bounce recovery X
O
Operational Procedures and
C
Requirements
RVSM (Discussion) X X X
RNP & P-RNAV (discussion) X X X
D

Area Route, airports (discussion or X X X

E

practical as required))
Flight Safety Feedback(discussion or
LL

Practical)
LOFT X X X
O

CFIT X X X
Performance (Discussion) X X X
TR

Operation in Either Seat Qualification X X X X X X

(if required)
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 21
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Training Aids.

D
Training aids used in this course will be:

TE
Full Flight Simulator.

IN
Methods of Instruction.
The detailed lesson plan for each recurrent training session will be distributed to Instructors in

PR
advance. Instructors must ensure that all the briefings, exercises and maneuvers specified in the
lesson plan are covered during a recurrent training session. If time permits then the exercises
may be repeated to ensure that pilots achieve the necessary level of proficiency.

IF
The sequence of exercises may be varied at the instructor’s judgment in order to enhance both
training value and the efficient utilization of session time. The content must not be altered.
Briefings.
Demonstration.
Procedural Drills.
PY
O
Critique.
C

Curriculum.
D

The briefing must be conducted in the briefing room of the simulator at least for one hour.
E

Full Flight Simulator (2 sessions X 4 hours)

Briefing (1 hour each day)
LL

First day is a training day. (2 PF+2 PM)

Second day will be proficiency check (PC). (2 PF+2 PM)
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 22
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Course Layout.

D
Briefing:

TE
1. Bulletin Review.
2. Aircraft Limitations.

IN
3. Simulator activity review.
Full Flight Simulator:

PR
4. Familiarization
5. Systems.
6. Proficiency check.

IF
(For details refer to recurrent training syllabus)

PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 23
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.7. Route Training (Line Training) Initial Operating Experience (IOE).

D
TE
Objective.
PAS shall ensure flight crew members, before starting line training (IOE), have
successfully completed the proficiency evaluation administrated by one of the PAS

IN
approved Examiners or a representative of the ECAA and demonstrated the skill and
knowledge level adequate for operating the aircraft at or above standards stipulated in the

PR
training syllabus.
The purpose of this section is to detail the line training requirements and provide guide lines for
crewmember involved with IOE operations and line checks.

IF
The objective of this IOE time is to provide operating experience to the crewmember during line
operation of the aircraft. The line training will include aircraft systems operation, flight

PY
characteristics, planning, performance, airline policy and procedures.
During the line training PAS Training section shall ensure pilot flight crew members
O
demonstrate knowledge of the operations approved as part of PAS (AOC) and according to
OM-A Ch.8.– FCOM , to include the following items:-
C

 Approaches authorized by ECAA;

D

 Ceiling and visibility requirements for takeoff, approach and landing;

 Allowance for inoperative ground components;
E

 Wind limitation (crosswind, headwind and tailwind)

LL

After successful completion of the IOE, the crew member will be able to operate the aircraft line
operation in a standard, safe and efficient manner.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 24
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

General.

D
1. Initial Operating Experience is the replacement of the old term-line training. The IOE is

TE
an ECAR's requirement for captains and F/O's.
2. An examiner, check airman pilot must occupy one of the pilot seats during IOE until he
makes the following entry in his progress report "Captain (Name) is fit to fly as Captain.

IN
The trainee Captain shall continue to fly under supervision until he is ready for final line
check.

PR
3. Line training (IOE) shall include a program for the flight crew members to be qualified to
operate in areas, on routes or route segments and into the airports to be used in
operations, this program include ground training (Ref. 4.11) and simulator or flight
training

IF
4. Initial operating experience shall not be less than a minimum of 40 hours and 10 sectors
for all pilots during initial and transition training.

PY
5. Minimum 6 sectors under supervision shall be flown after the minimum sector of IOE
and the RHS.
6. After completing all of the above final line check shall be performed.
O
Prerequisite.
C

This course is predicated on the trainee being an PAS crewmember having satisfactory completed
PAS flight training course. (Initial, Transition and command upgrade flight training).
D

Evaluation of IOE Progress.

E

The crewmember must demonstrate proficiency in the required skills and knowledge in order to
LL

satisfactorily complete IOE requirements and be recommended for final check. Assessment and
grading system laid down in chapter 3 shall be used as the base of IOE evaluation.
O

In case a recommendation for final check cannot be given due to failure to progress, a check
TR

airman designated by management will perform an evaluation and recommend either additional
IOE time or another course of action for the crewmember.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 25
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Training Location.

D
Line training shall take place during normal revenue operations at locations dictated by the flying

TE
schedule.
Training Aids.

IN
PAS Aircraft.

PR
Methods of Instruction.
 Briefings.
 Demonstration.

IF
 Procedural Drills.
 Critique.

5.7.8. Planned Sectors (IOE).

Ref. ECAR 121.435
PY
O
A. Pilot crewmembers must acquire operating experience and operating cycles as follows:
C

1. A pilot in command must;

I. Perform the duties of a pilot in command under the supervision of a check pilot;
D

and
II. In addition, if a qualifying pilot in command is completing initial or upgrade
E

training, be observed in the performance of prescribed duties by an ECAA

LL

inspector during at least one flight leg which includes a takeoff and landing.
During the time that a qualifying pilot in command is acquiring the operating
experience, a check pilot who is also serving as the pilot in command must
O

occupy a pilot station. However, in the case of a transitioning pilot in command

the check pilot serving as pilot in command may occupy the observer's seat, if the
TR

transitioning pilot has made at least two takeoffs and landings in the type aircraft
used, and has satisfactorily demonstrated to the check pilot that he is qualified to
perform the duties of a pilot in command of that type of aircraft.
N

2. A second in command pilot must perform the duties of a second in command under
O

the supervision of an appropriately qualified check pilot.

3. The hours of operating experience and operating cycles for all pilots are as follows:
C

I. For initial training, 40 hours in Group IIIJ aircraft. Operating experience in both
aircraft groups must include at least 10 operating cycles (at least 5 as the pilot
N

flying the aircraft);

U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 26
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

II. For transition training, 40 hours for pilots in command in Group IIIJ aircraft,

D
and 40 hours for second in command pilots in Group IIIJ aircraft. Operating

TE
experience in both aircraft groups must include at least 10 operating cycles (at
least 5 as the pilot flying the aircraft); and
B. pilot in command and second in command crewmembers must each acquire at least 100

IN
hours of line operating flight time for consolidation of knowledge and skills (including
operating experience required under paragraph (a) of this section) within 120 days after

PR
the satisfactory completion of:
1. Any part of the flight maneuvers and procedures portion of either an airline transport
pilot license with type rating skills test or an additional type rating skills test; or
2. A section 121.441 proficiency check.

IF
C. The following exceptions apply to the consolidation requirement of paragraph (b) of
this section:

PY
1. Pilots who have qualified and served as pilot in command or second in command on a
particular type aircraft in operations under this Part (121) are not required to complete
line operating flight time for consolidation of knowledge and skills on that particular
O
type aircraft;
2. Pilots who have completed the line operating flight time requirement for
C

consolidation of knowledge and skills while serving as second in command on a

particular type aircraft in operations under this Part are not required to repeat the line
D

operating flight time before serving as pilot in command on the same type aircraft;
3. If, before completing the required 100 hours of line operating flight time, a pilot
E

serves as a pilot in another aircraft type operated by PAS , the pilot may not serve
LL

as a pilot in the aircraft for which the pilot has newly qualified unless the pilot
satisfactorily completes re-qualification training as provided in PAS approved
training program and that training is conducted by an appropriately qualified
O

instructor or check pilot;

4. If the required 100 hours of line operating flight time are not completed within 120
TR

days, under the approval of ECAA PAS may extend the 120 days period to no
more than 150 days if:
I. The pilot continues to meet all other applicable requirements of subpart O of
N

Part121; and
O

II. On or before the 120th day the pilot satisfactorily completes re-qualification
training conducted by an appropriately qualified instructor or check pilot as
C

provided in the certificate holder's approved training program, or a check pilot

determines that the pilot has retained an adequate level of proficiency after
N

observing that pilot in a supervised line operating flight.

U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 27
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

D
5.7.9. PAS requirements

TE
5.7.9.1. Initial (newly hired):

F/O's minimum of 10 sectors PM and the rest 30 sectors as PF – 100 hours shall be conducted as

IN
a minimum during IOE.

PR
5.7.9.2.First time Captain with experience on Type

 100 hrs. Shall be conducted as a minimum during the IOE (including 2 sectors RHS 1PF
and 1PM).

IF
 With minimum of 40 hours’ evaluation to continue or stop training.
 6 sectors USV
 2 sectors line check.

IOE Flights shall include:

PY
 Any requirements or restrictions shall be implemented by Chief Pilot in accordance with
O
his FOM duties & responsibilities.
C
 During line training the trainer will fill Area and route qualification to the trainee on all
airports he fly (CAT A&B)
D

5.7.9.3.First time Captain without experience on Type

E

 100 hours IOE

LL

 80 hours IOE left seat.

 20 hours IOE RHS.
 With minimum of 40 hours left seat evaluation to be conducted to continue or stop
O

training.
TR

 6 Sectors USV
 2 Sectors Line Check

IOE Flights shall include:

N
O

 Any requirements or restrictions shall be implemented by Chief Pilot in accordance with

his FOM duties & responsibilities.
C

 During line training the trainer will fill Area and route qualification to the trainee on all
airports he fly (CAT A&B)
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 28
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.7.9.4. Transition

D
TE
F/O's with 100 hours, 10 sectors PM and at least 30 sectors PF. 100 hours shall be conducted as a
minimum during IOE.
Captain minimum of 40 sectors with minimum 100 hrs.

IN
IOE flight for First time captain shall include

PR
1. All domestic airports (Luxor airport must be scheduled once in daytime and once in night
time).
2. Europe flights as schedule permits.

IF
3. Middle East, gulf airports as PAS operation permits.
4. During line, training the trainer will fill area and route qualification to the trainee on all
airports he flies (CAT A&B) if the trainer sees that it is necessary and file it in the trainee

PY
file. O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 29
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.7.10. Pilot operating limitations and pairing requirements

D
TE
Ref. ECAR 121.435
a. If the second in command has fewer than 100 hours of flight time as second in command
in operations in the type of aircraft being flown, and the pilot in command is not an

IN
appropriately qualified check pilot, the pilot in command must make all takeoffs and
landings in the following situations:

PR
1. At special airports designated by the ECAA or at special airports designated by the
PAS ; and
2. In any of the following conditions:
I. The prevailing visibility value in the latest weather report for the airport is at or

IF
below (3/4) mile / 1200 meters;
II. The runway visual range for the runway to be used is at or below 4,000-feet/1200

PY
m;
III. The runway to be used has water, snow, slush or similar conditions that may
adversely affect aircraft performance;
IV. The braking action on the runway to be used is reported to be less than “good”;
O
V. The crosswind component for the runway to be used is in excess of 15 knots;
C
VI. Windshear is reported in the vicinity of the airport; and
VII. Any other condition in which the pilot in command determines it to be prudent to
exercise the pilot in command’s prerogative.
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 30
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.8. Proficiency Check.

D
TE
ECAR 121.441
General.

IN
PAS may not use any person nor may any person serve as a required pilot cockpit
crewmember unless that person has satisfactorily completed a proficiency check within the

PR
preceding 12 calendar months and, in addition, within the preceding 6 calendar months,
proficiency training under 121.409(b). The proficiency check and the proficiency training
required by this section may be completed in the calendar month before or the calendar month
after in which that training or check is required. In order to satisfy this requirement they must

IF
occur in the same year and be separated by a period greater than four consecutive calendar
months and less than eight consecutive calendar months.

PY
A proficiency check must meet the following requirements:
1. It must include at least the procedures and maneuvers set forth in appendix F to this Part
O
unless otherwise specifically provided in that appendix; and
2. An approved pilot examiner or an approved check airman must administer it.
C

The objective is to check the crewmembers’ competence in performance of normal, abnormal

and emergency procedures as required by ECAR's.
D

1. The proficiency check shall also include an oral test; the questions of this test must be
E

operational significance.
Prerequisite.
LL

This course is predicated on the trainee being an PAS crewmember having satisfactory completed
O

PAS flight training course.

Evaluation of Proficiency Check.
TR

The crewmember must demonstrate proficiency in the required skills, piloting technique,
procedures (normal, abnormal and emergency), and maneuvers and comply with instrument
N

flight rules in order to satisfactorily complete Proficiency check requirements. Assessment and
O

grading system laid down in chapter 3 shall be used as the base of proficiency check evaluation.
C

Training Location.
N

Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as PAS approved
class room / approved training center in Cairo and/or others like CAE.
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 31
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Training Aids.

D
 Full Flight Simulator.

TE
Methods of Instruction.

IN
 Oral.
 Briefings.

PR
 De-briefings.
Curriculum.
Normally, pilot flying and pilot not flying times for the trainee will be approximately the same.

IF
In those cases where there is only one trainee, an extra amount of time as determined by the
instructor / check airman, may be given in lieu of observer time.

PY
 Full Flight Simulator 1 sessions X 4 hours (2 hrs. PF+2 hrs. PM)
 Briefing 1 hour

Course Layout.
O
Full Flight Simulator.
C

 Approaches.
D

 Maneuvers.
 Proficiency check (Time for PC is included within program hours.)
E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 32
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.9. Line Check.

D
TE
ECAR 121.440.
General.

IN
The line check is the final stage of any type rating qualification program. The quality of all
elements of the training program (Ground, Simulator, Flight and Line training) are brought

PR
together and are the objectives of the final line check.
The line check is an ECAA required annual check for Flight Crew. The objective of the annual
line check is to check crewmember's competence in performance of normal procedures in line

IF
operations environment and to check his compliance with company rules and standard operating
procedures (SOP). Line checks shall be conducted in the following cases:

PY
1.Final line check (at the end of under supervision portion of the IOE.
2.Annual line check.
3.Random line check.
O
4.During instructor selection process.
5.Area, Route and Airport Qualification. (if required).
C
6.During re-qualification process, or due to a training committee recommendation.
7.Newly hired type rated
D

Ongoing periodic line checks offers the company the opportunity to monitor the proficiency
level and the compliance of all crewmembers with SOP at regular intervals in the context of
E

normal operations.
LL

Line checks should include an inspection of manuals for currency and enough questioning to
determine adequate knowledge of normal line operation on part of the person being checked.
O

During line check, the pilot check airman shall normally occupy the observer seat. However he
TR

shall retain the final responsibility for the safety of the operation, he shall therefore consider
assuming command of the flight at any time and reliving the captain under check from his
command.
N

Line check shall be conducted by company examiner or check airman.

O

Prerequisite.
C

This course is predicated on the trainee being a PAS crewmember having satisfactory completed
N

PAS flight training course.

U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 33
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Evaluation of Proficiency Check.

D
The crewmember must demonstrate proficiency in the required skills, procedures and maneuvers

TE
in order to satisfactorily complete line check requirements. Assessment and grading system laid
down in chapter 3 shall be used as the base of proficiency check evaluation.

IN
Line training shall take place during normal revenue operations.

PR
Training Aids.
PAS AIRCRAFT.
Methods of Instruction.

IF
 Oral.
 Briefings.

PY
 De-briefings.

Curriculum.
O
 Systems operation knowledge.
C
 A/C performance.
 Standard Operating Procedures.
 Company rules and regulations.
D

Program hours.
E

Minimum of two as P.F. Flying sectors or 1 P.F. sector if flying time is more than 4 hours.
LL

Except for final line, check should be two sectors.

Course Layout.
O

 Departure.
TR

 Enroute.
 Approaches.
 Maneuvers.
N

 Normal procedures.
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 34
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

D
5.10. LOFT Training.

TE
ECAR 121-410 (c)

IN
5.10.1. Introduction.

PR
This section is designed to assist the check airman in administering Line Oriented Flight
Training.
Line Oriented Flight Training (LOFT) session is intended to provide flight crews with

IF
opportunities to enhance Crew Resource Management (CRM) principles to simulated regular
airline flight.

PY
Scenarios are intended to produce a busy environment, but should never overload the flight crew.
In many cases, there is no single 'right' answer but using their skills and knowledge, flight crew
should be able to reach a successful conclusion to each scenario. Alternative solutions may
O
provide useful, constructive post-flight discussion.
C
Relative simple failures are introduced during the flight to enable the session objectives to be
met.
D

To make LOFT as valuable and realistic as possible, flight documentation is provided by the
E

instructor at briefing. Flight briefing shall begin 1 hour before the scheduled simulator start time
and will take 15-20 minutes. Thereafter flight crew will have some time to study documentation
LL

and, for example, decide on required fuel load, etc.

The take-off time for the flight is considered to be 30 minutes after the simulator session starts.
O

Whenever problems are encountered during scenarios in terms of their realism or changes in
TR

SIDs, STARs, and Approaches …., please make notes / corrections and send those information
to Chief Pilot for amendment. Scenario in focus will be updated and new copies shall be sent out
to amend handbooks. In the meantime, copies of all approach plates and navigational charts
N

required to run each scenario are included.

O

Remember that scenarios are controlled documents and copies are not to be given to flight
C

crewmembers.
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 35
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.10.2. Basic LOFT elements.

D
TE
1. Takes place in a simulated line operational environment.
2. Uses a complete flight crew with total participation.
3. Contains real-world incidents, unfolding in real time.

IN
4. LOFT session should be 4 hours.
5. Contains a preflight documentation’s:
 Weather briefing.

PR
 NOTAM's.
 MEL.
 Traffic load and C.G. position.

IF
6. Contains planned scenarios and segments which run uninterrupted:
 No position or total Freeze.
 No lateral or vertical repositioning.

PY
 No reset to any introduced failure.
7. Incorporates CRM skills where such skills are observed and debriefed upon completion.
8. The instructor Pilot shall act as:
O
 Flight dispatcher.
 Ground mechanic.
C

 Maintenance engineer.
 Air traffic controller.
D

9. Provides critique of individual and crew performance.

10. Includes scenario-based or maneuver-based stall prevention training before, during
E

or after the LOFT scenario for each pilot

LL

11. Is given by at least an instructor who meets the applicable requirements & the satisfactory
completion of the course of training must be certified by either the ECAA or a qualified
check airman.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 36
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.10.3. LOFT Philosophy.

D
TE
The effectiveness of LOFT is dependent on four important aspects.
 The use of the highest fidelity simulator available.
 Only line qualified flight crewmembers are scheduled to participate in LOFT.

IN
 LOFT scenarios run fully uninterrupted real time course.
 Varieties of scenarios, fully compatible with training objectives, are available and

PR
periodically updated to ensure that LOFT does not become repetitive.

5.10.4. LOFT Pre-flight Briefing.

IF
 Weather Documents.
 Notam's Documents.
 Load sheet.
 Deferred defects.

5.10.5. LOFT Debriefing. PY

O
Refer to chapter (3) simulator briefing and debriefing item 3.0.2.
C

5.10.6. Proficiency Level.

D

 Ability to perform normal and abnormal procedures and techniques in accordance with
E

General SOP in a line environment.

 Ability to correctly apply the following CRM principles:
LL

1. Communication.
2. Situational awareness.
O

3. Decision Making.
4. Workload management.
TR

5.10.7. LOFT course validity.

N

Course validity 12 month.

O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 37
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.10.8. Session Details:

D
TE
Ref. to Forms section.
LOFT Training shall be used in the following cases:

IN
 1 session in the initial training.
 1 session in the transition training.

PR
 1 session in the command upgrade training.
 1 session every year with recurrent training (LOS).
 In case there is a need due to training committee or as remedial action.

IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 38
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.11. Line Oriented Simulation (LOS) Training

D
TE
Objective.
Same as LOFT.

IN
Basic LOS elements.
Same as LOFT.

PR
LOS Philosophy.
Same as LOFT.

IF
LOS pre-flight Briefing.

PY
Same as LOFT.
LOS Debriefing.
O
Same as LOFT.
C
Proficiency Level.
Same as LOFT.
D

Session Details.
E

Same as LOFT.
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 39
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.12. Low Altitude Windshear Training.

D
TE
General.
Accidents / Incidents during initial climb, final approach and landing phases of flight (Safety
Window) continue to comprise a disproportionate percentage of commercial jet aircraft accidents

IN
and incidents.

PR
Flight into terrain may arise from a low-level Windshear encounter, improperly executed go
around maneuver, inadequate response to a ground proximity warring or a high rate of descent at
low altitude.

IF
These Windshear encounters are especially significant because forces outside the cockpit have
placed the crew in a situation, which they may require to make use of the performance capability
of the airplane.
Training Program.
PY
O
1) Briefing:
Individual low level Windshear training integrated in initial / recurrent simulator training.
C
The instructor pilot / check airman will discuss the phenomena during briefing and de-
briefing. Discussion will cover the following:
D

 Weather conditions.
E

 Early recognition.
 Aircraft performance.
LL

 Recovery techniques.
2) Flight Training:
O

Simulator Initial and recurrent training program shall include Windshear encounter during the
following situations:
TR

 Take-Off roll.
 After liftoff.
 Final Approach.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 40
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.13. Command Upgrade Flight Training.

D
TE
General.
This training course is intended for upgrading PAS senior first officers, who have qualified for the

IN
course and after successful completion of Pre - command assessment training course.
All through this training, it is very important to pass the knowledge and experience to the

PR
candidate rather than checking him. (I.e. the candidate should never feel that he is being checked
or tested, as he should have passed this stage during his Command Assessment). So all through
the course the instructor should be always open minded for discussions with the candidate.

IF
Prerequisite.
 The course is predicated on the fact that the trainee has successfully completed the

PY
command upgrade ground training.
 F/O’s who fulfilled the requirement (refer to OMA vol1 Ch.5 )
O
Training Location.
Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as PAS approved
C

class room / approved training center in Cairo and/or others like CAE Training Centers.
D

Training Aids.
E

Full Flight Simulator.

LL

Methods of Instruction.
 Oral.
O

 Briefings.
TR

 De-briefings.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 41
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Curriculum.

D
PF PM

TE
FFS hrs. 12 12

IN
Evaluation 2 -
ZFT 2 -

PR
Total hrs. 16 12

IF
Course Layout.

PY
Full Flight Simulator:
 Familiarization
 Systems.
O
 Proficiency check.
Aircraft:
C

 Approaches
D

 Maneuvers.
 Proficiency check.
E

 ECAA type rating.

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 42
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.13.1 Simulator Training.

D
TE
(Ref. command upgrades LOFT training)
 Make best advantage of Line Oriented Flight Training during simulator.
 Make Line Oriented Flight Training scenarios as close as possible to real life, especially

IN
with regards to airports and routes so as the candidate is to concentrate more on CRM
development and decision making rather than navigating through new airports.

PR
 Give enough briefing time before sessions to avoid rushing through nothing, and give all
the time needed after the sessions in open discussion atmosphere, since this is where
candidate will really polish up his command skills and knowledge.
 Cockpit discipline should be emphasized up and any bad habits should be cleared out.

IF
 During all sessions SOP should be conducted literally, so as to permit the standard, and
discipline.

PY
 In the first two sessions concentrate on manual flying, for candidate to get used to flying
from left seat.
 During Line Oriented Flight Training, utilize cockpit automation to its best.
 During most approaches, all through sessions make the flying manual, unless the exercise
O
requires auto flying to improve skills.
C
 During approaches, increase the No. of raw data approaches, to improve cockpit
instruments scanning and skills.
 Communication with Cabin Chief and passengers should be stressed upon, so as to make
D

it nature during his career, to improve the quality of his command ship.
E

 Any points with regards to Airman Ship should be stressed upon.

The attached syllabus is designed to upgrade type qualified first officer from Second in command
LL

to pilot in command. Pilots undergoing this training will have completed both ground and flight
Pre Command Training.
O

All items of the syllabus should be completed.

TR

It is not part of PAS training policy to deliberately introduce multiple failures that could
overload the flight crew. Simple system failure and abnormalities should therefore be
introduced at appropriate times during each session. The candidate’s ability to recognize and
N

analyze the abnormality, take correct action and the intelligent use of the appropriate action
O

backed up with use of QRH written checklist when applicable. Should be assessed.
C

Course objectives.
N

The objective of this course is to prepare the trainees to safely, knowledgeably and effectively
pilot at type rating proficiency from left hand seat according to task sharing philosophy.
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 43
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.13.2. Base Training.

D
TE
Following satisfactory completion of the proficiency check, the trainee shall be ready to attend
the base training.
Base training may be accomplished on simulator aircraft

IN
After satisfactory completion of this phase, the trainee shall proceed to the next phase.

PR
5.13.3. Line Training.

Throughout the line, training the Instructor pilot will occupy the RHS and be legal commander of

IF
the aircraft. However, the command trainee will make all command decisions and aircraft
operations under the guidance of the Instructor pilot.

PY
A minimum of 40 sectors will be completed during 100 flying hours.
The command trainee should be given every opportunity of checking all relevant documents as if
O
he was the commander. However, the Instructor pilot will cross check all documents and when
satisfied as to their correctness the Instructor pilot will sign them accordingly.
C

On completion of flight, training sectors command LHS training a progress evaluation of the
command candidate will be conducted by one of the following:
D

 Chief pilot.
E

 designated examiner.
LL

The progress evaluation (PE) will BE AFTER 40 hrs. consist of the command in the LHS, and
ON the RHS for the purpose of the evaluation. The PE will consist of a minimum of 2 sectors
each in excess of 2 hours.
O

The progress evaluation will be reported in the normal way within the command candidate's line
TR

training file. However, the sector number and the progress report will be annotated "Progress
Evaluation" and not to be numbered.
N

On satisfactory completion of the progress evaluation, the command trainee proceeds to

complete min number of 30 sectors &100 hrs.
O

An unsatisfactory progress evaluation would include a recommendation for additional training

C

and/or interview and/or possible termination.

N

Final command check - On completion of a minimum of 40 sectors & 100 hrs. (which includes
U

the PE sectors) a final check will be conducted. This will consist of a minimum of 2 sectors each
in excess of 2 hours as a PF & PM.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 44
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Route Airfields - The command candidate's line training is to incorporate landing at all the

D
usable domestic airfields and not less than 80% of the international airfields listed on PAS route

TE
structure.
The command candidate's Line training (IOE) shall include a program for the flight crew

IN
members to be qualified to operate in areas, on routes or route segments and into the airports to
be used in operations, this program includes ground training and simulator or flight training

PR
terrain and minimum safe altitudes;
1) seasonal meteorological conditions;
2) meteorological, communication and air traffic facilities, services and procedures;
3) search and rescue procedures;

IF
4) navigational facilities and procedures;
5) procedures applicable to flight paths over heavily populated areas and areas of high air

PY
traffic density;
6) Airport obstructions, physical layout, lighting, approach aids and arrival, departure, holding
and instrument approach procedures and applicable operating minima.
O
7) Terrain & MSA
The command candidate's line training must incorporate the landing at all the airfields with
C
reusable length of less than 2500m that are listed on PAS route structure.
During the line training PAS Training Department shall ensure pilot flight crew members
D

demonstrate knowledge of the operations approved as part of PAS (AOC) and according to (SOP)
E

The command candidate's line training shall demonstrate the knowledge of the operation
LL

approved as part of the Air Operator Certificate (AOC) (Ops. Specs. Ground Training Ref.
Chapter 4) and according to SOP , to include the following items
O

1) Approaches authorized by Authority;

2) Ceiling and visibility requirements for takeoff, approach and landing;
TR

3) Allowance for inoperative ground components;

4) Wind limitation (crosswind, headwind and tailwind)
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 45
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

TOPICS FOR DISCUSSION

D
The attached "Items for Discussion" with reference to the appropriate FCOM, are to be covered

TE
during the line training. The training captain is to date and print his name when the item has been
completed.

IN
LINE TRAINING GUIDLINES

PR
PRE FLIGHT PREPARATION
 Weather Assessment.
 Flight Plan Preparation.
 Fuel Computation.

IF
 Load and Trim Sheets Calculations.
 Take off Data calculations.

PY
 Crew Briefing, starting checks and procedures.
 Use of RTOW - use of MEL.
EN ROUTE
O
 Taxi and Taxi checks.
C
 Radio Aid settings for departure.
 Recording and Adherence to ATC clearances.
 Take off, Noise abatement, SID and Climb Technique.
D

 Company Altimeter setting procedures.

E

 Use and identification of NAV and Radio Aids.

 Use of De Icing and Anti Icing.
LL

 Flight Log Keeping, Adjusting ETA, ATC Liaison.

 Use of weather radar.
O

DESCENT, APPROACH AND LANDING

Use of FMS - Approach procedures.
TR


 Crew Briefing, selection and Indent of Radio Aids.
 Adherence to Clearances.
 Landing technique - Use of Reverse and brakes.
N

 After Landing and parking checks.

O

 Cross wind landing technique.

C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 46
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

GENERAL

D
 Standard operating procedures and PAS task sharing procedures.

TE
 Use of FCP and instrument flying.
 Autopilot.
 Engine handling and monitoring.

IN
 Liaison with cabin staff.
 Liaison with Ops, Tech, Traffic.

PR
 Special / Dangerous / Precious cargo.
 Security and various threat procedures.
 Pax care, use of PA (captain).
 Crew supervision and flight deck management (captain)

IF
DISCUSSION ITEMS
 Jeppesen procedures and company procedures.



Radio Failure / Distress procedures.
PY
Adverse weather - turbulence, rain, wind shear.
Contaminated Runway, Cross wind, Weather radar.
O
 Aircraft Library, Tech Logs, and MMEL.
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 47
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.14 Volcanic Ash Training.

D
TE
Objective.
The objective of this training is to train all crewmembers operating in airports having a volcanic
ash eruption.

IN
Training Location.

PR
PAS classroom and the relevant simulator.
Training Aids.

IF
 Briefing.
 Simulator (to be introduced as an item during the recurrent training).
Simulator Items.

PY
1. Ground Operations on Airport Covered with Ash or Dust Briefing.
 Preliminary cockpit preparation.
O
 Exterior inspection.
 Engine start.
C

 Taxi.
 Takeoff.
D

 Landing.
2. Flight Operations. (Simulator item).
E

3. Securing the Aircraft in Volcanic Ash Briefing.

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 48
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.15 P-RNAV

D
TE
(Ref. ECAR 91.16)
Objective.

IN
The objective of this course is to ensure the competence of PAS flight crew member to safely
perform an automatic approach and manual landing using P-RNAV with normal and abnormal

PR
aircraft system operation, subject to ECAA approval and limitations contained in PAS Airline
sops-specs.
P-RNAV is part of PAS training program which consists of RNAV (RNP5)

IF
 STARS.
 P-RNAV (RNP5) approaches.

PY
The P-RNAV is integrated in the Recurrent Training and Proficiency check form.
Prerequisite.
O
This training is designed for crewmembers who are currently qualified captains and first officers
of PAS .
C

Training Location.
D

Training shall be conducted at any ECAA approved training center, such as PAS approved
E

class room / approved training center in Cairo and/or others.

LL

Training Aids
Training aids used in this course should be full flight simulator.
O

Methods of instructions
TR

 Briefing
 Demonstration
Procedural Drills
N


 Critic
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 49
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Course Layout.

D
Full Flight Simulator.

TE
1. Normal operations
A. RNAV (RNP5) briefing, verification.

IN
B. Accuracy requirements
C. FMS setup and cross checking procedure

PR
D. RNAV (RNP5) SID.
E. Arrival briefing.
F. Accuracy requirements.
G. FMS setup and cross checking procedure

IF
H. RNAV star (RNP5)
Approach.

PY
 Holding patterns to a manual termination.
 Holding patterns to a manual altitude.
 Holding patterns to a fix.
O
 Holding patterns to Constance radiance to a fix.
 A minimum of three departures and three arrivals using RNAV.
C

2. Visual Segment Demo.

A. Crosswind and standard callouts
D

B. System Failure and downgrading procedure.

E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 50
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

D
5.16 Pilot Incapacitation.

TE
Objective.

IN
The objective of this training is to train all crewmembers operating PAS aircraft the
procedure to handle any flight crew incapacitation in all phases of the flight.

PR
Training Location.
simulator.

IF
Training Aids.

PY
 Briefing.
 Simulator (to be introduced as an item during):-
 Type Qualification
O
 Transition
 Upgrade to PIC
C
 Re-Qualification
 Re-Current
D

Simulator Items.
E

 Flight crew incapacitation during Takeoff.

LL

 Flight crew incapacitation during Departure.

 Flight crew incapacitation during Cruse.
 Flight crew incapacitation during Landing.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 51
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.17 Aircraft Upset Recovery.

D
TE
Objectives.
The main objective of ground briefing to ensure that all crew members receive the required

IN
knowledge for the basic flight control laws, protections and maintaining the aircraft in the safe
flight envelop.

PR
Prerequisite.
Crewmembers attending initial, transition, difference and recurrent training courses.
Training Location.

IF
simulator.

PY
Training aids.
Briefing.
O
Curriculum:
C

Briefing covers the applicable procedures and techniques as follows.

D

 Flight control Jams.

 Basic recovery technique.
E

 Aerodynamic basics.
Auto protection.
LL


O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 52
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.18 Adverse weather operations.

D
TE
(Ref. ECAR 121.404)
Objectives.

IN
This course is intended to ensure that all crewmembers receive the required knowledge to
operate the aircraft according to recommended procedures in.

PR
 Anti-ice/de-ice policies and procedures;
 Contaminated runway operations;
 Thunderstorm avoidance;

IF
 Flight in severe turbulence.
 Cold weather operations;
 Hot weather operations;

PY
 High altitude airports;
 Operations near volcanic ash;
O
Prerequisite.
C
Crewmembers attending initial, transition, difference, upgrade and recurrent training courses.
Recurrent Training.
D

Part of annual simulator check.

E

Training Location.
LL

simulator.
O

Training aids.
TR

 Briefing.
 Simulator (to be introduced as an item during the recurrent training).
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 53
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Curriculum.

D
Aircraft preparation in adverse weather.

TE

 Correct procedure for deicing Operations in icing conditions.
 Performance considerations in cold weather conditions.
Altimeter Corrections.

IN

 Contaminated pavement aircraft handling techniques.
 Recognition of conditions requiring the use of aircraft anti icing systems

PR
 Use of weather radar
 Performance considerations in “hot and high” conditions
 Effect of high TAS
 Recognition of conditions requiring the use of hot weather or high elevation procedures

IF
 Turbulence penetration speed/Mach, actions and handling consequences.
 Flight in turbulence

PY
 Air mass characteristics leading to possible severe turbulence.
 Use of documentation: temperature and wind gradient on computer flight plan.
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 54
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.19 CONTROLLED FLIGHT INTO TERRAIN (CFIT).

D
TE
Objectives.
This course is intended to ensure that all crewmembers receive the required knowledge for the

IN
terrain awareness procedures, including GPWS/EGPWS alerts and the avoidance of Controlled
Flight into Terrain (CFIT).

PR
 To alert flight crews to the factors this may cause CFIT.
 To ensure horizontal and vertical situation awareness is maintained at all times.
 To provide crews with an adequate knowledge of the capabilities and limitations of the
GPWS/EGPWS on their aircraft.

IF
 To ensure they are proficient in performing the terrain avoidance maneuver required in
response to a GPWS/EGPWS warning.

Prerequisite.
PY
Crewmembers attending initial, transition, difference, upgrade and recurrent training courses.
O
Recurrent Training.
C

Part of annual simulator check.

D

Training Location.
E

simulator.
LL

Training aids.
 Briefing.
O

 Simulator (to be introduced as an item during the recurrent training).

Curriculum.
TR

 Factors that contribute to CFIT

 Immediate reaction
N

 GPWS/EGPWS review
 Reaction adapted to type of warning
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 55
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

D
5.20 TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (TCAS).

TE
Objectives.

IN
This course is intended to ensure that all crewmembers receive the required knowledge for the
TCAS system principle and procedures.

PR
 To understand the system concept
 Conflict Resolution Principles
 To perform the operational procedures and avoid collision

IF
Prerequisite.
Crewmembers attending initial, transition, difference, upgrade and recurrent training courses.
Recurrent Training.
Part of annual route and simulator check.
PY
O
Training Location.
C

Simulator.
D

Training aids.
E

 Lectures (standard classroom).

LL

 Hand out reading materials (DSC-34-80-10).

Curriculum.
O

 General system description

 Airspace boundaries
TR

 Intruders classifications and symbols

 TCAS alerts; Advisories and Aural messages
 Basic components
N

 Inhibitions
 TCAS procedures and alert responses;
O

 TCAS case studies or scenarios.

C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 56
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

5.21 Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM).

D
TE
Objectives.
This course is intended to ensure that all crewmembers receive the required knowledge for

IN
the RVSM airspace definition and procedures.
Prerequisite.

PR
Crewmembers attending initial, transition and difference training courses.
Recurrent Training.

IF
Part of annual route check.
Training Location.
Training will be conducted at PAS aircrafts.
Training aids.
PY
O
• Briefing.
C

• Hand out reading materials.

E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 57
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

Curriculum.

D
1. Introduction.

TE
2. Definitions.

IN
3. Applicable regulations.
4. certification.

PR
5. Aircraft system performance.
6. RVSM required equipment.

IF
7. MEL.
8. RVSM Approval.
9. PAS A/C status.
10. Operation procedure.
PY
O
11. A/C release for RVSM operation.
C

12. Contingency procedures after entering RVSM airspace.

E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 5
OM Part D Page: 58
Training Manual Flight
Flight Training TRAINING

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

6 Cabin Crew Training Program ____________________________________3

6.1 Cabin Crew Training Program ____________________________________ 3

D
6.1.1 Introduction ____________________________________________________ 3

TE
6.1.2 Cabin Crew Training Program Quick Reference ________________________ 4
6.1.3 Cabin Crew Training Program Elements. _____________________________ 4
6.1.4 Cabin Crew license ______________________________________________ 12

IN
6.2 Initial Training_________________________________________________ 13

PR
6.3 Transitional Training ___________________________________________ 13
6.4 Type Differences Training _______________________________________ 13

IF
6.5 Recurrent Training _____________________________________________ 13
6.6 Re-qualification Training ________________________________________ 13
6.7
PY
Purser Training ________________________________________________ 13
6.8 Instructor Training _____________________________________________ 13
O
6.9 Examiner _____________________________________________________ 13
C

6.10 Line Evaluation. ________________________________________________ 13

D

6.11 Testing and Evaluation __________________________________________ 13

E

6.12 Training records _______________________________________________ 13

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

6 Cabin Crew Training Program

6.1 Cabin Crew Training Program
6.1.1 Introduction
PAS has a cabin crew training and evaluation program that is approved and accepted by

D
the ECAA and which ensures that cabin crew members understand their responsibilities

TE
and are competent to perform the duties and functions associated with cabin operations.
6.1.1.1 PAS cabin crew Training program

IN
PAS cabin crew training program shall address:
1. Initial Training which is divided to 2 phases.

PR
a. Theoretical part is conducted at PAS classroom.
b. Practical part is conducted at any training center approved by the ECAA.
2. Recurrent 24 Training (Theoretical / Practical every 24-calendar month).

IF
3. Requalification Training.
4. Aircraft Type Difference.
5.
PY
Recurrent 12 Training (Technical / Emergency - every 12 calendar months).
6. Instructor, Evaluator Course.
7. Purser (Purser / CDC) Training Course.
O
8. Transition Course (Technical / Emergency whenever required by the company).
C

9. In route Assessment and Evaluation

10. Tailored Basic Indoctrination for newly hired cabin crew holding cabin crew
D

license.
Training programs are reviewed periodically by the Cabin Crew Manager in coordination
E

with training manager to ensure continuous improvement and effectiveness. This process
LL

is done through:
• Regulatory bulletins of ECAA.
O

• Recommendations of manufactures.
• Results of trend analysis.
TR

6.1.1.2 Training Location

N

Cabin Crew Training will be conducted at PAS Training Center and/or any ECAA
approved training center.
O

6.1.1.3 Training Aids

C

1 Visual Aids.
N

2 Training Films.
U

3 Emergency Equipment.
4 Firefighting facilities.
5 Over wing Exit
6 Ditching pool.
7 Aircraft

__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

6.1.1.4 Methods of instruction

1. Class work
2. Demonstration
3. Observation
4. Participation.

D
5. Hands-on training.

TE
6.1.2 Cabin Crew Training Program
Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.1.2

IN
6.1.3 Cabin crew training program elements

PR
6.1.3.1 Safety Policies and Procedures
PAS shall ensure cabin crew members receive training that provides knowledge of safety
policies and procedures associated with the pre-flight, in-flight and post-flight phases of

IF
cabin operations. Such training shall be included in the cabin crew initial and
requalification training courses and in the recurrent training course, on a frequency in
PY
accordance with requirements of ECAA, once during 12-month period.
Training in safety policies and procedures typically addresses:
 crew coordination and communication;
O
 sterile flight deck;
 mandatory briefings;
C

 safety checks;
D

 passenger acceptance and handling;

 carry-on baggage;
E

 personal electronic devices;

LL

 fueling with passengers on board;

 turbulence;
O

 flight and cabin crew member incapacitation;

 Flight deck access.
TR

6.1.3.2 Emergency Procedures

PAS shall ensure cabin crew members receive training that provides the Knowledge
N

required to executing emergency procedures. Such training shall be included in the

O

cabin crew initial and re-qualification training courses, and in the recurrent training
C

course on a frequency in accordance with requirements of the ECAA, once during

every 12-month period. As a minimum, training shall address emergency procedures
N

associated with:
U

 cabin fires;
 smoke and fumes;
 emergency landing (land and water);
 planned cabin evacuation (land and water);
 unplanned cabin evacuation (land and water)
 Medical emergencies and basic first aid.
6.1.3.3 Function and Operation of cabin Emergency Equipment.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 5
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

PAS shall ensure cabin crew members receive training that provides the knowledge
required to understand the function and operation of cabin emergency equipment and to
execute associated pre-flight checks. Such training shall be included in the cabin crew
initial and re-qualification training courses and in the recurrent training course, on a
frequency in accordance with requirements of the ECAA, once during every 12month

D
period.
Emergency equipment, including rafts, are included in an aircraft type-training course.

TE
6.1.3.4 Practical Training on Operation Of Cabin Equipment.

IN
Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.1.3.4
6.1.3.5 First Aid Training

PR
Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.1.3.5
6.1.3.6 Training in High Altitude Depressurization

IF
Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.1.3.6
6.1.3.7 Dangerous Goods Awareness, Recognition and Emergency Action
PY
PAS cabin crew members receive training in dangerous goods awareness, recognition
and emergency action. Such training shall be included in the cabin crew initial and
O
requalification training courses and in the recurrent training course on a frequency in
C

accordance with requirements of the Authority, but all subjects within the scope of
dangerous goods training shall be addressed once during every 24-month period. As a
D

minimum, subjects within the scope of dangerous goods training include:

 general philosophy;
E

 limitations;
LL

 labeling and marking;

 recognition of undeclared dangerous goods;
O

 Provisions for passengers and crew; emergency procedures.

TR

6.1.3.8 Aviation Security

Cabin crew members are directly involved in the implementation of security measures
and thereby require an awareness of obligations to the Security Program of the operator.
N

Cabin Crew security training shall be in accordance with ECAA applicable regulations
O

and/or the ECAA security program.

Specific subject areas included in recurrent security training are typically identified and
C

derived from an analysis of actual or likely situations or trends experienced during line
N

operations.
U

Security training typically addresses topics or tactics as appropriate for the operator that
might be associated with or could be used to facilitate crew-passenger reaction to or
interaction with hijackers (e.g. conflict management, use of passive or non-passive
cooperation, understanding Stockholm syndrome, identification of and response to
hijacker types/motives).

__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 6
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

Training exercises are typically interactive in nature, Scenarios or situations (e.g. bomb
threat, hijacking, and unruly passenger) are presented using various accepted training
methods (e.g. live role playing, table top, computer-based training).
Training is applicable to aircraft types that have designated least-risk bomb locations.
PAS shall ensure cabin crew complete initial and recurrent security training as approved

D
or accepted by the ECAA, and in accordance with the PAS security training program.
Cabin crew members shall complete initial security training prior to being assigned to

TE
operational duties; and subsequently during recurrent training a minimum of once every
12 months.

IN
Cabin crew security training shall address the following subject areas:
i. Determination of the seriousness of any occurrence;

PR
ii. Crew communication and coordination;
iii. Appropriate self-defense responses;
iv. Use of non-lethal protective devices assigned to crew members for use as

IF
authorized by the State;
v. Understanding the behavior of terrorists so as to facilitate the ability to cope with
hijacker behavior and passenger responses;
PY
vi. Situational training exercises regarding various threat conditions;
vii. Flight deck procedures to protect the aircraft;
O
viii. Aircraft search procedures;
ix. As practicable, guidance on least-risk bomb locations.
C

6.1.3.9 Cabin Crew Assignments and Procedures

D

PAS ensures cabin crew members receive training that provides the necessary awareness
E

of other cabin crew assignments and procedures to assure fulfillment of all cabin crew
duties in the event of an emergency situation.
LL

Such training is included in the cabin crew initial and re-qualification training courses
and in the recurrent training course, on a frequency in accordance with requirements of
O

the ECAA, but once during every 12-month period.

TR

6.1.3.10 Aircraft Type Training

PAS shall have aircraft type training, which shall be completed by cabin crew members
N

as part of the process to qualify and remain qualified to perform cabin crew duties on
O

each type of aircraft to which they may be assigned. As a minimum, subjects covered
under aircraft type training shall include:
C

a. aircraft systems;
N

b. exit locations and operation;

c. emergency equipment locations and operation;
U

d. Emergency assignments. The term “emergency assignments” refers to specific duties

assigned to cabin crew members during emergency situations.
e. Unique features of the aircraft cabin (as applicable for variants of a common aircraft
type).
An aircraft type training course for cabin crew members would include the description,
locations and operation of an aircraft and its equipment. Instruction in aircraft systems
typically includes:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 7
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

Aircraft interior, passenger seats and restraints;

 Crew member seats and  Lighting systems;  Oxygen systems.
 Instruction on exit locations and operation addresses the types of exits on an aircraft.
 Instruction on emergency equipment locations and operation addresses slides, rafts,
slide/rafts, ramp slide/rafts, life jackets and other flotation devices.

D
 Note
In accordance with the requirements of the ECAA, cabin crew members that

TE
concurrently operate aircraft of different types or operate variants within one aircraft type
to attend and complete a transitional and/or difference training before being assigned

IN
duties on such variants or types. The qualification process would typically address the
differences between variants or types.

PR
6.1.3.11 SMS Training
PAS has a program that ensures cabin operations personnel are trained and competent to
perform SMS duties. The scope of such training shall be appropriate to each individual's

IF
involvement in the SMS.
Such training shall be included in the cabin crew initial and in the recurrent training
PY
course on a frequency every 36 months.
SMS training curriculum typically includes modules that provide an overview of the
O
elements of SMS, such as:
• Organizational safety policies, goals and objectives;
C

• Organizational safety roles and responsibilities related to safety;

• Basic safety risk management principles;
D

• Safety reporting systems;

E

• Safety management support (including evaluation and audit programs);

• Lines of communication for dissemination of safety information;
LL

• A validation process that measures the effectiveness of training;

• Event investigation and analysis techniques;
O

• Hazard identification;
TR

• Risk assessment and mitigation;

• Audit principles and methodology;
• SMS implementation, analysis and continual improvement;  Emergency
N

response preparedness.
O

6.1.3.12 Familiarization Flights

C

A familiarization flight is also referred to as “Operating experience”. Each cabin crew

N

trainee having no previous comparable operating experience in the aircraft type shall
participate in familiarization flights.
U

The familiarization flights shall be completed within 90 days of fulfilling the

requirements of the ground-training portion of the operator's training program.
During the familiarization flight, the cabin crew trainee shall be additional to the
minimum number of operating cabin crew members required.

__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 8
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

The familiarization flight shall be conducted under supervision by ECAA approved

Instructor. It shall be structured and involve the cabin crew trainee in the participation of
safety-related pre-flight, in-flight, pre-landing and post-flight duties.
Familiarization flights shall form a part of the training record for each cabin crew
member.

D
Familiarization flights shall be carried out on all different types of aircraft in the fleet
prior to cabin crewmember operating such aircraft. Different types are categorized by the

TE
type of doors & evacuation devices of the aircraft.
This activity requires the presence of a cabin crew instructor or examiner to provide the

IN
necessary supervision; however, it is important the person conducting the supervision
has received training and understands the responsibilities for the cabin crew position(s)

PR
being observed.
Line flight experience is normally conducted using a checklist that contains the duties
and procedures that are being observed. The results of the observation would be recorded

IF
on the checklist, which is then retained with other cabin crew training records.
 As Part, Initial Training Process
PAS ensures cabin crew members complete supervised line flight experience as part of
PY
the cabin crew initial qualification process and prior to being assigned unsupervised
duties as a cabin crew member. Supervised line flight experience shall be completed
O
during a minimum of one sequence of actual line flight segments and shall require a
cabin crew member to demonstrate an understanding of all responsibilities and
C

competency to perform the duties and execute the procedures associated with cabin
operations.
D

 As Part of Requalification Training Process

E

PAS ensures cabin crew members complete supervised line flight experience as part of
LL

the cabin crew re-qualification process and prior to being assigned unsupervised duties
on any aircraft.

O

As Part of Transitional Training Process

PAS ensures cabin crew members complete supervised line flight experience as part of
TR

the cabin crew Transitional Training Process and prior to being assigned unsupervised
duties on any aircraft.
N

6.1.3.13 Human Performance Training / Crew Resource Management (CRM)

O

PAS ensure cabin crew members receive training in human performance to gain an
understanding of the human factors involved in conducting cabin safety duties and
C

coordinating with the flight crew during the execution of onboard emergency procedures.
N

Such training, according to the ECAA requirements, shall be included in the cabin crew
initial and recurrent training course, on a frequency in accordance with requirements of
U

the ECAA, once during every 36-month period. (12 month for PAS)
Human performance training focuses on relationships between people and equipment,
systems, procedures and the environment as well as personal relationships between
individuals and groups. It encompasses the overall performance of cabin crewmembers
while they carry out their duties.

__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 9
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

During the training emphasis, shall be placed on the importance of effective CO -

ordination and two-way communication between flight crew and cabin crew in various
abnormal and emergency situations including the use of correct terminology, common
language, and effective use of communications equipment. The training shall include:
 human factors in aviation;

D
 human error and reliability, error chain, error prevention and detection;
 cabin crew skills;

TE
 crew resource management (CRM);
 threat and error management (tailored to cabin operations);

IN
 case studies (e.g. accidents/incidents);
 stress, stress management, fatigue and vigilance;

PR
 Combined flight crew and cabin crew in practice in airplane evacuations.
 Joint discussion of emergency scenarios between flight crew and cabin crew.
 To identify unusual situations that might occur inside the cabin, as well as an

IF
activity outside the airplane that could affect the safety of the airplane or passengers.
 The nature of operations as well as the associated crew operating procedures and
areas of operations that produce particular difficulties.
PY
 Discussion of climatologically conditions and unusual hazards, Initial and recurrent
CRM training shall, wherever practicable, include combined flight crew and cabin
O
crew in practice in airplane evacuations and joint discussion of selected problems.
 operator safety culture, standard operating procedures (SOPs), organizational
C

factors;
 information acquisition and processing, situation awareness, workload management;
D

 decision making;
E

 communication and coordination inside and outside the flight crew compartment;
LL

 leadership and team behavior, synergy;

 automation and philosophy of the use of automation (if relevant to the type);
 specific type-related differences;
O

 case studies;
TR

 Additional areas which warrant extra attention, as identified by the safety

management system.
PAS shall revise the CRM recurrent program over a period not exceeding 3 years. The
N

revision of the program should take into account the de-identified results of the CRM
O

assessments of crews, and information identified by the safety dept.

C

6.1.3.14 Joint training

N

PAS ensures cabin crew members participate in joint training activities or exercises with
flight crew members to improve onboard coordination and mutual understanding of the
U

human factors involved in addressing emergency situations and security threats.

Every 36 months the crewmember emergency and safety equipment training drill
requirements includes the aircraft emergencies requires interaction between flight crew
and cabin crew including the joint practice in aircraft evacuations.
Emergency and safety equipment training should include joint practice in aircraft
evacuations so that all who are involved are aware of the duties other crew members

__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 10
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

should perform. When such practice is not possible, combined flight crew and cabin
crew training should include joint discussion of emergency scenarios.
Joint training provides a forum to focus on the coordination and communication
necessary between the flight and cabin crews and the subjects associated with emergency
procedures, security procedures and human factors. To the extent possible, such training

D
would include joint practical training exercises. If such exercises are not possible, joint
interactive discussion in the subject areas is an acceptable alternative.

TE
Joint training between Flight and cabin crews is mandatory to standardize performance;
all stages of training are subject to joint training. Knowledge of common operating

IN
procedures is mandatory.
6.1.3.15 Basic Indoctrination for Newly Employed Cain Crew (With Valid License)

PR
6.1.3.15.1 Objective
The objective of this course is to serve as an introduction for the new hire

IF
crewmember to PAS and also serves as the basis for subsequent crewmember training.
6.1.3.15.2 Subject Outline
A. Company orientation
PY
 Overview of company
O
 Type and scope of operations conducted.

C

Route structure.
 Company structure:
D

 Organization Chart, Facility and Locations.

E

D. PAS policies and procedures.

LL

 Authority of Pilot in Command.

 Chain of command.
O

 Emergency briefing.

TR

Emergency exits.
 Cabin attendant stations / call name.

N

Seating policy.
 Passengers' handling.
O

 Transportation of inadmissible passengers,


C

Deportees or persons in custody.


N

Permissible size and weight of hand baggage.

 Securing of load, cabin.
U

 Special loads.
 Live animals.
 Servicing of airplanes.
 Potable water.
 Removal and disposal of waste.
 Oxygen.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 11
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

 Cleaning of cabin.
 Multiple occupancy of airplane seats
 Smoking regulations.
 Procedures for refusal of embarkation.
 Ferry flights.

D
 Positioning flights.

TE
E. Duties and responsibilities of Crewmembers.
 Pre and post flight duties.
 Night flight duties.

IN
 Special care cases duties and responsibilities.
 Tips.

PR
 Customs and currency regulations.
 Duty free shopping.

IF
 Handling of company material.
 Accident / illness.
 Crew hotels.
PY
 Night stops.
 Crew transportation to / from the airport.
O
F. Crew regulations and policies.
C

 Behavior in public.
 Personal documents.
D

 Crewmember certificates.
E

 PAS identity card and name board.  Uniform. Crew luggage.

LL

 General safety and work performance Conversation.

 Sleeping
O

 Statements to the press or external bodies.

TR

H. Crew health precautions.

 Alcoholic beverages.
 Narcotics, drugs.
N

 Medication.
O

 Immunization.
 Blood donation.
C

 Deep sea diving.

N

 Meal precautions.
U

 Sleep and rest.

 Surgical operation.
6.1.3.15.3 Programmed Hours
 The Tailored Basic Indoctrination programmed hours for Cabin Crew joining PAS with valid
license are 20 hours

__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 12
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

6.1.3.16 Cabin crew member competency checks:

1. PAS shall ensure that no person shall serve as cabin crew member of an aircraft unless,
within the preceding 12 calendar months, that person has passed a cabin Crew member inflight
competency checks in which he/she satisfactorily performs the duties and responsibilities of a
cabin crew member in one of the types of aircraft he/she is to fly.

D
2. A cabin crew inflight competency check for operations conducted shall:

TE
i. Be given by a cabin crew instructor who is currently qualified; and
ii. Consist of at least one flight.

IN
6.1.4 Cabin Crew license
6.1.4.1 Issuance Cabin Crew License (Ref. ECAR 63.37)

PR
a) PAS shall ensure that following completion of initial and/or recurrent training each cabin
crewmember undergoes a minimum of two (2) inflight competency check covering the training
received, in order to verify the proficiency of the cabin crewmember. These checks must be

IF
carried out by personnel approved by the Egyptian Civil Aviation Authority.
b) PAS shall maintain records of each cabin crewmember of all training and checking
required.
PY
c) The Cabin Crewmember license is valid for 2 years from the date of issue PAS
Shall submit training details pertaining to the holder, for the subsequent renewal of Cabin
O
Crewmember license
C

d) The loss of a Crewmember Certificate shall be informed to the ECAA.

6.1.4.2 Validity of Cabin Crew licenses
D

Cabin crew licenses shall be expired at the end of the 24th month after the month in which the
E

license was issued or renewed as provided in ECAR 63.13(b).

LL

6.1.4.3 Cabin crew Requirement for additional A/C type endorsement (Ref. ECAR
63.39)
O

Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.1.4.3

TR
N
O
C
N
U

__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 13
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

6.2 Initial Training

Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.2

6.3 Transitional Training

Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.3

D
6.4 Type Differences Training

TE
Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.4

6.5 Recurrent Training

IN
Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.5

PR
6.6 Re-qualification Training
Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.6

IF
6.7 Purser Training
Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.7

6.8 Instructor Training

PY
Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.8
O
6.9 Examiner
C

Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.9

D

6.10 Line Evaluation

E

Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.10

LL

6.11 Testing and Evaluation

Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.11
O

6.12 Training records

TR

Refer to OM Part A Volume V Cabin Crew Manual 6.12

N
O
C
N
U

__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch :6
OM Part D Page: 14
Training Manual
Cabin Crew
Cabin Crew Training Program Training

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue. Date: Mar 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date: Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

Table of Contents: Chapter 7

Table of Contents: Chapter 7 .................................................................... 1
Chapter 7: Flight Dispatcher Training ................................................................................................. 3
7.0 General. ............................................................................................................................................... 3
7.1 Basic Indoctrination. ...................................................................................................................... 4
7.2 Flight Dispatcher Initial/Transition Training. ................................................................................ 6
7.2.1 Flight Dispatcher Initial/Transition Training for (Helicopter). ................................................... 8
7.3 Flight Dispatcher Recurrent Training. ......................................................................................... 10
7.3.1 Flight Dispatcher Recurrent Training for (Helicopter). ............................................................ 12
7.4 Flight Dispatcher Re-qualification Training ................................................................................ 14
7.5 Flight Dispatcher Instructor Training. ......................................................................................... 15
7.6 Safety Management System Course ............................................................................................ 17
7.7 CRM Training .............................................................................................................................. 18
7.8 EDTO Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 19
7.9 Cargo Operational Procedure ....................................................................................................... 20
7.10 Dangerous Goods ....................................................................................................................... 21
7.11 Special Airports.......................................................................................................................... 22
7.12 Reserved ............................................................................................................................................. 23

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

Intentionally Left Blank

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

Chapter 7: Flight Dispatcher Training

7.0 General.
1 - The purpose of this chapter is to detail the specific Ground Training courses administered by the
training department.

2 - The Trainee must obtain a minimum of 70% on all examinations and demonstrate the required
skills and knowledge to satisfactory complete a course.

3 - The Course Material for Flight Dispatcher will be amended when changes in ECAR, Company
polices take place and it will be checked annually to ensure continuous improvement and
effectiveness of the course material.

4 - This section covers all ground and flight training programs which include all initial,
Recurrent, transition, requalification, all ground and flight training examination programs are
approved by ECAA. All instructors, examiners, (whether employed or subcontracted) are trained,
current qualified and standardized for their assigned tasks, and are certified by PAS and approved
by ECAA when required.

Instructor Flight Dispatcher: - Inst. Mr. Badr Eissa

Instructor Flight Dispatcher: - Inst. Mr. Ahmed El Etriby

5 – Annual committee to evaluate course materials and training programs should be held on the
MARCH by the Navigation & Air Traffic GM / Assistance GM for Navigation Affairs / ODCC
Manager /Air Traffic & Dispatching Section Head, to ensure compliance of the course materials
with ( ECAR 121 subpart N ) & PAS qualifications and performance standards.

6 – The evaluation for the course material is conducted by a course evaluation sheet that will be
stored for 3 years, to insure continuous improvement of the course materials.

7 - Any Flight Dispatcher who is due for initial or recurrent or transition or requalification training
will not be able to exercise any duty unless he finished the ground recurrent course and the annual
familiarization flight from the flight deck of PAS aircrafts over any route segment where
responsibility for operation control will be exercised to maintain currency on the company type
after he pass the competency check as per ECAR 121.463.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.1 Basic Indoctrination.

(Ref. ECAR 121.422)

Objective

The objective of this course is to familiarize the trainee with the duties and responsibilities of PAS
Flight Dispatcher in relation to international, national and company regulations, operations
specifications and company manuals.

Prerequisite

Flight Dispatcher attending initial, recurrent, transition & Re-qualification training courses holding
an ECAA Flight Dispatcher License and has no past experience with PAS.

Course Duration

 A - 40 Training hours for a newly hired flight dispatcher with no operational or airline
experience.

 B - 20 Training hours for a newly hired flight dispatcher with operational or airline
experience.

Training Location

Training shall be conducted by PAS approved instructors in the company training class rooms.

Training Aids

 Visual aids.
 Data show.
 Related publications.

Methods of Instruction

 Lecture.
 Demonstration.
 Class participation.
 Follow-up reading material.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 5
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

Curriculum

General Subjects. A B
--------- ---------
 Duties and Responsibilities. 06hrs. - 03hrs.
 Office Documentation. 01hrs. - 01hrs
 Regulations and company procedures. 06hrs. - 03hrs,
 Emergency procedures & notification 02hrs. - 01hrs.
 Relationship between the flight dispatcher, crew member & ATC. 01hrs. - 01hrs.
 Meteorology. 06hrs. - 03hrs.
 Flight Operations Manual. 06hrs. - 02hrs.
 Planning and performance (general). 10hrs. - 05hrs.
 Safety Management System ( SMS ) 02hrs. - 01hrs.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Total Course hours 40hours - 20hours

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 6
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.2 Flight Dispatcher Initial/Transition Training.

Objective

The objective of this course is to train the candidate in accordance with the applicable ECAA
regulations; this course will qualify the trainee for assignments as Flight Dispatcher.

Prerequisite

This course is predicated on the fact that the trainee is holding a valid ECAA Flight Dispatcher
License and that the trainee will have completed basic indoctrination course.

Training Location

Training shall be conducted by any approved company instructor at approved training center or in
the company approved training classroom.

Training Aids

 Visual aids.
 Data show.
 Related publications.

Methods of Instruction

 Lecture.
 Demonstration.
 Class participation.
 Follow-up reading material.
 Classroom drill.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 7
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher
Curriculum

 General Subjects 08 hrs.

- Jeppesen Manual.
- Aviation indoctrination.
- Air Traffic management.
- Navigational aid & publications data.
- Notams System and their effect on the route & airport planning.
- Basic aircraft performance & operating dispatch requirements and procedures.
- Dispatcher duties and responsibilities & Joint dispatcher / pilot responsibilities.
 Civil Air Law and Regulations. (Content of ECAR, AIP.) 02 hrs.
 Regulations and policies and company procedures. 08 hrs.
- Operational emergency and abnormal procedures and notifications of proper government,
company during emergencies to give maximum help to an aircraft in distress.
- Contents of the Operations Manual relevant to the operational control of flights.
- Security procedures (emergency and abnormal situation procedures and notifications).
- Characteristics of appropriate airports study method and selection.
- Air traffic control and instrument approach procedures.
- Use of communications system in normal and emergency situations including the
characteristics of those systems.
- Fuel supply and the availability of A/C fuel type requirements.
- Navigation, special navigation aspects.
- Communication.
- Flight monitoring.
 Meteorology. 06 hrs.
- Prevailing weather phenomena and the source of meteorological information.
- Seasonal meteorological adverse weather condition and hazards and procedures for
recognizing and avoiding these situations.
- Effect of Meteorological condition on radio reception on the A/C used.
 Aircraft Systems and MEL/CDL. 04 hrs.
- Radio equipment in the aircraft used.
- Nav. equipment in the A/C used including peculiarities & limitation of that equipment.
- General description of instrument approach & emergency equipment and procedures.
 Aircraft weight and performance and Flight planning including airports & alternate & route
selection, flight time analysis. 05 hrs.
 Aircraft Weight and balance & control & its manual and electronic computations. 05 hrs.
- Aircraft loading instructions.
 De – icing Anti – icing procedures. 02 hrs.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Course hours 40 hours.
Any dispatcher who is due for initial / transition or recurrent or requalification training will not be
able to exercise any duty unless he finished the ground recurrent course and the annual
familiarization flight from the flight deck of PAS aircrafts over any route segment where
responsibility for operation control will be exercised to maintain currency on the company type
after he pass the competency check that demonstrate knowledge & ability gained as per ECAR
121.463.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 8
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.2.1 Flight Dispatcher Initial/Transition Training for

(Helicopter).
Objective

The objective of this course is to train the candidate in accordance with the applicable ECAA
regulations; this course will qualify the trainee for assignments as Flight Dispatcher.

Prerequisite

This course is predicated on the fact that the trainee is holding a valid ECAA Flight Dispatcher
License and that the trainee will have completed basic indoctrination course.

Training Location

Training shall be conducted by any approved company instructor at approved training center or in
the company approved training classroom.

Training Aids

 Visual aids.
 Data show.
 Related publications.

Methods of Instruction

 Lecture.
 Demonstration.
 Class participation.
 Follow-up reading material.
 Classroom drill.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 9
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

Curriculum
 Regulations, Procedures and Policies - 2 Hours
- Egyptian Civil Aviation Authority Regulations
- Appropriate ICAO Regulations
- Flight Operation Manual
- Operational Specification
- Standard Operation Procedures
 Joint Dispatcher and Pilot Responsibilities - 1 Hours
- Flight Operation Manual
- Base Standard Operation Procedures
 Planning and Performance – General – 3 Hours
- Aircraft Airworthiness
- Routes
- Communication Systems
- Characteristics of Appropriate Airports and Helidecks
- Fuel Requirements
 Meteorology – 2 Hours
- Aviation Weather - General
- Sources of Weather Information
- NOTAM System
- Prevailing Weather Phenomena
- Weather Reports and Forecasts
- Weather Data Interpretation
 Air Traffic Control – 5 Hours
- Navigation Aids and Publications
- Instrument Approach Procedures
- Flight Operation Procedures
 Aircraft Specific – 14 Hours
- Major Sections
- General Data
- Aircraft Systems - General
- Aircraft Equipment
- Aircraft Limitations
- Emergency Procedures
- Aircraft Performance and Flight Planning
- Weight and Balance Computations
- Minimum Equipment List
 PAS Emergency Response Plan - 1 Hour
 Flight Dispatch Emergency Training – 2 Hours
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Course hours 30 hours.
Any dispatcher who is due for initial / transition training will not be able to exercise any duty
unless he finished the ground course and the familiarization flight on board PAS Helicopter over
any route segment where responsibility for operation control will be exercised to maintain currency
on the company type after he pass the performance exam & the competency check that demonstrate
knowledge & ability gained.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 10
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.3 Flight Dispatcher Recurrent Training.

(Every 12 calendar months)

Objective

The objective of this course is to ensure the continued competence of all PAS Flight Dispatchers &
that dispatcher is adequately trained and currently proficient with respect to the type of aircraft and
to comply with the provisions of the regulations through the medium of annual recurrent training on
subjects related to efficient and safe flight operations.

Prerequisite

This course is designed for Flight Dispatchers who are currently qualified to dispatch PAS aircraft.

Training Location

Training shall be conducted by qualified PAS instructors in the company approved training class
rooms.

Training Aids

 Visual aids.
 Data show.
 Relevant publications.

Methods of Instruction

 Lecture.
 Demonstration.
 Class participation.
 Follow-up reading material.
 Classroom drill.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 11
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

Curriculum

Subjects

• Review for updates of all items referred to within the initial training.
• Update on new regulations and policies and company procedures.
• Aircraft performance and equipment and flight planning.
• Diversion situation and procedures.
• Update on new civil air law and regulations
• Review of Jeppesen manual & flight operation manual.
• Aircraft Weight and balance & control & its manual and electronic computations.
• Aircraft loading instructions.
• Reduce Vertical Separation Minimum ( RVSM )
• Required Navigation Performance ( RNP )
• Ground De-icing / Anti-icing.
• Navigation aspects update
• MEL / CDL.
• Elements of CRM
• Bulletins review.
• Weight and balance.
• Meteorology. ____________________________________________
Total Course hours 20 hours.

On completion of the course, A competency check must be given by the airline training personnel
to satisfy knowledge and ability gained.

As an integral part of recurrent training each dispatcher will be under a continues reading program
consisting of:

1. Recurrent Training bulletins.

2. Operations bulletins.
3. Training bulletins.
4. Information bulletins.
5. Safety bulletins.
6. Policy bulletins.

Any dispatcher who is due for initial or recurrent or transition or requalification training will not be
able to exercise any duty unless he finished the ground recurrent course and the annual
familiarization flight from the flight deck of PAS aircrafts over any route segment where
responsibility for operation control will be exercised to maintain currency on the company type
after he pass the competency check as per ECAR 121.463.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 12
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.3.1 Flight Dispatcher Recurrent Training for (Helicopter).

(Every 12 calendar months)

Objective

The objective of this course is to ensure the continued competence of PAS Flight Dispatchers & that
dispatcher is adequately trained and currently proficient with respect to the type of aircraft and to
comply with the provisions of the regulations through the medium of annual recurrent training on
subjects related to efficient and safe flight operations.

Prerequisite

This course is designed for Flight Dispatchers who are currently qualified to dispatch PAS aircraft.

Training Location

Training shall be conducted by qualified PAS instructors in the company approved training class
rooms.

Training Aids

 Visual aids.
 Data show.
 Relevant publications.

Methods of Instruction

 Lecture.
 Demonstration.
 Class participation.
 Follow-up reading material.
 Classroom drill.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 13
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

Course layout

a. Regulations, Procedures and Policies – 2 Hours

b. Joint Dispatcher and Pilot Responsibilities – 2 Hours
c. Planning and Performance – General – 2 Hours
d. Meteorology – 2 Hours
e. Air Traffic Control – 2 Hours
f. Aircraft Specific – 3 Hours
g. PAS Emergency Response Plan – 1 Hour
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Course hours 14 hours.

On completion of the course, a competency check must be given by the airline training
personnel to satisfy knowledge and ability gained.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 14
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.4 Flight Dispatcher Re-qualification Training

As far as the main objective of this category of training is to re-qualify an aircraft dispatcher that
fail to complete recurrent training, a competency check, or operating familiarization within the
eligibility period.

The content and length of the re-qualification curriculum depends on the length of time the aircraft
dispatcher has been unqualified.

The re-qualification curriculum is based on an aircraft dispatcher’s demonstration of individual

proficiency through a competency check and through the accomplishment of delinquent training
and checking events.

However, An aircraft dispatcher will be given the amount of training required to reach an
acceptable state of proficiency. The amount of hours for re-qualification training can never be less
than the time required for annual recurrent training. (ECAR 121.428)

Re-Qualification Curriculums for aircraft dispatcher

Re qualification Training
Time past month due Ground training Qualification
Up to 3 calendar months Recurrent training (if not Any training not
accomplished in eligibility accomplished in eligibility:
period) CC or OF
More than 3 and less than 6 8 hours remedial and (if not CC and (if not
months accomplished in eligibility accomplished in eligibility
period) recurrent training OF
More than 6 and less than 8 hours remedial recurrent CC and OF
12 months training and OJT to
proficiency
More than 12 and less 16 hours remedial recurrent CC and OF
than 36 months training, and OJT to
proficiency
More than 36 months Initial training CC and OF
KEY:
CC= Competency check
OF= Operational familiarization
OJT= On the Job Training

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 15
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.5 Flight Dispatcher Instructor Training.

Objective

The objective of this course is to qualify Flight Dispatcher for the issuance of a dispatcher instructor
certificate.

Prerequisite

This course is designed for Flight Dispatchers who are currently qualified to dispatch PAS aircraft.

Eligibility and experience requirements for dispatcher instructors

(a) To be eligible for a dispatcher instructor certificate a person must;

(1) Be at least 26 years of age;

(2) Have five years experience as an aircraft dispatcher in air carrier operations;
(3) Be able to read, write, speak and understand the English language. If the applicant is unable to
meet one of these requirements due to medical reasons, then the ECAA may place such operating
limitations on the applicant’s dispatcher instructor certificate as are necessary; and
(4) Has satisfactorily received a training course on the fundamentals of instructing to include:

(i) The learning process;

(ii) Elements of effective teaching;
(iii) Student evaluation and testing;
(iv) Course development;
(v) Lesson planning; and
(vi) Classroom training techniques.

(b)The applicant Flight Dispatcher must conduct an initial dispatcher training program under the
supervision of PAS qualified dispatcher instructor.

(c)The applicant Flight Dispatcher must have at least one year of dispatching experience on the type
of aircraft for which the applicant wishes to instruct.

(d)The applicant Flight Dispatcher must, before instructing a new type of aircraft, conduct a
dispatcher transition training program for the aircraft type the applicant requests to instruct.

Training Location

Training shall be conducted under the supervision of qualified PAS dispatcher instructor in the
company approved training class rooms.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 16
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

Training Aids

 Visual aids.
 Data show.
 Relevant publications.

Methods of Instruction

 Lecture.
 Demonstration.
 Class participation.
 Follow-up reading material.
 Classroom drill.

Requirements for renewal of the dispatcher instructor certificate

The qualified dispatcher instructor must accomplish the following on an annual basis in order to
renew their dispatcher instructor license.

(a) Must successfully complete a dispatcher instructor competency check administered by a

qualified dispatcher instructor or an ECAA inspector.

(b) Must complete at least 5 hours of observation in flight operations on a type aircraft for which the
dispatcher instructor is licensed to instruct. This requirement can be reduced by one hour for each
additional landing greater than one.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 17
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.6 Safety Management System Course

Refer to OM-D 4.21

Objective:

This course is intended to ensure that all Flight Dispatchers receive the required knowledge to
understand the requirements of a SMS. It covers all SMS relevant guidelines, contents,
requirements and principles on a basic level appropriate to their operational role.

Course Duration.

Referee to CSMM item 7.5

Training Location.

Training will be conducted at PAS Approved Classrooms at the company location in Cairo

Recurrent training.

In accordance with CSMM item 7.5

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 18
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.7 CRM Training

Referee to OM-D 4.12

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 19
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.8 EDTO Procedure

Such training not applicable for PAS Dispatchers as PAS is not authorized for Extended Diversion
Time Operations (EDTO operations) in according with operations specifications.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 20
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.9 Cargo Operational Procedure

Such training not applicable for PAS Dispatchers in accordance with PAS type of operation
specified on operations specifications.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 21
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.10 Dangerous Goods

Refer to OM-D 4.13

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Temp Rev. Date : Oct 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 22
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.11 Special Airports

Such training not applicable for PAS Dispatchers as PAS does not operate to any special airports.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Temp Rev. Date : Oct 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 23
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

7.12 Reserved

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Temp Rev. Date : Oct 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 7
OM Part D Page: 24
Training Manual Flight Dispatcher
Flight Dispatcher

Intentionally Left Blank

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Temp Rev. Date : Oct 2017 Rev. 01
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
CHAPTER 8 SIMULATOR EVALUATION POLICY ........................................................... 2

TE
8.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 2
8.2 TRAINING DEVICES ................................................................................................................. 2
8.1.1 Simulator Approval ....................................................................................................... 3

IN
8.2. TEST REQUIRED FOR SIMULATOR EVALUATION ....................................................................... 4
8.2.1....................................................................................................................................... 4

PR
8.2.2 Validation Tests .......................................................................................................... 4
8.2.3 Functions and Subjective Tests ................................................................................... 4
8.2.4 Minimum Serviceability Requirements ...................................................................... 5
8.3 COMPARISON OF SIMULATOR LEVEL BY DIFFERENT REGULARITY ...................................... 6

IF
8.4 PAS REQUIREMENTS TO APPROVE A FLIGHT SIMULATOR FOR TRAINING. .............................. 6
8.5 ECAA REQUIREMENTS TO APPROVE FLIGHT SIMULATOR ....................................................... 6

PY
Appendix A .................................................................................................................................. 8
Appendix B .................................................................................................................................. 23
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
CHAPTER 8 SIMULATOR EVALUATION POLICY

TE
8.1 Introduction
This section establishes the performance and documentation requirements for the evaluation of
aircraft flight simulator used for training and checking of PAS flight crew. Also the functional

IN
description, maneuver and procedures approved for different simulator levels.

PR
8.2 Training Devices
A Flight Training Device or Other Training Device may be provided to supplement the
classroom training and enable trainees to practice and consolidate theoretical instruction.

IF
The Approved Full Flight Simulators are compliant with international standards laid down by the
JAA specifically JAR STD 1A. The target accreditation for all FFS devices operated by the

PY
Company is a minimum Level 'C' or optimally Level 'D' where the data package from the aircraft
manufacturer supports it. Where this is not the case, the standard manufacturer’s data package is
used and a differences course is provided. Simulators are subject to an annual check as specified
O
by the Authority.
C
The Authority has approved the following simulators and training devices, for the purposes of
carrying out pilot training and testing as detailed:
D

 Full Flight Simulator (Level ‘D’)

E

1. Pilot Transition Training

LL

2. Pilot Proficiency Checks

3. Instrument Rating Checks
O

4. All Weather Operations Training and Checking

5. Pilot Recency Type Experience
TR

6. Recurrent Training
7. LOFT/LOS and LOE Training
8. Procedures Training
N

9. Technical Systems Training

10. Technical Refresher Training
O

11. Zero Flight Time Training

C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
8.1.1 Simulator Approval
1. Provision is made for use of apparatus such as flight simulators, flight trainers and fuselage

TE
'mock-ups' for certain periodical tests. These devices must be individually approved by the CAA
and may be used only under the supervision of a person Approved for the purpose. Approvals
normally restrict the use of such devices to the particular company's own flight crews. Inspectors

IN
will advise company on the procedure for obtaining such an Approval. Examiners' simulator
authority extends only to the device(s) for which the company named on this authority holds a

PR
specific written Approval.

2.Prior to each simulator session Authorized Examiners should check the serviceability in the
technical log and the level to which the simulator is cleared, as it may be changed from time to

IF
time and at short notice. Additionally, a careful check of the Approval License Skill Test (LST)
should be made to confirm the simulator's validity for checks and tests. When the simulator
instrumentation falls short of the requirement for pilots to be familiar with the electronic flight

PY
displays of the aircraft they fly for PT, including any failure modes and procedures, company are
to ensure that satisfactory alternative means are available for pilots to become familiar with the
instrumentation they will use.
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
8.2. Test required for simulator evaluation.

TE
8.2.1.
The flight simulator must be assessed in those areas which are essential for completing the flight
crew member training and checking process. The intent is to evaluate the simulator as objectively

IN
as possible. Pilot acceptance is also an important consideration.

PR
8.2.2 Validation Tests.
Validation test are used to compare objectively simulator and the aircraft manufacturer's
validation flight test data to ensure that they agree within a specified tolerance and normally
conducted by highly qualified personnel of major civil aviation authorities such as the British

IF
CAA, FAA, and French DGCA.

PY
8.2.3 Functions and Subjective Tests.
This test provides a basis for evaluating the simulator capability to perform over a typical
training period and to verify its correct operation of the simulator. A type rated Instructor Pilot
O
nominated by the Chief Pilot normally conducts this test.
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 5
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
8.2.4 Minimum Serviceability Requirements
Minimum serviceability for conducting simulator training must not adversely affect training

TE
and/or checking.
PAS shall require minimum serviceability requirements include any major malfunction such as

IN
simulator motion, visual systems, instrumentation that may affect the session plan even in
training and/or examination. Less important malfunction will be judged by the instructor to

PR
continue or terminate the training.
Minimum serviceability for conducting simulator training must not adversely affect training
and\or examination.

IF
Simulator training shall not be conducted if one of the following items unserviceable:
Fire escape Route.

PY

 Vision (Forward or Side).
 Motion (Full Flight Simulator Only).
 Reliable Communication.
O
 Oxygen System.
C
 Instructor Seat.
 Instructor Panel (Any failure affecting training Syllabus).
 Flight Controls.
D

 Environmental & Weather Condition required by the training syllabus to be set for
E

training purposes.
 Any system failure affecting simulator efficiency and training objective shall not be
LL

accepted by the Instructor.

 Any other simulator MEL item.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 6
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
8.3 Comparison of Simulator Level by Different Regularity.
Each regularity authority uses a different grading system in evaluating simulators, for example:

TE
Authority FAA / JAA British CAA

IN
Level Level C Level 3
Level Level D Level 4

PR
8.4 PAS requirements to approve a Flight Simulator for training.
The Instructor Pilot / Check Airman shall conduct the tests and complete the forms of the

IF
function listed in Appendix A of this Chapter.
The simulator shall be evaluated in the following general areas:

and instructor's stations.

2. Longitudinal and lateral directional response.PY
1. Function check of all switches, indications, systems and equipment at all crewmember
O
3. Performance evaluation of Take-off, Climb, Cruze, Descent, Approach and Landing.
4. All Weather Operations.
C

5. Proper operation and responses of the motion and visibility systems.

E D

8.5 ECAA Requirements to Approve Flight Simulator

8.5.1
LL

The simulator approval certificate by the local and or other civil aviation authorities normally
contains all types of training and checking approved that can be conducted.
O
TR

8.5.2
A copy of the simulator approval by the concerned civil aviation authority shall be submitted
with the simulator approval application form to the ECAA.
N

8.5.3
O

PAS shall designate experienced instructors to evaluate the technical status of the simulator
C

periodically to ensure compliance with required qualification and performance standards.

N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 7
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
Intentionally Left Blank
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 8
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

Appendix A

D
TE
I.P. Name: ………………………………… Signature: ……………………….

A/C Type: Engines:

IN
Sim. Type: Serial No.

PR
Sim. Level: Original Approval:
Validation from: To: Location:

IF
ITEM NA S US NOTES

PY
1. FUNCTIONS AND MANOEUVERS
a. Preparation for flight.
Pre-flight – Accomplish a function check of all □ □ □
O
switches, indicators, systems and equipment at all
crewmember's and instructor's stations and determine
C

that the flight check design and functions are identical

to that of the aircraft simulated.
E D

b. Surface Operations (Pre-Take-Off).

1. Engine start.
LL

 Normal start. □ □ □
 Alternate start procedures.
 Abnormal starts and shutdowns (Hot start, hung
O

start,)
2. Pushback / power back.
TR

3. Taxi.
 Thrust response.
 Power lever friction.
N

 Ground handling.
O

 Nose-wheel scuffing.
 Brake operation (normal / alternate /
C

emergency).
 Others.
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 9
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
TE
I.P. Name: ………………………………… Signature: ……………………….

IN
ITEM NA S US NOTES

PR
c.Take-off.
1.Normal take-off.
 Parameter relationships. □ □ □
 Acceleration characteristics.

IF
 Nose-wheel and rudder steering.
 Cross-wind (max. demonstrated).

PY
 Special performance.
 Instrument take-off.
□ □ □
 Landing gear, wing flap, leading edge device
O
operation.
 Others.
C

2.Abnormal / Emergency.
D

 Rejected take-off.
 Rejected Special performance.
E

 With Engine failure at most critical point along

take-off path (continued take-off).
LL

 With Windshear.
 Flight control system failure modes.
O

 Others.
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 10
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
I.P. Name: ………………………………… Signature: ……………………….

TE
IN
ITEM NA S US NOTES
d. In-Flight Operation.

PR
1. Climb.
 Normal. □ □ □
 One engine inoperative.
 Others.

IF
2. Cruise.
 Performance characteristics.

PY
 (Speed vs. Power)
□ □ □
 Turns with / without spoilers.
 (Speed brake deployed).
High altitude handling.
O

 High speed handling.
C
 Mach speed, over speed warning.
 Normal and steep turn.
 Performance turns.
D

 Approach to stalls, stall warning, buffet and G-

E

load (cruise, take-off, approach and landing

configuration).
LL

 High angle of attack maneuvers (cruise, take-

off, approach and landing configuration). □ □ □
O

 In-flight engine shutdown and restart.

 Maneuvering with one engine inoperative.
TR

 Specific flight characteristics.

 Manual flight control reversion.
 Flight control system failure modes.
N

 Others
3. Descent.
O

 Normal.
 Maximum rate.
C

 Manual flight control reversion.

N

 Flight control system failure modes.

 Others.
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 11
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
I.P. Name: ………………………………… Signature: ……………………….

TE
IN
ITEM NA S US NOTES
d. Approaches.

PR
1. Non- precision approach and landing
procedures. □ □ □
 NDB.
 VOR, RNAV.

IF
 DME ARC.
 ILS / LOC.

PY
 Direction finding facility.
 Surveillance radar.
I. Maneuver with all engines operating.
II. Landing gear, operation of flaps and speed
O
brake.
C
III. One engine inoperative.
IV. Missed approach procedures. □ □ □
V. (All engines operating).
D

2. Precision approach and landing procedures.

E

A. PAR.
B. ILS.
LL

 Normal.
 Engine inoperative.
O

 CAT I published approach.

Manually controlled with and without flight director to
TR

100 Ft below CAT I minima.

□ □ □
With cross-wind (max. demonstrated).
With wind-shear (CAT I published approach).
N

With generator failure.

O

With 10 kt tail wind.

With 10 kt cross wind.
C

One engine inoperative.

N

3. Visual approach and landing.

 Abnormal wing flaps / slats.
U

 Without glide slope guidance.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 12
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
I.P. Name: ………………………………… Signature : ……………………….

TE
IN
ITEM NA S US NOTES
e. Visual segment and landing.

PR
1. Normal.
 Cross-wind (max. demonstrated).
 From VFR traffic pattern. □ □ □
 From non-precision approach.

IF
Note: Simulator with visual systems which permit
completing a circling approach with applicable

PY
regulations may be approved for that particular circling
approach procedure.
O
2. Ab-normal / Emergency.
 Engine inoperative.
C
 Rejected.
 With wind shear.
With stand by (minimum) electrical / hydraulic power.
D

□ □ □
 With longitudinal trim malfunction.
E

 With lateral – directional trim malfunction.

LL

With loss of flight control power (manual reversion).

Other flight control system failure modes as dictated
O

by the training program.

TR

 Other.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 13
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
TE
I.P. Name: ………………………………… Signature : ……………………….

IN
ITEM NA S US NOTES

PR
f. Ground Operations (post landing).

IF
1. Landing roll and taxi.
 Spoiler operation. □ □ □
 Reverse thrust operation.

PY
 Directional control and ground handling, both
with and without reverse thrust.
 Brake and anti-skid operation with dry, wet and
O
icy conditions.
 Brake operation.
C
 Other.
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 14
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
I.P. Name: ………………………………… Signature : ……………………….

TE
IN
ITEM NA S US NOTES
g. Any Flight Phase.

PR
1. Aircraft and power plant systems
operation. □ □ □
 Air conditioning.
 Anti-icing / de-icing.

IF
 APU.
 Communication.
 Electrical.



Fire detection and suppression.
Flaps.
Flight control.
PY □ □
O
 Fuel and oil.
 Hydraulic.
C

 Landing gear.
 Oxygen.
D

 Pneumatic. □ □ □
Power plant.
E


 Pressurization.
LL

 Flight management system.

O

2. Flight management and guidance □ □ □

system.
TR

 Airborne radar.
 Automatic landing aids.
 Autopilot. □ □ □
N

 Collision avoidance systems.

 Flight control computers.
O

 Flight display systems.

 GPWS.
C

 Navigation systems.
Stall warning / protections.
N


 Stability and control augmentation.
U

 Wind shear avoidance equipment.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 15
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
TE
3. Airborne procedures.
 Holding.
 Wind shear.

IN
PR
4. Engine shutdown and parking.
 Engine and systems operation.
 Parking brake operation.

IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 16
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
I.P. Name: ………………………………… Signature : ……………………….

TE
IN
ITEM NA S US NOTES

PR
2. VISUAL SYSTEM.
□ □ □
a. Accurate portrayal of environment relating to
simulator attitude.

IF
b. The distance at which runway features are

PY
visible should be less than those listed below.
Distance are measured from runway on an □ □ □
extended 3-degree glide slope.
O
 Runway definition, strobe lights, approach □ □ □
lights, while runway edge lights VASI from 8 □ □ □
C
km (5 sm) of the runway threshold.
□ □ □
 Runway center line lights and taxiway
D

definition from 5 km (3 sm).

 Threshold lights and touchdown zone lights
E

from 3 km (2 sm).
 Runway marking within range of landing lights
LL

from night scenes; as required by 3 arc-minute

resolution on day scenes.
O

c. Representative aerodrome scene content

TR

including : □ □ □
I. Aerodrome runways and taxiways.
II. Runway definition : □ □ □
N

 Runway surface and markings.

O

 Lights for the runway in use including runway

edge and center line lighting, touchdown zone,
C

VASI and approach lighting of appropriate

colors.
N

 Taxiway lights.
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 17
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
TE
I.P Name : ……………………… Signature: ………………………..

IN
ITEM NA S US NOTES

PR
d. Operational landing lights □ □ □

IF
e. instructor controls of:
 Cloud base.
visibility in kilometers/ statute miles and □

PY
□ □
□
RVR in meters/feet aerodrome selection. □ □
 Aerodrome lighting.
O
Visual system compatibility with
□ □ □
C

Aerodynamic programming.
D

f. Visual cues to assess sink rates and depth

Perception during landings. □ □ □
E

Surfaces on taxiways and ramps. □ □ □

LL

Terrain features.
O

□ □ □
g. Dusk and night visual scan capability
TR

h. Minimum of three specific aerodrome

scenes. □ □ □
N

 Surfaces on runways, taxiways and □ □ □

ramps.
O
C

 Lighting appropriate color for all □ □ □

runways edge, centre line, VASI and □ □ □
N

approach lighting for the runway in use.

 Aerodrome taxing lighting.
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 18
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

Ramps and terminal buildings which

D
Correspond to specific line oriented flight

TE
Training (LOFT) and line oriented

IN
Simulator (LOS) scenarios.

PR
IF
I.P Name : ……………………… Signature : ………………………..

ITEM PY
NA S US NOTES
O
C
i. General terrain characteristics and
significant □ □ □
landmarks
E D

j. At and below altitude of 610m (2000 ft)

LL

height above the aerodrome and within a

radius of 16 km ( 10 sm) from the
aerodrome, weather representations, □
O

□ □
including the following: □
□ □
 Variable cloud density. □
TR

□ □
 Partial observation of ground scenes, □
 The effect of a scattered to broken cloud □ □
□
deck. □ □
N

 Gradual break out / patchy fog.

O

 Effect of fog on aerodrome lighting.

C
N

k. Capabilities of present ground and air

hazards such as another aircraft crossing □ □ □
U

the active runway or converging airdrome

traffic.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 19
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
l. Operational visual scenes which portray

TE
representative physical relationships
known to cause landing illusions, such as □ □ □
short runways, landing approaches over

IN
water, uphill or downhill runways, rising
terrain on the approach path and unique

PR
topographic features.

IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 20
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
TE
I.P Name : ……………………… Signature: ………………………..

IN
PR
ITEM NA S US NOTES
m. Special weather representations which
include the sound, visual and motion effects of
□ □ □

IF
entering light, medium and heavy precipitation
near a thunderstorm on take – off, approach
(10 sm.) From the aerodrome.
PY
O
n. Wet and snow-covered runways
including □ □ □
C

runway lighting reflections for wet, partially

D

obscured lights for snow of suitable alternative

effects.
E
LL

o. Realistic color and directionality of □ □ □

O

aerodrome lighting.
TR

p. Weather radar presentations in aero

planes □ □ □
N

where radar information is presented on the

O

pilot's navigation instruments. Radar returns

should correlate to the visual scene.
C
N

Freedom from apparent quantization

□ □ □
U

(Aliasing).

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 21
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
I.P. Name: ………………………………… Signature : ……………………….

TE
IN
ITEM NA S US NOTES
3. SECIAL EFFECTS.

PR
a. Runway rumble, aloe deflections, effects of □ □ □
ground speed and uneven runway characteristics.

IF
b. Buffets on the ground due to spoiler / speed brake □ □ □
extension and thrust reversal.
c. Bumps after lift-off of nose and main gear. □ □ □

gear.
PY
d. Buffet during extension and retraction of landing □ □ □
O
e. Buffet in the air due to flap and spoiler / speed □ □ □
C
brake extension and approach to stall buffet.
f. Touchdown cues for main and nose gear. □ □ □
D

g. Nose wheel scuffing. □ □ □

E
LL

h. Thrust effect with breaks set. □ □ □

O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 22
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
TE
I.P. Name: ……………………………… Signature : ……………………….

IN
ITEM NA S US NOTES

PR
i. Mach buffet. □ □ □

j. Representative brake and tire failure dynamics

(including anti-skid) and decreased brake

IF
□ □ □
efficiency due to high brake temperatures based
on aircraft related data. These representations

PY
should be realistic enough to cause pilot
identification of the problem and
implementation of appropriate procedures.
O
Simulator pitch, side loading and directional
control characteristics should be representative
C
of the aircraft.
k. Sound of precipitation and significant aircraft
D

noises perceptible to the pilot during normal

operations and the sound of crash when the
E

simulator is landed in excess of landing gear □ □ □

LL

limitations. Significant aircraft noises should

include noises such as engine, flap, gear and
spoiler extension and retraction and thrust
O

reversal to a comparable level as that found in

aircraft. The sound of crash should be related in
TR

some logical manner to landing in an unusual

attitude or in excess of the aircraft limitations.
l. Effect of airframe icing □ □ □
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 23
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
Appendix B

TE
The following Table is the functional description of different Simulator Levels:
(Table – 1)

IN
Simulator levels, characteristics and components

PR
Level A Level B

1) Systems representations, switches, and 1) Systems representations, switches and

controls which are required by the type controls which are required by the type

IF
design of the aircraft and by the user’s design of the aircraft and by the user's
approved training program. approved training program.
2) System which respond appropriately and 2) Systems which respond appropriately and
accurately to the switches and controls of
the aircraft being simulated.
3) Full-scale replica of the cockpit of the
PY accurately to the switches and controls of the
aircraft being simulated.
3) Full-scale replica of the cockpit of the
O
aircraft being simulated. aircraft being simulated.
C
4) Correct simulation of the aerodynamic 4) Correct simulation of the aerodynamic
characteristics of the aircraft being (including ground effect) and ground
simulated. dynamic characteristics of the aircraft being
D

5) Correct simulation of the effects of simulated.

E

selected environmental conditions which 5) Correct simulation of the effects of selected

the simulated aircraft might encounter. environmental conditions which the
LL

6) Control forces and travel which simulated aircraft might encounter.

Correspond to the aircraft. 6) Control forces and travel which
O

7) Instructor controls and seat. Correspond to the aircraft

8) At least a night visual system with the 7) Instructor controls and seat.
TR

minimum of 45 horizontal by 30 vertical 8) At least a night visual system with the

field of view for each pilot station. minimum of 45 horizontal by 30 vertical
field of view for each pilot station.
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 8
OM Part D Page: 24
Training Manual Simulator
Simulator Evaluation Policy Evaluation

D
(Table – 2)

TE
Simulator levels, characteristics and components
Level C Level D

IN
1) Systems representations, switches, and 1) Systems representations, switches and
controls which are required by the type controls which are required by the type

PR
design of the aircraft and by the user's design of the aircraft and by the user's
approved training program. approved training program.
2) System which respond appropriately and 2) Systems which respond appropriately
accurately to the switches and controls of and accurately to the switches and

IF
the aircraft being simulated. controls of the aircraft being simulated.
3) Full-scale replica of the cockpit of the 3) Full-scale replica of the cockpit of the
aircraft being simulated. aircraft being simulated.

PY
4) Correct simulation of the aerodynamic 4) Correct simulation of the aerodynamic
including ground effect and ground including ground effect and ground
dynamic characteristics of the aircraft dynamic characteristics of the aircraft
O
being simulated. being simulated.
5) Correct simulation of the effects of selected 5) Correct simulation of the selected
C

environmental conditions which the environmentally affected aerodynamic

simulated aircraft might encounter. and ground dynamic characteristics of
D

6) Control forces and travel which Correspond the aircraft being simulated considering
to the aircraft. the full range of its flight envelope in all
E

7) Instructor controls and seat. approved configurations.

LL

6) Correct simulation of the effects of

selected environmental conditions which
the simulated aircraft might encounter.
O

7) Control forces, dynamics and travel

which correspond to the aircraft.
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 9
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual AVIATION
AVIATION BASIC COURSE BASIC COURSE

D
CHAPTER 9 AVIATION BASIC COURSE .......................................................................... 2

TE
9.1. Objective ............................................................................................................................. 2
9.2. Location ............................................................................................................................... 2
9.3. Course Documents .............................................................................................................. 2

IN
9.4. Training Media / Aids ......................................................................................................... 2
9.5. Ground Training .................................................................................................................. 3

PR
9.5.1. Course Layout (description) ......................................................................................... 9
9.5.2. Basic Indoctrination ...................................................................................................... 4
9.5.2.1. Objective ............................................................................................................... 4

IF
9.5.2.2. Course Outline ...................................................................................................... 4
9.5.2.3. Programmed Hours ............................................................................................... 7
9.5.3. Tailored Basic Indoctrination Course For Re-qualification Training ........................... 7

PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 9
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual AVIATION
AVIATION BASIC COURSE BASIC COURSE

D
CHAPTER 9 AVIATION BASIC COURSE
9.1. Objective

TE
The objectives of this course are:
a) To gradually upgrade the new hire pilot’s knowledge from flying slow light and low

IN
altitude aircraft to a heavy jet aircraft.
b) To prepare new hire pilots to understand and implement the standard operating

PR
procedures required by PAS.
c) To help ease the transition for pilots with x-Airforce experience to civil Aviation.

IF
9.2. Location
PY
O
Training will be conducted at PAS approved classroom or approved training center
C
9.3. Course Documents
a) PAS AVIATION BASIC COURSE
D

b) Flight Operation Manual (OM-A).

c) FCOM
E

d) JEPPESEN route manual.

LL

e) ECARs (Egyptian Civil Aviation Regulations).

f) SOP (Standard Operating Procedures).
O

9.4. Training Media / Aids

TR

a) Slides show
b) Video films
c) Data show.
N

d) Computer based training aids.

O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 9
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual AVIATION
AVIATION BASIC COURSE BASIC COURSE

D
9.5. Ground Training

TE
(6 Weeks – 30 Working days – 180 hours)
9.5.1. Course Layout (description)

IN
The Aviation Basic Course covers the following topics:

PR
Section 1
a) Introduction
b) ECARs

IF
c) OM-A and SOP
d) Local and International Organization
e) Cockpit Familiarization and Checklist philosophy
f)
g)
Medical Facts
Cockpit Visit (Aircraft or Simulator) PY
O
Section 2
C

a) Jet Transport Characteristics.

b) Aircraft Systems.
D

c) Weight and Balance.

d) Performance. + Evaluation
E
LL

Section 3
a) Meteorology
O

b) JEPPESEN
c) ATC
TR

d) Instrument Rating Theoretical

e) Safety Training + Exam
f) Dangerous Goods + Exam
N

g) Flight Planning
O

h) Introduction to CRM
i) Attitude and Power Flying
C

j) Instrument Rating sessions

N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 9
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual AVIATION
AVIATION BASIC COURSE BASIC COURSE

D
9.5.2. Basic Indoctrination
9.5.2.1. Objective

TE
The objective of this course is to serve as an introduction for the new hire crewmember to
PAS and also serves as the basis for subsequent crewmember training. This training

IN
must be completed before a crewmember is assigned to line operations duties.
9.5.2.2. Course Outline

PR
a) Company orientation:
 Overview of company
 Type and scope of operations conducted. AOC & Operations Specifications Route structure.
 Company structure:

IF
 Organization Chart, Facility and Locations.

PY
b) ECARs and other applicable regulations and guidance material:
 Overview of appropriate provision of ECARs.
O
 Overview of applicable regulations of Egyptian Aviation Authority. Custom service,
Egyptian immigration Department,
C

 Egyptian Department of Agriculture.

D

c) Safety Management System

E

 PAS safety policy

 SMS fundamentals and overview
LL
O

d) Aviation Terminology
 The International Phonetic Alphabet. Abbreviations.
TR

 The 24-hour clock. Time changes.

 Ticketing. Aircraft definition. Meteorology
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 9
OM Part D Page: 5
Training Manual AVIATION
AVIATION BASIC COURSE BASIC COURSE

D
e) PAS Policies and Procedures
 PAS Operations Manual (OM) Authority of Pilot in Command.

TE
 Chain of command.
 Crew Incapacitation Emergency briefing.
Emergency exits.

IN

 Cabin Crew Stations / call name.
 Seating policy.

PR
 Passenger handling.
 Transportation of inadmissible passengers, Deportees or persons in custody.
 Permissible size and weight of hand baggage.

IF
 Securing of load in cabin.
 Special loads.
 Live animals.
 Servicing of airplanes.
1. Potable water.
2. Removal and disposal of waste.
PY
O
3. Oxygen.
C
4. Cleaning of cabin.
 Multiple occupancy of airplane seats.
D

 Smoking regulations.
 Procedures for refusal of embarkation.
E

 Ferry flights.
LL

 Positioning flights.
O

f. Duties and Responsibilities of Crewmembers.

 Pre and post flight duties.
TR

 Night flight duties.

 Special care cases duties and responsibilities.
 Tips.
N

 Customs and currency regulations.

O

 Duty free shopping.

 Handling of company material.
C

 Accident / illness.
N

 Crew hotels.
 Night stops.
U

 Crew transportation to / from the airport.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 9
OM Part D Page: 6
Training Manual AVIATION
AVIATION BASIC COURSE BASIC COURSE

D
g. Crew Regulations and Policies.
 Behavior in public. Personal documents.

TE
 Crewmember certificates.
 PAS identity card and name board.
Uniform.

IN

 Crew luggage.
 General safety and work performance Conversation.

PR
 Sleeping
 Statements to the press or external bodies.

IF
h. Flight Time Limitations.
 Applicability

PY
 Flight and duty time limitations and rest requirements Logging of pilot time
 Definitions
 General principles of control of flight, duty and rest time Limitations on single flying duty
O
periods flight crew Extension of flying duty period by in-flight relief Extension of flying
duty period by split duty
C

 Positioning
 Traveling time
D

 Aircraft commander’s discretion to extend a flying duty period.

E

 Delayed reporting time

 Rest periods
LL

 Aircraft commander's discretion to reduce a rest period Standby Duty

 Days off
O

 Accumulated duty and flying hours Cabin attendants

 Cabin attendants required Records to be maintained
TR

 Commander's discretion report- Reduction of rest periods

N

i. Crew Health Precautions:

 Alcoholic beverages. Narcotics, drugs.
O

 Medication.
C

 Immunization.
 Blood donation.
N

 Deep sea diving.

Meal precautions.
U


 Sleep and rest.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 9
OM Part D Page: 7
Training Manual AVIATION
AVIATION BASIC COURSE BASIC COURSE

D
 Surgical operation.

TE
9.5.2.3. Programmed Hours
• 40 Training hours for a newly hired crew member with no operational or airline experience.
• 20 Training hours for a newly hired crew member with past operational or airline experience.

IN
PR
9.5.3. Tailored Basic Indoctrination Course for Re-Qualification Training
a) Company Overview:
(1) Updated Company structure.

IF
(2) Updated company network and activities.
(3) Updated fleet composition.
(4) Updated administrative information

b) ECARs Highlights: PY
O
 Updated ECAR’s information
c) FOM Highlights:
C

 Updated FOM information

d) Safety Management System
D

 PAS safety policy

 SMS fundamentals and overview
E

e) Programmed hours:
LL

 20 hours.
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 9
OM Part D Page: 8
Training Manual AVIATION
AVIATION BASIC COURSE BASIC COURSE

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
Intentionally Left Blank
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 10
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual Security
SECURITY TRANINING Training

Chapter 10 Security Training ................................................................................................................. 2

10.1 Objective: .......................................................................................................................................... 2
10.4 Course Duration: Initial (3Days) 21 hrs. ........................................................................................... 2

D
10.5 Security Training............................................................................................................................... 2

TE
10.5.1 Curriculum Topics: ............................................................................................................................ 2
10.6 Course Layout for Cockpit Crew (2 DAYS) ..................................................................................... 3

IN
10.7 Course Layout for Cabin Crew (2 DAYS) ........................................................................................ 3

PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 10
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual Security
SECURITY TRANINING Training

Chapter 10 Security Training

10.1 Objective:

D
To Enable Flight Crew Members to Implement the Appropriate Security Measures and
Procedure In Accordance With the Ministry of Civil Aviation’s Security Department Program.

TE
10.2 Training Location: Ministry of Civil Aviation’s

IN
10.3 Training Aids: LECTURES.
10.4 Course Duration: Initial (3Days) 21 hrs.

PR
Recurrent (2Days) 14 hrs.
10.5 Security Training

IF
1. A company shall establish, maintain and conduct training programs to enable his crew
members to take appropriate action to prevent acts of unlawful interference.
2. These training programs should be designed to enable crew members to take action in the
PY
event of sabotage or unlawful seizure of an aircraft, and to minimize the consequences of
such events.
3. A company shall also establish and maintain a training programme to acquaint appropriate
O
employees with preventive measures and techniques in relation to passengers, baggage,
cargo, mail, equipment, stores and supplies intended for carriage on an aircraft, so that they
C

contribute to the prevention of acts of sabotage or other forms of unlawful interference.

4. These training programs should be compatible with the National Aviation Security
D

Programme.
E
LL

10.5.1 Curriculum Topics:

1. Determination of the seriousness of the occurrence;

O

2. Crew communication and coordination;

TR

3. Appropriate self-defense responses;

4. Use of non-lethal protective devices assigned to crew members for use as authorized by
the State;
N

5. Understanding the behavior of terrorists so as to facilitate the ability to cope with hijacker
behavior and passenger responses;
O

6. Situational training exercises regarding various threat conditions;

7. Flight deck procedures to protect the aircraft;
C

8. Aircraft search procedures;

N

9. As practicable, guidance on least-risk bomb locations.

U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 10
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual Security
SECURITY TRANINING Training

10.6 Course Layout for Cockpit Crew (2 DAYS)

1. Introduction to the Course.
2. Development of Counter-Measures.

D
3. Legislation and Aviation Security Programs.
4. Recognition of Prohibited Items and Devices.

TE
5. Protection of Parked Aircraft.
6. Aircraft Security Checks.
7. Organization of Response to Acts of Unlawful Interference.

IN
8. Response to Bomb Threat on the Ground.
9. Response to Bomb Threat to Aircraft in Flight.

PR
10. Response to Acts of Unlawful Seizure.
11. Terrorist behaviors.
12. Threat evaluation.

IF
10.7 Course Layout for Cabin Crew (2 DAYS)
1. Introduction to the Course. PY
2. Development of Counter-Measures.
3. Recognition of Prohibited Items and Devices.
4. Aircraft Security Checks.
O
5. Organization of Response to Acts of Unlawful Interference.
C

6. Response to Bomb Threat on the Ground.

7. Response to Bomb Threat to Aircraft in Flight.
8. Response to Acts of Unlawful Seizure.
D

9. Closing Activities.
E

10. Terrorist behaviors.

11. Threat evaluation.
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 10
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual Security
SECURITY TRANINING Training

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 1
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

Chapter 11: TRAINING FORMS

D
11.1 AREA, ROUTE AND AIRPORT QUALIFICATION FORM ....................................................... 3

TE
11.2 TRAINING / PROFICIENCY FORM .............................................................................................. 4
11.3 LINE CHECK FORM .................................................................................................................... 6

IN
11.4 IOE / USV EVALUATION / DISCUSSION ITEMS ....................................................................... 8
11.5 INSTRUCTOR RHS TRAINING FORM ........................................................................................ 10

PR
11.6 INSTRUCTOR EVALUATION ..................................................................................................... 11
11.7 FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR TRAINING RECORD............................................................................. 12
11.8 BASE FLIGHT TRAINING FORM ............................................................................................... 13

IF
11.9 ZERO FLIGHT TIME TRAINING FORM ...................................................................................... 14
11.10 AIR TRANSPORT PILOT LICENSE IDENTIFICATION ............................................................. 16
PY
11.11 INSTRUCTOR'S RECOMMENDATION ....................................................................................... 17
11.12 COMPETENCY CHECK (for dispatcher) ....................................................................................... 18
O
11.13 CABIN CREW IN FLIGHT SECTORS AND COMPETENCY CHECK ..................................... 19
C

11.14 GROUND TRAINING AND WALK AROUND (Cabin Crew) ..................................................... 20

11.15 CABIN CREW INSTRUCTOR IN-FLIGHT PROFICIENCY CHECKS ........................................ 21
ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 2
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

Introduction
This section provides the standard Forms/ Records to be used by PAS Instructors/
Check Airmen.
The forms have been developed to meet the requirements of the rules and regulations of

D
national and international authorities and also to cover all Training and Checking

TE
needs.
A detailed maneuver and procedure records shall be issued and attached with the
Training or Check form to cover all the Training and Checking requirements for each

IN
aircraft type.

PR
Forms/ Records filling instructions
(a) All training items listed in the training Records/ Forms should be checked by

IF
(S), (US) or not applicable (NA).
(b) The results of Checking shall either be SATISFACTORY or
UNSATISFACTORY, Further comments and/or recommendations shall be
PY
submitted in the detailed Confidential Report Form. The report will be then
placed in a sealed envelope and handed to the GMFT.
O
(c) Comments should be as objective as possible.
(d) Trainees must sign their Training / checking records after entering the dates of
C

last 3 landings and after the records being completed by IP/ Check Airman.
(e) The expiration date is calculated by adding 7 months to the Base Month of the
ED

current event.
Base month is: JAN - 01/99 / Current event is: P.C
LL

Expiration Date: AUG - 08/99

Next event: � Training: � Checking
O

(f) Simulator Training Flight Reports shall be completed; Flight Time and Duty
Period (DP) entered properly and signed by the flight instructor for the purpose
TR

of time logging and salary compensation.

System of Form Numbering:

N

Forms are classified in three (3) major categories:

O

• Training Forms
C

• Record Forms
N

• Check Forms
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 3
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.1 AREA, ROUTE AND AIRPORT QUALIFICATION FORM

Name Code No. Crew position

D
Capt.  F/O
Date / / Location A/C Type --------

TE
Time : Route Airports

IN
Items: Enter S : Satisfactory , US: Un Satisfactory , NA : Not Applicable

BEFORE DEPARTURE EN- ROUTE

PR
Description of Route Segments Navigation Facilities
Prevailing seasonal weather En-route communication procedures (VHF-HF)
NOTAM Briefing Terrain
License and physical Flight Level selection and Step Climb
Aircraft pre- flight inspection ATIS

IF
Flight Planning and Charts Weather Avoidance Procedures
Crew Briefing Communication Failure Procedures
Use of Checklist
MEL Requirements
PY Emergency Procedures
APPROACH AND LANDING
Fuel Calculations Landing Computations
Performance Calculations Terminal Area Procedures
O
DEPARTURE Arrival Procedures (STARS)
C

Startup Procedures Instrument Approach Procedures

Taxi out Procedures Airport physical characteristics & ground features
Clearance record and read back Holding
ED

Take-off and V speed Compliance Approach and Taxi way lighting

Departure Clearance Taxi in and Parking Procedures
Departure Procedures (SIDS) GENERAL
LL

Sterile Cockpit Procedures

Aircraft Limitations
Altitude Call Outs
O

Turbulent Penetration
Traffic Alertness
TR

Remarks
N
O
C

This is to certify that

N

Capt. / FO: ...................................................................................... Has completed his Qualification for the

Area, Route and Airport listed above.
Instructor Name Code No. Instructor’s Signature
U

Chief Pilot Name Chief Pilot’s Signature Trainee’s Signature

G.M. Flight Training

* LHS is allowed only when I.P is occupying RHS and acting as PIC.
Revision date: DEC 2015 Page 4 of 22

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 4
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.2 TRAINING / PROFICIENCY FORM Page 1 of 2

Day 1: Training For Flight Maneuvers required by ECARS 121 Appendix F (PC)
Day 2: Proficiency Check
Name Code No.

D
 Capt.  F/O  IP

TE
Simulator Owned By Location Aircraft Type Simulator Level

Time PF Time PNF Date A B C D

IN
Flight Training Time 02 : 00 02 : 00 -- / -- / 20
This form is based on ECARS 121 Appendix F.

PR
Enter ( S / U or NA) indicating Satisfactory / Unsatisfactory completion of each item or Not Applicable
PART 1: PC ORAL TEST PART 2: PC FLIGHT CHECK (cont’d)
Operational Oriented Questions INFLIGHT MANEUVERS
• Aeroplane systems • Steep turns (Min. 180° - Max. 360°)3

IF
• Aeroplane performance • Approach to stalls (Two may be waived):
• Normal and non-normal procedures1 - Take-Off configuration
• Company flight operations manual PY - Clean configuration
• Use of checklists - Landing configuration
• Wind shear Review Note: One Stall must be performed with bank angle 25°.
PART 2: PC FLIGHT CHECK
O
PRE FLIGHT AND TAXIING APPROACHES & LANDINGS
• Pre-flight and cockpit preparation • Normal Landing
C

• Engine start • From ILS

• Low Visibility Taxing (500m RVR) • Cross Wind
ED

TAKE-OFFS • Visual approaches.

• Normal • With 50% power plant failure
• Low Visibility T/O (400m RVR) • From circling approach
LL

- X- Wind with loss of visual cues at 100 Kt. • Un stabilized approach

- Rejected T.O with an engine failure beforeV 1 • GPWS (CFIT)
- With simulated engine failure at V 1 • Rejected at 50’
O

• Wind shear • Wind shear

INSTRUMENT PROCEDURES NORMAL AND ABNORMAL PROCEDURES
TR

• Area departure • Anti icing and De-icing

• Area arrival and Holding • Hydraulics , Electrical , Pneumatic
• ILS approach (Coupled) • Adverse WX, Hot & Cold WX Operation
N

• Second ILS approach (Manual) • Contaminated RWY operation

• Missed approach • Weather Avoidance
O

• Non-precision approach • Flaps, Gears

• Circling approach • Flight Controls
C

• Engine failure missed approach • NAV/ Comm. Equipment

N

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
• In-flight Fire and Smoke Control • Emergency Evacuation
U

• Decompression • TCAS
• Emergency Descent • Pilot incapacitation
• Emergency Landing (Partial L/G, No Flaps, etc...) • Volcanic Ash

1- Non-Normal Procedures: Are Abnormal, Additional, Alternate and Emergency Procedures

2- 400m RVR for category C/D aircrafts respectively.
3- One direction may be waved.
4- For Captains Only.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 5
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

TRAINING / PROFICIENCY FORM (cont’d) Page 2 of 2

This Training is PAS T.M requirement and should be covered during TRAINING DAY
RHS TRAINING FOR INSTRUCTORS RHS TRAINING FOR CAPTAINS
• Error recovery, A/C upset recovery • Normal Take Off, A/C upset recovery
- Lateral offsets • Manual ILS (CAT I minima)

D
- Vertical offsets • Minimum 3 Touch & Go
• Minimum 3 Touch and Go Non-precision approach and landing

TE
EVALUATION
Knowledge US S1 S2 S3

IN
Flight Operations Manual (FOM) and Relevant ECARs    
A/C Systems, Limitations and Performance    

PR
Normal, Non-Normal Procedures1    
PAS Operations Specifications    
Flying Skills US S1 S2 S3
   

IF
Compliance with SOP (FOM & FCOM)
Attitude flying and correct trim technique    
Use of FMS, GPS, etc.…    
Aeroplane configuration, Altitude & Speed Control PY    
Flying accuracy & Smoothness    
Management US S1 S2 S3
O
Compliance with Flight Operations Manual (FOM)    
Planning ahead and use of FMS, GPS, etc…    
C

Crew co-ordination and use of available resources    

Adherence to clearances and safe heights    
Cabin crew safety briefing    
ED

General US S
Situational awareness, Aviate, Navigate, Comm. priority  
LL

Discipline  
Comments
Note: If remedial action is required, please submit a separate report to G.M flight training.
O
TR

Base Month (Through Last Day of): License Valid (Through Last Day of): Next Event
Month Year Month Year  PC  Re-current. Training
N

Date of Last 3 T/O& Landings: 2

O

1. / / 2. / / 3. / /
Check Airman Name Code No. Ck Airman’s signature Trainee’s signature
C
N

Checking Result Inspector signature * G.M Flight Training

Previous  US S
U

Current  US S
Stamp

1- Non-Normal Procedures: Are Abnormal, Additional, Alternate and Emergency Procedures.

2- Trainee is responsible for the accuracy of this data and he must sign the form.
3- Passing grade 70% - (S1 70% - 79%) - (S2 80% - 89%) – (S3 90% and above).
* For type rating, Transition, Upgrade.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 6
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.3 LINE CHECK FORM Page 1 of 2

THE FOLLOWING ITEMS MUST BE COVERED DURING LINE CHECK

() Indicates that item has been checked
1. FLIGHT CHECK DESCENT AND APPROACH

D
PRE FLIGHT • ATIS

TE
Dispatch • Descent planning
Reporting for duty • Approach briefing
Inspection on Personal License for currency • Approaches:

IN
Computerized and ATC flight plan  Precision  N. precision  Visual
Weather briefing, T.O and landing min. • Destination and alternate weather minima

PR
Alternate planning Wx min LANDING AND TAXI IN
Operations Specifications* • Landing technique
NOTAM briefing • Use of brakes and reverse thrust
Cabin crew safety briefing • After landing and Taxi in procedures **

IF
Cockpit 2. KNOWLEDGE CHECK**
Tech. log, B snags& Effect on T.O/LDG **
performance
A) Flight Operations Manual
Aircraft library and documentation
PY
• IOE, USV and Command Responsibility **
Cockpit preparation- (FMS/ GPS) • Navigation Bag contents
Take-off briefing • The difference between planning and actual
O
Load Sheet Weather min. and Wx min. for new Captain. **
 Cold Wx operation*  Hot Wx operation* • Fuel policy
C

T.O Performance, T.O speeds and C.G • Wind shear, Thunderstorms and Turbulence
Engine start procedures • Fuelling with PAX on board
ED

TAXI ,TAKE-OFF AND INITIAL CLIMB • Dangerous goods

Push back procedures • Shoulder harness, seat belt policy and cockpit door
Taxi Speed and braking technique ** • First Officer T.O. and Landing
T.O roll and V1 Concept • ECAR 121
LL

Noise abatement procedure and Initial climb • Flight Operations Manual Questions & Answers
Best angle, Best rate and turbulence speeds B) Aircraft Performance and Technical Knowledge
O

Area departure, SID and holding • Operational system knowledge & Limitations
CRUISE • T.O performance limits
TR

FL selection, and Maneuver capability • Wet and contaminated runways

Opt. Alt, Specific Range, Cruise speed schedule • Approach and Landing climb performance
Step climb and fuel saving • Normal, Non-normal and emergency procedures
N

Use of weather radar and weather avoidance • Flight patterns

MORA C) Safety Procedures
O

Drift down procedure • Communication between cockpit and cabin

En-route alternate and Emergency Proc.* • Emergency evacuation procedures
C

Calculation of weather minima (Dest. & Alternate) • Prepared/Unprepared emergency

N

Minimum fuel for diversion (Alternate +Holding) • Bomb on board and least risk location
Communication failure procedures • Crew incapacitation
U

* If Applicable.
** May be conducted during cruise portion or any time after the completion of the flight.
• Non-Normal Procedures: Are Abnormal, Additional, Alternate and Emergency Procedures.
** For captains only

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 7
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

LINE CHECK FORM (Cont’d) Page 2 of 2

Name : Code No.  Capt.  F/O  IP

A/C Type Date

D
-- / -- / 20
Final Line Check  Annual Line Check **

TE
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

Knowledge US S1 S2 S3

IN
Flight Operations Manual (FOM)& Relevant ECARs    

PR
A/C Systems, Limitations and Performance    
Normal Procedures    
Non-normal Procedures*    

IF
Flying Skills US S1 S2 S3

Compliance with SOP (FOM & FCOM)

PY    
Attitude flying and correct trim technique    
Use of FMS, GPS, etc…….    
O
Aeroplane configuration, Altitude. & Speed Control    
Flying accuracy & Smoothness    
C

Management US S1 S2 S3
ED

Compliance with Flight Operations Manual (FOM)    

Planning ahead and use of FMS, GPS, etc……    
LL

Crew coordination and use of available resources    

Adherence to clearances and safe heights    
O

Situational awareness    
Comments
TR
N
O

Check Airman Name: Check Airman’s signature Code No:

C

Trainee Name : Trainee’s signature Code No:

N

Chief Pilot Name : Chief Pilot’s Signature

U

Check Result G.M Flight Training

 Satisfactory  Unsatisfactory

1. Non-Normal Procedures: Are Abnormal, Additional, Alternate and Emergency Procedures.

2. Trainee is responsible for the accuracy of this data and he must sign the form.
3. Passing grade 70% - (S1 70% - 79%) - (S2 80% - 89%) – (S3 90% and above).
* For type rating, Transition, Upgrade.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 8
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

INSTRUCTOR FLT. No.

PILOT ROUTE

DATE A/C TYPE: ---------- Reg. SU-CB

11.4 IOE / USV

D
EVALUATION / DISCUSSION ITEMS

TE
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS MUST BE COVERED DURING IOE AND USV
INSTRUCTOR /S SHOULD SIGN IN FRONT OF EACH COVERD ITEM
PRE- FLIGHT Sign DESCENT AND APPROACH Sign

IN
1. Dispatch • ATIS

PR
• Computerized and ATC flight plan • Descent planning
• Weather briefing, T.O. and landing min. • Approach briefing and Stars
• Alternate planning Wx min • Approaches:
• Operations Specifications*  Precision  N. precision  Visual

IF
• NOTAM briefing and “B” snags • Destination and alternate weather minima
• Cabin crew safety briefing LANDING AND TAXI IN
2. Cockpit PY • Landing technique
• Technical log and B snags ** • Use of brakes and reverse thrust
• MEL-CDL and the effect on T.O/Landing • After landing and Taxi in procedures **
• Aircraft Performance DISCUSSION ITEMS
O
• Aircraft library and documentation A) Flight operations manual
• Cockpit preparation (FMS/GPS) • IOE, USV & Command Responsibility **
C

• Take-off briefing • Navigation bag content

• Load Sheet • The difference between planning and actual
ED

• Hot Wx operation* Weather min. and Wx min. for new Captain. **

• T.O Performance, T.O speeds and C.G • Fuel policy
• Engine start procedures • Wind shear, thunderstorms and turbulence
LL

TAXI, TAKE-OFF AND INITIAL CLIMB • Fuelling with PAX on board

• Push back procedures • Dangerous goods
• Taxi Speed and braking technique • Shoulder harness, seat belt policy & cockpit door
O

• T.O roll and V1 Concept • First Officer T.O. and Landing

• Noise abatement procedure and Initial climb • ECAR 121
TR

• Best angle, best rate and turbulence speeds • Flight operations manual Questions & Answers
• Area departure, SID and holding B) Aircraft performance and technical knowledge
CRUISE • Operational system knowledge
N

• Flight level selection, specific range & OPT. ALT • T.O performance limits
O

• Step climb and fuel saving • Approach and Landing climb performance
• Maneuvers capability • Normal, Non- normal & emergency procedures
C

• Use of weather radar and weather avoidance • Flight patterns

• MORA C) Safety Procedures
N

• Drift down procedure • Communication between cockpit and cabin

U

• En-route alternate and Emergency Proc.* • Emergency evacuation procedures

• Alternate weather minima • Prepared/Unprepared emergency
• Minimum fuel for diversion (Alternate + Holding) • Bomb on board and least risk location
• Communication failure procedures • Crew incapacitation

*If Applicable
** For captains only

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 9
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

IOE / USV
EVALUATION / DISCUSSION ITEMS (Cont’d)
Comments

D
TE
IN
PR
Instructor Signature

IF
PY
O
C

Instructor Signature
ED
LL
O
TR

Instructor Signature

This is to certify that all applicable flight training and discussion items on this form have been completed and
N

trainee is Ready For final line check and company oral.

O

Trainee Name Trainee’s signature Code No

C

Chief Pilot Name Chief Pilot’s Signature

N

G.M Flight Training

U

• Non-normal Procedures: Are Abnormal, Additional, Alternate and Emergency Procedures

IOE : Initial Operating Experience
RHS : Right Hand Seat (Two sectors: One PF-One PNF)
USV : Under Supervision

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 10
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.5 INSTRUCTOR RHS TRAINING FORM

Name|: Code No. Location: Date:

A/C Type: A/C Registration: SIM. Level

D
---------- SU- CB C D
Training Flight Time* R/W GA TG FS

TE
Device Hours Minutes
SIM

IN
A/C
Trainee Instructor in RHS - Training Instructor in LHS

PR
Enter () indicating completion of each item.
(×) indicates that A/C cannot be use for this item
A. RHS Proficiency (PF: RHS) SIM A/C B. Error Recovery (PF: LHS) - (Cont’d) SIM A/C
1. Take-off X Approach X

IF
2. ILS / Visual X 1. Over controlling in down wind and during approach X
3. Full Stop Landing X 2. Single engine approach X
4. Take-off Visibility 400 m, Cloud Base 100 ft XPY 3. Single engine Go Around from flare height X
5. Engine Failure after V1 X Final approach X
6. Radar Vectors Single engine ILS - Full Stop X 1. Lateral offset X
Landing X 2. Vertical offset X
7. FL 350 - Emergency descent X 3. Cross wind correction X
O
8. Take-Off - Climb to FL 100 (Steep Turn & Stall) X Flare X
9. Flight Controls Malfunction ( Type Specific ) X 1. High flare and long float X
C

10. Full Stop Landing X 2. No flare X

11.Take-off Visual circuit (500 ft) X 3. Single engine high flare and Go Around X
X X
ED

12.Touch and Go 4. Misuse of rudder causing roll during flare

13.Repeat as required X 5. Over control in roll during flare X
B. Error Recovery (PF: LHS) Touch and Go / Landings
Take-off X 1. T/G landings followed by low level circuits
LL

1. Creeping throttles during take-off X (500’ AGL)

2. Wrong application of rudder during cross- wind X 2. T/G briefing in down wind
3. Wrong application of rudder during engine X ( NO Brakes, NO Speed brake, NO Reverse)
O

failure 3. T/G briefing in final approach

(NO Brakes, NO Speed brake, NO Reverse)
TR

4. After landing commands

Stand power ,Center line ,Open power, Rotate
5. Full stop landing
3 Engines ferry* X
N

Remarks
O
C

Name: Code No: Signature:

N
U

 IP  CP
Training Result: Trainee’s Signature: G.M Flight Training:

S  US

* PF FLIGHT TIME
* * NOTE: TOTAL 4 HRS AS PF

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 11
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.6 INSTRUCTOR EVALUATION

Name: Code No. Crew position Date:
 IP  CP
A/C Type: Simulator Owned By: Simulator Level Location:
A B C D

D
*FLT : From : to : Total hours :
Enter: S Satisfactory US Unsatisfactory NA Not Applicable

TE
Knowledge Comments
• A/C Systems, Performance and limitations
• General Aeronautical knowledge

IN
• Relevant ECAR’s
• Operations Specifications

PR
• Operations Manual SOP
Briefing
• Covering all briefing items
• Instructor Skills

IF
- Asking questions
- Using illustrations and examples
- Listing skill
- Using and training aids
PY
• Instructor trainee relation
O
Simulator session
• Time management during simulator session
C

• Proper use of Reposition and freeze function

• Proper use of Line Oriented Simulation (LOS) during PC
ED

• Use of Line Oriented Flight Training (LOFT) during

re-current training
• Demonstration
LL

Debriefing
• Accurate record of debriefing items
• Complete debriefing for all items
O

• Instructor Skills
TR

- Asking questions
- Using illustrations and examples
- Listing skill
- Using and training aids
N

Demonstration and Error Recovery*

O

• Engine failure during Take-off

• One engine ILS approach and go around
C

• One engine VOR approach and landing

N

• Error recovery (Minimum 3 landings)

General Comment
U

Name: Code No. Signature:

IP CP
Trainee signature Inspector Signature G.M Flight training

* To be filled when performed on A/C

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 12
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.7 FLIGHT INSTRUCTOR TRAINING RECORD

Name License no. Code No. A/C Type

D
Flying Hours Total Command on Type Total Command Grand Total

TE
Signature signifying
Ground Training Hours Completion Location Instructor Name/ satisfactory
date Code No. completion

IN
Instructor skills and
technique course 00:00

PR
Flight Operations /
Flight training manual 00:00
ECARs
OPS. Specifications 00:00
Evaluation Techniques

IF
00:00
Signature signifying
Flight Training Hours Completion Location
PY Instructor Name/ satisfactory
date Code No. completion

Observation simulator
O
RHS SIM. Training. 02:00

Simulator Instructors
C

USV SIM. Training

 Init.  Rec. :
ED

Aircraft Instructors
USV Aircraft Base
Training1 :
LL

This is to certify that the above pilot has completed all the training requirements in accordance with PAS
approved training manual for:
O

 Initial  Re-qualification  Recurrent

TR

and he is qualified to act as :

 IP Simulator  IP Aircraft  IP Simulator & Aircraft

N

The crew he trained: Capt./F.O ………………………………………………….  NA

O

Capt./F.O ………………………………………………….  NA
C
N

M. Flight training
U

1 SIM level C or D can be used.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 13
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.8 BASE FLIGHT TRAINING FORM

Name Code No. Crew position
 Captain F/O
A/C Type- A/C Registration SIM Level (ZFT) Location Date

D
C D --/---/20
R/W GA TG FS Weather

TE
Hours Minutes
Flight Time

IN
FLIGHT MANEUVERS

PR
SIM A/C SIM A/C
• Exterior inspection* X • Visual Approach (ILS Supported)- T/Go X

IF
• Cockpit preparation X • Visual Approach (No ILS)- T/Go X
• Engines Start X • Visual Approach (ILS Supported)- T/Go
• Taxi X •PY Visual Approach - No ILS -No/ATH -T/Go
• Flex / Reduced Thrust Take-off X • Simulated Engine Failure after Take Off
• ILS Pattern X • One Engine Out Visual Approach
• Automatic Approach X • Engine(S) out Landing
O
C

Remarks :
ED
LL
O
TR
N

This is to certify that :

 Captain  F/O ----------------------------------------------------- is ready for A/C type rating Base check.
O

Name: Signature:
C

 IP CP  IP  CP
N

Code No. Trainee’s signature

U

ECAA Notified Inspector Name M. Flight Training

Y N
* Can be performed by using pictorial presentation.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 14
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.9 Zero Flight Time Training (ZFTT)

RWY RH LH
Time VISUAL COND. WIND Observations pattern pattern A/THR
Head wind

D
Day Dry 10kt TOW=MLW CM 1 CM 2
TAXI - NORMAL - 90 degree ONTO RWY
1

TE
TAXI - 180 degree ON RWY
2
TAXI - 180 degree BACK TRACK
3

IN
4 TAKE-OFF
5 VISUAL CIRCUIT - ILS assisted - TOUCH and GO ON

PR
VISUAL CIRCUIT -NON ILS assisted - TOUCH and
6 GO ON
7 VISUAL CIRCUIT -NON ILS assisted OFF

IF
Left X wind
Day Dry 15kt PY TOW=MLW CM 1 CM 2
8 TAKE-OFF
9 VISUAL CIRCUIT -NON ILS assisted OFF
O
Tail wind Very Light
Day Dry 10kt Weight CM 1 CM 2
C

10 TAKE-OFF
11 VISUAL CIRCUIT -NON ILS assisted ON ON
ED

LOW LEVEL GO-AROUND (not below 50ft) Due

12 Blocked RWY
13 VISUAL CIRCUIT -NON ILS assisted OFF
LL

Right X wind
O

15kt
Day Dry Gust 25kt with TOW=MLW CM 1 CM 2
TR

Wind Shear alert

Turbulence 25%
14 TAKE-OFF
N

15 VISUAL CIRCUIT -NON ILS assisted OFF OFF

16 LANDING in configuration 3
O
C

Tail wind
Dusk Wet 10kt MTOW CM 1 ONLY
N

17 TAKE-OFF
18 ENGINE FLAME OUT 15kt. BELOW V1
U

19 REJECTED TAKE-OFF

CRJ (SIM Base Training)

(4 hours session – 2 hours per pilot)

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 15
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.9.1 Zero Flight Time Training (ZFTT) Back Page

Name : Code No.

A/C Type: CRJ Date: -- / -- / 20

D
EVALUATION

TE
ITEM US S1 S2 S3
1- T/O rotation technique

IN
2- T/O attitude
3- Scan flow

PR
4- Power & attitude flying
5- Landing technique

IF
6- Flare technique
7- Landing on R/W center line PY
8- Landing in 1000ft touch down zone
9- Single ENG rotation technique
O
10- Single ENG landing technique
C

11- Single ENG flare technique

12- Single ENG landing in 1000ft touch down zone
ED

Comments:
LL
O
TR

Trainee Name : Trainee’s signature Code No:

N
O

Check Airman Name: Ck. Airman’s signature Code No:

C

Inspector Name : Inspector’s Signature

N
U

Check Result Operations G.M

o Satisfactory o Unsatisfactory

Note:
1. A total of 3 manual controlled landing must be conducted in normal landing configuration without ILS
reference.
2. One engine out landing must be conducted during Zero Flight Time Check.
Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 16
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.10 AIR TRANSPORT PILOT LICENSE IDENTIFICATION

Name: Date of Birth
---/---/20
Address: Telephone: Nationality

D
Type and Number of Pilot License Date and Class of Medical Employed by Applying for
CPL PAS  ATP

TE
Type Rating
Total Flight Time
XC Flight Time

IN
Night Flight Time

PR
Instrument Flight Time
PIC Flight Time

IF
SIC Performing PIC Duties USV Flight Time
PIC XC Flight Time
PIC Night Flight Time
PY
Applicant’s Certification
O
I certify that I meet all ECAR requirements and have received all required training for the certificate and/or rating
applied for:
___________ ____________________________________________________
C

Date Signature
EXAMINER EVALUATION
ED

Date Type of Evaluation Flight Examiner's Name and

S U Signature
Time ECAA Designation Number
LL

Oral Exam
Simulator Check
O

Aircraft Flight Check N/A

TR

EXAMINER EXAMINER RECOMMENDATION TO ECAA

 ECAA  Designee Passed - Issue Certificate or Rating  Failed  Discontinued

N

Comments and/or reason for failure or discontinuance

O
C

Date: Examiner's Signature:

ECAA Designation No.
N

FOR ECAA USE ONLY

U

 Application Approved - Certificate Issued  Application Denied Reason for Denial:

__________________ ____________________ ___________________ ______________________

Date Signature Inspector’s Signature Inspector’s Name

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 17
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.11 INSTRUCTOR'S RECOMMENDATION

The named applicant has received Original issuance of: ATP  Type rating Make/Model_
all required instruction and is
qualified to take the following test: Addition of rating to:  ATP  Commercial Make/Model___________

Retake of:  ATP  Type Rating Make/Model___________

D
----------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------

TE
Date Instructor Name Signature
AIRCRAFT AND SIMULATOR INFORMATION

IN
Aircraft registration: SIM Simulator Level: A B C D

Aircraft make and model: Simulator ECAA approved: Y N

PR
Grading Legend: S-Satisfactory U-Unsatisfactory N/A-Not Applicable
PRACTICAL EXAM ATP/TYPE PRACTICAL EXAM ATP/TYPE
ORAL OR WRITTEN TEST INFLIGHT MANEUVERS A/C SIM

IF
Flight Instruments Steep Turns /
Landing Gear, Wheels Approaches to stalls /
EFIS, FMS Specific flight characteristics
PY /
Fuel Power plant failure /
Pressurization VISUAL APPROACHES /
Electrical No flap/Partial flap approach /
Power plant With 50% power plants inoperative /
O
Autopilot, F/D LANDINGS A/C SIM
Navigation Systems Normal /
C

Propeller From an ILS /

Air-conditioning Cross wind /
ED

Takeoff/Landing and cruise performance 50% power plants inoperative /

Flight Engineer station From circling approach /
Weight and Balance Rejected /
Operating limitations NORMAL, ABNORMAL AND
A/C SIM
LL

MEL EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Other Anti-icing/De-icing /
FLIGHT TEST A/C SIM Hydraulic /
O

Preflight Inspection* / N/A Flaps /

Taxiing / Control Systems /
TR

Power plant Checks / NAV/ Comm. equipment /

TAKEOFFS A/C SIM Inflight fire /
Normal / Smoke Control /
Instrument / Decompression /
N

Cross Wind / Emergency Descent /

With Power plant Failure / Emergency Landing /
O

Rejected / Evacuation /
INSTRUMENT PROCEDURES A/C SIM REMARKS
C

Area departure and arrival /

Holding /
N

ILS approach /
Autopilot coupled ILS /
U

Engine Out ILS /

Non-precision approach /
Second non-precision approach /
Circling approach /
Missed approach from an ILS /
Engine out missed approach /

* Can be performed by using pictorial presentation.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 18
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.12 COMPETENCY CHECK (Dispatcher)

Name: Operator: Date: License No.

Initial Re-current Transition Re-qualification Instructor Base Month: Month Year

Ground Program Hours: Location: Expiry Date: Month Year

D
*PART ONE : GROUND TRAINING SEGMENT
Write (S or U) indicating Satisfactory or Unsatisfactory completion of each item.

TE
A.GENERAL DISPATCH SUBJECTS C. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
• Use of comm. Systems (Norm/Emergency Proce.) Alerting Procedures
• Meteorology - Company

IN
• NOTAMS - Government
• Navigational charts & Publications. - Agencies

PR
• Dispatcher Responsibilities. D.SPECIAL OPERATIONS.
• Characteristics of special airports. • ETOPS /
• ATC coordination procedures. • RVSM
• ATC General Procedures. • RNP

IF
• FOM, FDM, Ops. Spec., ECAR. • Special Routes /
• Flight monitoring procedures. PY
• CRM E. COMPETENCY CHECKS.
• Crew Briefing. 1- Knowledge Check (Oral)
B. AIRCRAFTS TYPE • Airplane Systems
O
• A/C Systems at description level only • Airplane Performance
C

• A/C Operating & Performance characteristics • Normal, Abnormal & Emergency Procedures.
• Navigation equipment • Appropriate Provisions of AFM
• Instrument approach & Com. Equipment • Company Flight operations Manual
ED

• Emergency Equipment 2- Practical Check (Oral)

• Weight & Balance • Dispatching Actual Flight
• A/C performance computations - ETOPS FLIGHTS* /
LL

• Flight planning Procedures. - EROPS FLIGHTS* /

• MEL & CDL - Special Routes* /
• Emergency Procedures. *Practical check to include at least one item from above
O

AIRCRAFT TYPES
TR

1- 2- 3- 4- 5-
INSTRUCTOR NAME CODE No. INSTRUCTOR SIGN. DATE
A
N

B
C
O

*PART TWO : OPERATIONAL FAMILIARIZATION SEGMENT

Minimum Five (5) Hours Segment must be completed in this part and should include as applicable at least one of special operation flight.
C

Date Route Time Sectors

Today Total Today Total
N

/ /
/ /
U

/ /
Final Result: Trainee’s Signature:
Satisfactory Unsatisfactory
Flight Inspector Signature G.M Flight Training

* Enter the Date of completion under the box.

* * Part one and two to be completed by Air Operator
Comments will be attached in a separate form if required Operator Stamps

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 19
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.13 CABIN CREW IN FLIGHT SECTORS AND COMPETENCY CHECK

C/Crew Name: Code No:

D
Training Categories:
 Initial  Transition  Requalification Re-current:  24 month  12 month

TE
Sectors Flight No A/C Type Position date Instructor Name Code No.

IN
1. / /

PR
2. / /
3. / /
4. / /
5. / /

IF
6. / /
7. / /
8.
PY / /
9. / /
10. / /
O
IN-FLIGHT COMPETENCY CHECK ITEMS S US REMARKS
C

1. Cabin Crew Briefing

2. Pre - Flight emergency equipment checks
ED

3. Emergency Equipment Location/ Operation

4. Exit operation
5. Galley electrical equipment and circuit breakers
6. Public address & Intercommunications
LL

7. Crew Resources Management (CRM)

8. Main Control Panels
O

9. Passengers handling (Disruptive passenger)

10. Entertainment system facilities
TR

11. Fire Fighting Drills and Procedures

12. Evacuation Procedures
13. Ditching Drills and Procedures (Life Raft)
N

14. Use of Oxygen Cylinder

O

15. Use of Smoke Mask (PBE)

16. Decompression Slow – Rapid Procedures
C

17. First Aid

18. Dangerous goods awareness ( when applicable)
N

19. Knowledge
U

In-flight Competency Check Completion date: Instructor Name & Code No. Signature
Final Result:
S  US / /

Trainee Signature Date

Cabin Crew M. Signature Date

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 20
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.14 GROUND TRAINING AND WALK AROUND (Cabin Crew)

OPERATOR: PAS
TRAINER/ CHECKER NAME:

D
DATE/ TIME:
AIRCRAFT TYPE:

TE
S ITEM (S – SATISFACTORY), (U - UN SATISFACTORY) S U REMARKS

IN
1 FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES

PR
2 EVACUATION PROCEDURES

3 DITCHING PROCEDURES

IF
4 EMERGENCY EQUIP., CHECK

5 EMERGENCY EQUIP, PROCEDURES

PY
6 USE OF O2 CYLINDER
O
7 USE OF SMOKE MASK
C

8 TRAINING OF TRAINEE ON GROUND

ED

9 DECOMPRESSION SLOW – RAPID PROCEDURES

10 CREW CO- COORDINATION COMMUNICATION

LL

11 OPENING DOORS IN 15 SECONDS

O

COMMENTS:
TR
N
O
C

INSTRUCTOR NAME: TRAINER NAME:

N
U

INSTRUCTOR SIGNATURE: TRAINER SIGNATURE:

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 21
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

11.15 CABIN CREW INSTRUCTOR IN-FLIGHT PROFICIENCY CHECK

Instructor Name: Code: AC Type:

D
Type Of Training:

TE
FLT. No: Sector(s) : / / / Date: / / o Flight check
o Renewal

IN
Reporting at Dispatch Office knowledge
 Inspection of personal documentation.  Emergency procedures:

PR
 Check on safety manual. 1. Evacuation over ground / water.
 Preflight briefing (safety and type). 2. Fire fighting.
 Reporting on board on time. 3. Decompression.
Emergency equipments check. 4. Refueling while PAX on board.

IF

5. First Aid.
Communication and Body Language
PY 6. Survival.
 Aircraft systems: Oxygen system, Pressurization
 Instructor’s tutorial performance.
and Air-conditioning system.
 Remarks given in private.  Exits operation.
O
 Leadership and commandability.  Emergency equipment operation/ location.
 Public address, intercommunications and
C

Paper Work entertainment system.

 Training form completion.  Galley electrical equipment and circuit breakers.
ED

 Cabin log book and flight report.  ECARS and CRM (GOM)
 Death / birth on board report.  Bomb threat and hijacking procedures.
 First aid kit opening report.  Abbreviations and aviation terminology
LL

 Security regulations.
 Health, customs and currency regulations.
O

Comments:
TR
N
O

Checker name: Code: Signature:

C

Checking results: Instructor signature G.M. flight training

N

o S
o US
U

Note: put S / US in the corresponding box for evaluation.

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 Ch : 11
OM Part D Page: 22
Training Manual FORMS
FORMS

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
C
ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date : Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Mar. 2017 Rev. 00
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 1

Table of content

D
TE
OM Part D Training Manual APPENDIX D -------------------------------------------------------- **

1 C.R.J Initial Training------------------------------------------------------------------------------------**

IN
2 Dash 8 Initial Training --------------------------------------------------------------------------------**

PR
3 Recurrent Training - ALL TYPES ------------------------------------------------------------------**

4 Upgrade Training - ALL TYPES -------------------------------------------------------------------- **

IF
5.Instructor Course - initial--------------------------------------------------------------------------------**

PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 2

1.CRJ Initial Training

Airport: Environment: Session Length:
EHAM DAY FLIGHT 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

1 Performance calculation

D
2 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, First flight of the day

TE
3 Use of checklist 1.4

IN
4 Taxiing, Before taxi procedures

5 Before take-off checks

PR
6 Y + Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off, FMS departure,follow SID

7 + Turns with and without spoilers, Steep turns 3.1

IF
8 UPRT

9 Y + Holding procedures, Fms holding

PY
10 Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow ATC instructions

11 Y + ILS with autopilot, Down to DA

O
Normal landings also after an ILS approach with transition to visual flight on reaching DH, Use of
12 +
Reverse Thrust and GLD
C
13 Y + Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off

14 + ILS manually, with flight director, Down to DA

D

Go-around with all engines operating after an ILS approach on reaching DH, Follow missed approach
15 Y +
E

procedure, Show how to change from green to white needles.DEMO

16 Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow ATC instructions
LL

17 ILS manually, without flight director

O

18 Normal landings also after an ILS approach with transition to visual flight on reaching DH
TR

19 Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

20 Landing, Shutdown Procedure

N

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5

FLIGHT PREPARATION
O

1 Performance Calculation
2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks
C

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
N

3 Normal Take-Offs
4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure
U

5 Rejected Take-Off
6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction
EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 3

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director

D
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot

TE
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.

IN
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative
MISSED APPROACH

PR
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING
20 Normal Landings

IF
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative

PY
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
O
25 Basic Flying Skills
26 System Knowledge
C
27 Procedure Knowledge
28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
D

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
LL

0 1 2 3 4 5

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
O

previous session Reason: to next session

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator
U

Other

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 4

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

AMS DAY FLIGHT 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Performance calculation

TE
2 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, First Flight of the day

3 Engine and Propeller, Start malfunctions

IN
4 Taxiing

5 Before take-off checks

PR
6 Y + Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off

7 Steep turns with 45 Dgr bank 180 Dgr to 360 Dgr left and right

IF
8 + Early recognition and counter measures on approching stall, Overspeed demonstration

Recovery from full stall or after activation of stall warning device, Stalls- Clean, Maneuvering,
9
Landing

PY
10 + ILS manually, with flight director, Down to DA

Go-around with all engines operating after an ILS approach on reaching DH, Follow missed approach
11 Y +
procedure
O
12 ILS manually, without flight director, Down to DA, Landing full stop
C
13 + Crosswind take-off

14 + ILS manually, with flight director

D

Rejected landing at 50 FT above runway threshold and go-around, Reposition 6 nm final and repeat
15 Y +
the maneuver
E

16 ILS manually, without flight director

LL

17 Normal landings also after an ILS approach with transition to visual flight on reaching DH, Crosswind

18 Crosswind landings
O

19 Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

TR

20 Landing, Shutdown Procedure

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
1 Performance Calculation
O

2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks

C

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
3 Normal Take-Offs
N

4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

5 Rejected Take-Off
U

6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 5

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH

D
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director

TE
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling

IN
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

PR
MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING
20 Normal Landings

IF
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative

PY
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
25 Basic Flying Skills
O
26 System Knowledge
27 Procedure Knowledge
C

28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
D

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 3 4 5
LL

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
previous session Reason: to next session
O

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator

Other
U

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

AMS NIGHT FLIGHT 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Performance calculation

TE
2 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, First Flight of the day

3 Engine and Propeller, Start malfunctions

IN
4 Taxiing

5 Before take-off checks

PR
6 Y + Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off

7 Steep turns with 45 Dgr bank 180 Dgr to 360 Dgr left and right

IF
8 + Early recognition and counter measures on approching stall

Recovery from full stall or after activation of stall warning device, Stalls- Clean, Maneuvering,
9
Landing

PY
10 + Non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, Full procedure VOR / DME approach

11 Y + Missed approach procedures, After a non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, Vectors for Ils App
O
12 ILS manually, without flight director, Down to DA, Landing full stop
C
13 + Crosswind take-off

14 + ILS manually, with flight director, Night landing

D

Rejected landing at 50 FT above runway threshold and go-around, Reposition 6 nm final and repeat
15 Y +
the maneuver
E

16 ILS manually, without flight director

LL

17 Normal landings also after an ILS approach with transition to visual flight on reaching DH, Crosswind

18 Crosswind landings
O

19 Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

TR

20 Landing, Shutdown Procedure

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
1 Performance Calculation
O

2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks

C

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
3 Normal Take-Offs
N

4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

5 Rejected Take-Off
U

6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 7

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH

D
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director

TE
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling

IN
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

PR
MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING
20 Normal Landings

IF
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative

PY
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
25 Basic Flying Skills
O
26 System Knowledge
27 Procedure Knowledge
C

28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
D

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 3 4 5
LL

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
O

previous session Reason: to next session

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator
U

Other

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

AMS NIGHT FLIGHT, WINTER OPERATIONS 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Performance calculation, Cold weather operation

TE
2 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, First Flight of the day

3 Engine and Propeller, Start malfunctions

IN
4 Taxiing, Slippery taxi ways, Use of Anti Ice Systems

5 Before take-off checks

PR
6 Y + Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off, F20 Take off

7 Steep turns with 45 Dgr bank 180 Dgr to 360 Dgr left and right

IF
8 + Early recognition and counter measures on approching stall, Overspeed demonstration 3.8

Recovery from full stall or after activation of stall warning device, Stalls- Clean, Maneuvering,
9 3.8.1
Landing

PY
10 + Non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, NDB / DME approach, Icing conditions

Go-around with all engines operating after an ILS approach on reaching DH, Follow missed approach
11 Y + 4.1
procedure
O
12 ILS manually, without flight director, Down to DA, Landing full stop
C
13 + Crosswind take-off

14 + ILS manually, with flight director, Night landing

D

Rejected landing at 50 FT above runway threshold and go-around, Reposition 6 nm final and repeat
15 Y + 4.4
the maneuver
E

16 ILS manually, without flight director

LL

17 Normal landings also after an ILS approach with transition to visual flight on reaching DH, Crosswind

18 Crosswind landings, Slippery RWY 5.3

O

19 Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

TR

20 Landing, Shutdown Procedure

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
1 Performance Calculation
O

2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks

C

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
3 Normal Take-Offs
N

4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

5 Rejected Take-Off
U

6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures

D
APPROACH
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director

TE
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach

IN
15 Circling
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

PR
MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING

IF
20 Normal Landings
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls

PY
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
O
25 Basic Flying Skills
26 System Knowledge
C
27 Procedure Knowledge
28 CRM
D

29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
LL

0 1 2 4 5

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
O

previous session Reason: to next session

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator
U

Other

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

FRA DAY FLIGHT, COLD WEATHER 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Performance calculation, Cold weather operation MTOW 1.1

TE
2 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, Second Flight of the day

3 Engine and Propeller, Start malfunctions

IN
4 Taxiing, Taxi checklist

5 Before take-off checks

PR
6 Y + Take-off at maximum take-off mass, Max crosswind

7 Y + Holding procedures

IF
Non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, Full procedure VOR / DME approach, Landing full stop
8 Y +
landing overweight

9 + Crosswind take-off

PY
10 + Windshear, T/O

11 ACAS event
O
12 Emergency procedures, EGPWS / CFIT
C
13 Tuck under and Mach buffets, Dutch Roll Demo and High altitude Stall recovery 3.2

14 Flight Manoeuvres, Recovery from unusual attitudes

D

15 Y + GPS approach, Full Stop

E

16 ILS manually, without flight director, Crosswind 3.9.3.1

LL

17 + Windshear, Go-Around

18 Flight Manoeuvres, Visual circuit´s, Touch and Go

O

19 Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

TR

20 Landing, Shutdown Procedure

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
O

1 Performance Calculation
2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks
C

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
3 Normal Take-Offs
N

4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

5 Rejected Take-Off
U

6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH

D
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director

TE
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling

IN
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

PR
MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING
20 Normal Landings

IF
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative

PY
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
25 Basic Flying Skills
O
26 System Knowledge
27 Procedure Knowledge
C

28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
D

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 4 5
LL

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
O

previous session Reason: to next session

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator
U

Other

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

FRA DAY FLIGHT 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Performance calculation

TE
2 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, Second Flight of the day

3 Engine and Propeller, Start malfunctions

IN
4 Taxiing, Taxi checklist

5 Before take-off checks

PR
6 Y + Take-off at maximum take-off mass, Max crosswind

7 Y + Holding procedures

IF
8 Y + Non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, Full procedure VOR / DME approach

9 + Crosswind take-off

PY
10 + Windshear, T/O

11 ACAS event
O
12 Emergency procedures, EGPWS / CFIT
C
13 Electrical system, IDG 1, Reset after Malfuntion

14 Electrical system, AC BUS 2

D

15 Y + GPS approach, Full Stop

E

16 ILS manually, without flight director, Crosswind

LL

17 + Windshear, Go-Around

18 Y + Take-off with simulated engine failure between V1 and V2, Engine Failure Demo
O

19 Y + ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, SE Landing Demo

TR

20 Landing, Shutdown Procedure

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
O

1 Performance Calculation
2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks
C

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
3 Normal Take-Offs
N

4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

5 Rejected Take-Off
U

6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH

D
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director

TE
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling

IN
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

PR
MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING

IF
20 Normal Landings
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative

PY
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
O
25 Basic Flying Skills
26 System Knowledge
C
27 Procedure Knowledge
28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
D

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
LL

0 1 2 4 5

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
O

previous session Reason: to next session

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator
U

Other

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

AMS NIGHT WINTER AND DAY 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, L PACK INOP, MEL

TE
2 Y + Instrument take-off, Low Visibility Operation, crosswind

3 Y + Pressurisation and airconditioning, CPC 1,1+2, MANUAL PRESS CONTROL 3.4.1

IN
4 Y + Simulated cabin pressure failure/Emergency descend, Reposition FL350 3.6.6

5 Y + Non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, NDB approach

PR
6 + Rejected take-off, Engine Failure below V1

7 Y + Take-off with simulated engine failure between V1 and V2, Engine Flameout, Repeat if neccesary 2.5.2

IF
8 Y + Engine failures, shut-down and restart at safe height

Fire drills e.g. Engine, APU, cabin, cargo, flight deck wing and electrical fires incl. Evacuation, After
9 Y +
engine Relight Engine FIRE

PY
10 Y + ILS with autopilot, Down to DA, Landing SE

Take-off with simulated engine failure shortly after reaching V2, Engine Severe Damage or
11 Y +
Separation
O
12 Y ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, Down to DA
C
13 + Landing with critical engine simulated inoperative, Crosswind, Landing Se 5.5

14 + Crosswind take-off
D

15 Y + Anti and de-icing system. Glare shield heating 3.4.7

E

16 Y + Circling approach, From ILS approach, Reduced visibiilty, Night time

LL

17 + Landing

18 Rejected take-off, Engine Fire below V1, Unextinguishable

O

Fire drills e.g. Engine, APU, cabin, cargo, flight deck wing and electrical fires incl. Evacuation,
19
Evacuation
TR

20 Landing, After landing and shutdown procedures, Terminating check

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
O

1 Performance Calculation
2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks
C

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
3 Normal Take-Offs
N

4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

5 Rejected Take-Off
U

6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH

D
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director

TE
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling

IN
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

PR
MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING
20 Normal Landings

IF
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative

PY
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
25 Basic Flying Skills
O
26 System Knowledge
27 Procedure Knowledge
C
28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
D

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 4 5
LL

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
O

previous session Reason: to next session

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator
U

Other

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

FRA DAY 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Cockpit inspection, Before Start Procedures

TE
2 Y + Instrument take-off, Min authorized RVR

3 ACAS event 3.6.9

IN
4 Y + Electrical system, DC Emergency Bus 3.4.4

5 Y + Incapacitation of flight crew member 3.6.7

PR
6 Y + ILS with autopilot, Down to DA

Take-off with simulated engine failure shortly after reaching V2, Engine Severe Damage or
7 Y +
Separation

IF
8 Y + Non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, One engine inoperative, VOR/DME Approach 3.9.4

9 Y + Missed approach procedures, After a non-precision-approach down to MDH/A 4.2

PY
10 + ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, Down to DA, Landing SE

11 + Rejected take-off, Engine Failure at V1 -5 kts 2.6

O
12 Y + Take-off at maximum take-off mass, Reverse Deployed, Reset 2.4
C
13 Y + Electrical system, AC BUS 2 failure 3.4.4

14 + Electrical system, Emergency Power only 3.4.4

D

15 + ILS manually, with flight director, Down to DA, Landing on Emergency Power
E

16 + Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off

LL

17 Y + Fire Protection, Engine Fire

18 Y + ILS with autopilot, inmediate Return, Fire not extinguishable

O

19 Y + Normal landings also after an ILS approach with transition to visual flight on reaching DH 5.1
TR

20 Emergency procedures, Emergency Landing, Evacuation

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
1 Performance Calculation
O

2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks

C

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
3 Normal Take-Offs
N

4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

5 Rejected Take-Off
U

6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH

D
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director

TE
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling

IN
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

PR
MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING
20 Normal Landings

IF
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative

PY
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
25 Basic Flying Skills
O
26 System Knowledge
27 Procedure Knowledge
C
28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
D

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 4 5
LL

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
O

previous session Reason: to next session

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator
U

Other

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

FRA DAY 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Auxiliary power unit, Supplementary procedures,Extermal air , Start malfunctions 3.4.14

TE
2 + Windshear, T/O

3 Y + Hydraulic system, Hydraulic 3 Low press 3.4.5

IN
4 Y + Hydraulic system, Hydraulic 3+2 Low press(Done only once) 3.4.5

5 + ILS manually, with flight director, Down to DA, Emergency landing 3.9.3.2

PR
6 + Crosswind take-off, Expedite 2.3

7 Y + Landing gear and brake, MLG overheat, Reset 3.4.12

IF
8 + Flight control and trim system, Flight Controls Related failures Demo(Done only once) 3.4.6

9 + Landing with simulated jammed horizontal stabiliser in any out-of-trim position 5.2

PY
10 + Emergency procedures, Upset Recovery, wake turbulence on take off

11 Y + Slat and flap system 3.4.13

O
12 Y + ILS with autopilot, Flapless landing 3.9.3.3
C
13 Y + Instrument take-off, Low Visibility Operation

14 Y + Radios, navigation equipment, instruments, FMS, DEMO(Done only Once) 3.4.11

D

Radios, navigation equipment, instruments, FMS, Reposition 6 Nm Final, ILS APP on Stby
15 Y + 3.4.11
Instruments
E

16 Y + Take-off with simulated engine failure shortly after reaching V2, Engine Fire 2.5.1
LL

Fire drills e.g. Engine, APU, cabin, cargo, flight deck wing and electrical fires incl. Evacuation,
17 Y +
Immediate Return, non extinguishable Fire

18 Y + ILS with autopilot 3.9.3.3

O

19 Emergency procedures, Emergency Landing

TR

20 Emergency procedures, Emergency Landing, Evacuation

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
1 Performance Calculation
O

2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks

C

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
3 Normal Take-Offs
N

4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

5 Rejected Take-Off
U

6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH

D
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director

TE
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling

IN
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

PR
MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING

IF
20 Normal Landings
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative

PY
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
O
25 Basic Flying Skills
26 System Knowledge
C
27 Procedure Knowledge
28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
D

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
LL

0 1 2 4 5

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
previous session Reason: to next session
O

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator

Other
U

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

FRA DAY 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

1 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, Engines Running

D
2 Y + Instrument take-off

TE
3 Y + Fuel system, Fuel Leak from the Engine(Done Only Once) 3.4.3

4 + Engine and Propeller, Engine Shutdown

IN
5 ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, SE approach

PR
Manual go-around with one engine simulated inoperative after an instrument approach on reaching
6 + 4.3
DH, MDH, MAPt, Follow missed approach procedure

7 + ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, Raw data SE ILS landing

8 Y + Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off, No Eng Bleed T/O, Unpress take off 2.1

IF
9 Y + Smoke control and removal, Air Conditioning Smoke, (Done Only Once) 3.6.2

10 Y + Emergency procedures, Emergency Landing

11

12
Y + Instrument take-off, Min authorized RVR

Autopilot/Flight director, AFCS MSG FAIL PY 3.4.8

O
13 Y + Pitot/static system, Pitot blockage 3.4.2
C

14 Y + GPWS, Weather radar, Radio altimeter, Transponder 3.4.10

D

15 + Engine and Propeller, Reposition to FL350

16 + Engine failures, shut-down and restart at safe height, Double Engine Failure Apu inop 3.6.3
E

17 + Engine failures, shut-down and restart at safe height, Windmill start/APU START 3.6.3
LL

18 Y + Circling approach, From VOR / DME approach 3.9.5

Fire drills e.g. Engine, APU, cabin, cargo, flight deck wing and electrical fires incl. Evacuation, Engine
O

19 Y + 3.6.1
Fire During Approach

Emergency procedures, Emergency Landing, Upon landing Engine fire and Evacuation
TR

20

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT PREPARATION
N

1 Performance Calculation
O

2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
C

3 Normal Take-Offs
4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure
N

5 Rejected Take-Off
6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction
U

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director

D
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach

TE
15 Circling
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

IN
MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating

PR
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING
20 Normal Landings
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative

IF
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist

PY
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
25 Basic Flying Skills
26 System Knowledge
27 Procedure Knowledge
O
28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
C

30 Communication
D

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 4 5
E
LL

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
previous session Reason: to next session
O

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator

Other
U

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 22

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

FRA DAY AND NIGHT 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures 1.3

TE
2 Before take-off checks, Engine Start Procedures 1.6

3 Taxiing 1.5

IN
4 Y + Instrument take-off 2.2

5 Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow SID 3.9.1

PR
6 Y + Climb to Cruise Level

7 Y + Arcraft sytems

IF
8 Y + Holding procedures 3.9.2

9 Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow ATC instructions 3.9.1

PY
10 Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow STAR 3.9.1

11 Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Precision/Non Precision APP 3.9.1
O
12 Y + Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures
C
13 + Landing, Shutdown Procedure

14 Terminating Procedure
D

15 LST REVIEW
E

16 + Steep turns with 45 Dgr bank 180 Dgr to 360 Dgr left and right 3.7
LL

17 Windshear, On take off and final 3.6.5

18 Engine and Propeller, Engine Flame out, Engine Fire and Reverse Unklocked 3.4.0
O

19 ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, Down to DA, SE go arounds 3.9.3.4
TR

20 Emergency procedures, Emergency Landing, EVACUATION 3.6.8

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
1 Performance Calculation
O

2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
C

3 Normal Take-Offs
N

4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

5 Rejected Take-Off
U

6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH

D
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director

TE
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling

IN
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative
MISSED APPROACH

PR
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING
20 Normal Landings

IF
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION

PY
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
25 Basic Flying Skills
O
26 System Knowledge
27 Procedure Knowledge
C
28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
D

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 4 5
LL

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
O

previous session Reason: to next session

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator
U

Other

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

FRA DAY 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, Cockpit introduction

TE
2 Flight Manoeuvres, Trim Changes

3 Flight Manoeuvres, Acceleration/Deceleration, Trim changes, Use of TOGA

IN
4 Turns with and without spoilers, Roll Familiarization

5 Flight Manoeuvres, Climb /Descend/Level OFF

PR
6 Flight Manoeuvres, Sierrra Pattern

7 Flight Manoeuvres, Effect of Speedbrakes

IF
8 Flight Manoeuvres, Deceleration Rates

9 Flight Manoeuvres, Steep Turns

PY
10 Flight Manoeuvres, Use of Flaps

11 Flight Manoeuvres, Use of Gear

O
12 Landing Configuration

13 Flight Manoeuvres, Level Off and Clean Up

C

14 Flight Manoeuvres, Approach Configuration

D

15 ILS manually, without flight director

E

Normal landings also after an ILS approach with transition to visual flight on reaching DH, on reaching
16
DH
LL

17 Landing

18 Engine and Propeller, Engine Flame out, Engine Fire and Reverse Unklocked
O

19 Clean up
TR

20

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
1 Performance Calculation
O

2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
C

3 Normal Take-Offs
4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure
N

5 Rejected Take-Off
U

6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director

D
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot

TE
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.

IN
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative
MISSED APPROACH

PR
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING
20 Normal Landings

IF
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION

PY
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
25 Basic Flying Skills
O
26 System Knowledge
27 Procedure Knowledge
C
28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
30 Communication
D

OVERALL GRADE
E

0 1 2 4 5
LL

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
previous session Reason: to next session
O

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

Lack of Time
C

Simulator
N

Other
U

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

FRA DAY 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, Quick set up by instructor

TE
2 Before take-off checks

3 Instrument take-off

IN
4 Instrument take-off, Level off at FL060

5 Flight Manoeuvres, Stepped Climb/Descend

PR
6 Y + Use of Automation

7 Flight Manoeuvres, FL 100 Checks/Level off at FL140

IF
8 Flight Manoeuvres, Expedite Climb

9 Y + Flight Manoeuvres, Climb to OPT ALT/Level off at OPT ALT

PY
10 Flight Manoeuvres, Handling at High Alt

11 Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Compute Descent
O
12 Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Descent Management
C
13 + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, FL100 Checks

14 Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Radar vectoring
D

15 + ILS manually, with flight director

E

Normal landings also after an ILS approach with transition to visual flight on reaching DH, on reaching
16
DH
LL

17 Instrument take-off

18 + ILS manually, with flight director, Down to DA

O

Go-around with all engines operating after an ILS approach on reaching DH, Follow missed approach
19
procedure, Introduction to GO-Around
TR

20

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
1 Performance Calculation
O

2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks

C

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
3 Normal Take-Offs
N

4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

5 Rejected Take-Off
U

6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH

D
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director

TE
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling

IN
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

PR
MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING
20 Normal Landings

IF
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative

PY
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
25 Basic Flying Skills
O
26 System Knowledge
27 Procedure Knowledge
C
28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
D

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 4 5
LL

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
O

previous session Reason: to next session

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator
U

Other

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

FRA DAY 2:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

D
1 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, Transit Cockpit Preparation

2 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, Take off Briefing

TE
3 Cockpit inspection, Before Start Procedures

4 Before take-off checks

IN
5 + Instrument take-off

PR
6 + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, FL 100 Checks

7 + Flight Manoeuvres, FL 100 Checks/Level off at FL140

8 + Hydraulic system, HYD 3 LO PRESS, For the 2nd Student L IDG 2

IF
9 Y + QRH procedure then restore

10 Y Flight Manoeuvres, Init at FL350

11

12
Y

Y
+

+
PY
Simulated cabin pressure failure/Emergency descend

Approach Preparation/FMS setup/Approach Briefing

O
13 + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Descend
C

14 + Non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, Full procedure VOR / DME approach

D

15 Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Radar vectoring

Normal landings also after an ILS approach with transition to visual flight on reaching DH, on reaching
E

16
DH

17 + Instrument take-off, Engine Out familiarization

LL

18 + Take-off with simulated engine failure between V1 and V2

O

19 Y + ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, Down to DA

TR

20

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

N

FLIGHT PREPARATION
1 Performance Calculation
O

2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks

TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE
C

3 Normal Take-Offs
4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure
N

5 Rejected Take-Off
6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction
U

EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 4 5

FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH

D
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director

TE
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
15 Circling

IN
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

PR
MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
LANDING
20 Normal Landings

IF
21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls
22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative

PY
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
23 Use of Normal Checklist
24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
25 Basic Flying Skills
O
26 System Knowledge
27 Procedure Knowledge
C

28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
D

30 Communication
E

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 4 5
LL

Comments / Progress Report:

O
TR

Telephone / E-Mail
Management Attention Required: YES / NO Training Manager Contacted:
Scanned Copy
N

Items brought forward from Items Incomplete: YES / NO Items to be carried forward
previous session Reason: to next session
O

Exercise LST Student Exercise LST

C

Lack of Time
N

Simulator
U

Other

Course No: Sched. 02:00 Landings:

Date: Down T & G:
Sim. Reg: Nett. Time: F/Stop:
Student Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Instructor Name: (Block Capitals) Signature:

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

11.2 TRAINING / PROFICIENCY FORM Page 1 of 2

Day 1: Training For Flight Maneuvers required by ECARS 121 Appendix F (PC)
Day 2: Proficiency Check
Name Code No.

D
 Capt.  F/O  IP
Simulator Owned By Location Aircraft Type Simulator Level

TE
Time PF Time PNF Date A B C D
Flight Training Time 02 : 00 02 : 00 -- / -- / 20

IN
This form is based on ECARS 121 Appendix F.
Enter ( S / U or NA) indicating Satisfactory / Unsatisfactory completion of each item or Not Applicable

PR
PART 1: PC ORAL TEST PART 2: PC FLIGHT CHECK (cont’d)
Operational Oriented Questions INFLIGHT MANEUVERS
• Aeroplane systems • Steep turns (Min. 180° - Max. 360°)3
• Aeroplane performance • Approach to stalls (Two may be waived):

IF
• Normal and non-normal procedures1 - Take-Off configuration
• Company flight operations manual - Clean configuration
• Use of checklists - Landing configuration

PY
• Wind shear Review Note: One Stall must be performed with bank angle 25°.
PART 2: PC FLIGHT CHECK
PRE FLIGHT AND TAXIING APPROACHES & LANDINGS
O
• Pre-flight and cockpit preparation • Normal Landing
• Engine start • From ILS
C
• Low Visibility Taxing (500m RVR) • Cross Wind
TAKE-OFFS • Visual approaches.
D

• Normal • With 50% power plant failure

• Low Visibility T/O (400m RVR) • From circling approach
E

- X- Wind with loss of visual cues at 100 Kt. • Un stabilized approach

- Rejected T.O with an engine failure beforeV 1 • GPWS (CFIT)
LL

- With simulated engine failure at V 1 • Rejected at 50’

• Wind shear • Wind shear
O

INSTRUMENT PROCEDURES NORMAL AND ABNORMAL PROCEDURES

• Area departure • Anti icing and De-icing
TR

• Area arrival and Holding • Hydraulics , Electrical , Pneumatic

• ILS approach (Coupled) • Adverse WX, Hot & Cold WX Operation
• Second ILS approach (Manual) • Contaminated RWY operation
• Missed approach • Weather Avoidance
N

• Non-precision approach • Flaps, Gears

O

• Circling approach • Flight Controls

• Engine failure missed approach • NAV/ Comm. Equipment
C

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
• In-flight Fire and Smoke Control • Emergency Evacuation
N

• Decompression • TCAS
• Emergency Descent • Pilot incapacitation
U

• Emergency Landing (Partial L/G, No Flaps, etc...) • Volcanic Ash

1- Non-Normal Procedures: Are Abnormal, Additional, Alternate and Emergency Procedures

2- 400m RVR for category C/D aircrafts respectively.
3- One direction may be waved.
4- For Captains Only.
Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 C.R.J Initial
OM Part D Training
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

TRAINING / PROFICIENCY FORM (cont’d) Page 2 of 2

This Training is PAS T.M requirement and should be covered during TRAINING DAY
RHS TRAINING FOR INSTRUCTORS RHS TRAINING FOR CAPTAINS
• Error recovery, A/C upset recovery • Normal Take Off, A/C upset recovery

D
- Lateral offsets • Manual ILS (CAT I minima)
- Vertical offsets • Minimum 3 Touch & Go

TE
• Minimum 3 Touch and Go Non-precision approach and landing
EVALUATION

IN
Knowledge US S1 S2 S3
Flight Operations Manual (FOM) and Relevant ECARs    

PR
A/C Systems, Limitations and Performance    
Normal, Non-Normal Procedures1    
PAS Operations Specifications    
Flying Skills US S1 S2 S3

IF
Compliance with SOP (FOM & FCOM)    
Attitude flying and correct trim technique    
Use of FMS, GPS, etc.…    

PY
Aeroplane configuration, Altitude & Speed Control    
Flying accuracy & Smoothness    
Management US S1 S2 S3
O
Compliance with Flight Operations Manual (FOM)    
Planning ahead and use of FMS, GPS, etc…
C
   
Crew co-ordination and use of available resources    
Adherence to clearances and safe heights    
D

Cabin crew safety briefing    

General US S
E

Situational awareness, Aviate, Navigate, Comm. priority  

LL

Discipline  
Comments
Note: If remedial action is required, please submit a separate report to G.M flight training.
O
TR

Base Month (Through Last Day of): License Valid (Through Last Day of): Next Event
N

Month Year Month Year  PC  Re-current. Training

Date of Last 3 T/O& Landings: 2
O

1. / / 2. / / 3. / /
Check Airman Name Code No. Ck Airman’s signature Trainee’s signature
C
N

Checking Result Inspector signature * G.M Flight Training

Previous  US S
U

Current  US S Stamp

1- Non-Normal Procedures: Are Abnormal, Additional, Alternate and Emergency Procedures.

2- Trainee is responsible for the accuracy of this data and he must sign the form.
3- Passing grade 70% - (S1 70% - 79%) - (S2 80% - 89%) – (S3 90% and above).
* For type rating, Transition, Upgrade.

Issue Date :Feb. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 1

D
2.Dash 8 Type rating course

TE
EXCERCISE SEQUENCE INCLUDING BRIEFING ITEMS SIMULATOR SESSION 1

IN
Session objectives:

PR
To familiarize with the:
• Cockpit layout
• Checklist procedures
• Aeroplane handling

IF
PART 1, Commander is PF

•
o
Parked on apron.
PY
Normal cockpit preparation. (first flight of the day).
O
o Normal engine start, (discuss fuel flow during normal start sequence)
o Taxi to depart Rwy.
C
o At 4900 m (FL 160) disconnect A/P, at 177 KIAS perform steep (45 ° bank)
turns
o Increase speed to VMO = 243
D

o Reduce to holding speed (170 KIAS) and prepare for stall sequence
Clean stall: reduce to stick-shaker, clean, maintain altitude, trim to Vflo;
E

o
recover to level flight 170 KIAS
LL

o Stall take-off configuration: gear down and flaps 5°, reduce to stick-shaker, 20°
bank, maintain altitude, trim to V2, and recover to level flight 170 KIAS
o Stall landing configuration: gear down and flaps 15°, reduce to stick-shaker,
O

0°bank, maintain altitude, trim to Vref; recover and clean up to level flight 170
KIAS
TR

o At FL 160: A/P on
o Prepare arrival and ILS approach to …. Rwy … including FMS programming
o Execute arrival and approach as planned with A/P on
N

o From MDA missed approach and contact ATC

o Prepare for another ILS approach Rwy …
O

o A/P on till runway insight (brief change over time from instrument to visual)
o After landing, vacate runway and keep engines running
C
N

PART 2, Copilot is PF
U

o Reposition to Rwy.. …..

o Repeat same sequence

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 2

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
D

Intentionally Left Blank

E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 3

EXCERCISE SEQUENCE INCLUDING BRIEF ITEMS SIMULATOR SESSION 2

D
TE
Session objectives:
To practice the use of:
• Normal checklist

IN
• Emergency checklist/Part B section 3.4 abnormal procedures

PR
PART 1, Copilot is PF

• Parked on taxiway (….)

o Flight deck preparation first flight of the day, APU starter failure

IF
o Engine start # 2using ground power
o Take-off runway …, departure ….
At 3000’: lavatory fire, return to …. And intercept radial … of the VOR

PY
o
o Hold over VOR
o Prepare ILS approach Rwy …, make a full stop.
o Take-off runway …, Engine # 1 Oil Press. Warning, engine shutdown.
O
o N-1 handling, including Vmca
o Air-start procedure.
C
o Engine # 2 Fire Detection/Reset
o Descend
D

o Proceed to Hold
o ILS approach
E

o Landing 15° flaps

N-1 Take-off
LL

o
o N-1 ILS approach
o N-1 Landing 15° flaps
O
TR

PART 2, Commander is PF

o Normal take-off 5° flaps

N

o Climb to FL 80
o Engine # 2 Fire, engine fire drill.
O

o N-1 handling, including Vmca.

o Cancel malfunction, quick start
C

o Descend
o Proceed to Holding
N

o ILS approach
o Landing 15° flaps
U

o N-1 take-off 5° flaps

o N-1 ILS approach
o N-1 landing 15° flaps

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 4

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D

Intentionally Left Blank

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 5

To practice:
• Normal Take-off

D
• Approaches manual with and without FD

TE
• Go-Around
• N-1 Take-off
• N-1 Approaches

IN
PART 1, Copilot is PF

PR
• Parked on taxi-way ….
o Flight deck preparation first flight of the day
o Engine start failure: hot start engine # 2

IF
o Taxi runway …
o Take-off runway …for LH visual circuit 1500’ (3) including raw data
Full stop

PY
o
o Take-off runway ….
o Proceed to VOR 3000’
o Prepare for a precision approach
O
o Go-Around
o Precision approach
C
o Go-Around
o Non-precision approach
D

o Landing
o N-1 Take-off 5° flaps
E

o N-1 Precision approach

LL

PART 2, Commander is PF
O

• Reposition to holding point runway …

TR

o Take-off runway… for RH visual circuit 1500’ (3) including raw data
o Full stop
o Take-off runway….
N

o Precision approach
o Go-Around
O

o Precision approach
o Go-Around
C

o Non-precision approach
o Landing
N

o N-1 Take-off 5° flaps

o N-1 Precision approach
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
D

Intentionally Left Blank

E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 7

Before concentration on system malfunctions, to achieve proficiency in:

• Precision approaches; normal and N-1

D
• Non precision approaches (NDB,VOR, LOC); normal and N-1

TE
• Go-Around; normal and N-1 (including on reaching DA or MDA)

PART 1, Commander is PF

IN
• Parked on Apron ….

PR
o Pilot incapacitation, methods to determine subtle incapacitation, action and
procedures
o Flight deck, quick turn-around preparation
o Engine start failures, # 1 hung start

IF
o Take-off Runway …, Engine flame-out, restart impossible
N-1 ILS Runway …, full stop.
o Steep turns, Stalls, UPRT.

o N-1 LOC-approach Runway…, full stop

PY
o Repetition of Engine flame-out after V1, also without A/P

o Take-off Runway …; Engine fire after V1, visual circuit Runway ….

O
o N-1 Go-Around followed by a visual circuit, full stop
o Take-off Runway …; Engine fire followed by NDB/DME approach Runway …
C

o N-1 Landing
o Full stop
D

PART 2, Copilot is PF
E

• Reposition to holding point Runway …

LL

o Take-off; Engine failure after V1, restart impossible

o ILS approach Runway …, full stop
o Repetition of Engine flame-out after V1, also without A/P
O

o N-1 Loc approach Runway …, full stop

o Take-off Runway …; Engine fire after V1, visual circuit Rwy…
TR

N-1 Go-Around followed by a visual circuit, full stop

o Steep turns, Stalls, UPRT
N

o Take-off Runway….; Engine fire followed by NDB/DME approach Rwy…

o N-1 landing, proceed to apron
O

o Shut down at gate

C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 8

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D

Intentionally Left Blank

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 9

Introduction of failures in:

• Flight controls systems

D
• Hydraulic systems

TE
PART1, FO is PF

IN
o Rejected take-off 5° flaps
o N-1 take-off 5° flaps

PR
o Climb to 3000’
o Air start procedure
o Flight controls failures:
o Elevator control jam

IF
o Airplane rolls without control input
o Rud Hydr. Caution light ON
o Rudder trim actuator runaway

PY
o Non-precision approach
o Go-Around, followed by N-1 (engine #2)
o Hydraulic system failures:
O
o #2 hydraulic system fluid loss/alternate gear extension
C
o N-1 precision approach
o N-1 landing
D

PART 2, Commander is PF
E
LL

o Rejected Take-off 5° flaps

o Normal Take-off 5° flaps
o Climb to 5000’
O

o Flight controls failures:

o Roll control jam
TR

o Aileron trim tab runaway

o Yaw damper failure
o Rud Press. and Rud Full Press caution lights ON
N

o Non precision approach

o Go-Around, followed by N-1 (engine #1)
O

o N-1 precision approach

o N-1 landing
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 10

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D

Intentionally Left Blank

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 11

D
Session objectives:

TE
Introduction of failures in:
• Electrical systems
• Fuel systems

IN
• Further failures in hydraulic systems

PR
PART 1, Commander is PF

o Normal take-off 5° flaps

o SID to ….

IF
o Climb to FL 90
o Electrical failures:
o Main Battery. Caution light ON

PY
o DC generator failure. �Both DC-gen. Failure
o Hydraulic system failures:
o # 1 hydraulic system fluid loss/flapless approach
O
o Holding
o Precision approach
C
o Landing with 0° flaps
D

PART 2, Copilot is PF
E

• Simulator is on runway with engines running)

LL

o Normal take-off 5° flaps

o SID to …
O

o Climb to FL 90
o Electrical failures:
TR

o Battery overheat (Temperature stabilizes)

o Main DC bus fault
o AC gen. Failure
LH AC-bus caution light ON
N

o
o Fuel failures:
O

o Abnormal fuel temperature, low fuel press.

o Brakes failure:
C

o Brake anti-skid failure (OUTBD ANTI-SKID caution light ON)

o Precision approach: flap failure
N

o Landing with 0° flaps: tire burst

o On ground emergency
U

o Evacuation drill

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 12

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D

Intentionally Left Blank

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 7

Introduction of failures in:

• Propeller systems

D
• Ice and rain protection systems

TE
• Air-conditioning and pressurization systems

PART 1, Copilot is PF

IN
o Normal take-off 5° flaps

PR
o SID to …
o Climb to cruise level 140/150: Auto/Semi auto/Manual pressurization
o Ice and Rain protection failures:
o Airframe de-icing air supply failure

IF
o Prop de-icing failure
o Elevator horn heat failure
o Sim climb to Fl 240

PY
o Door failure: FWD exit door warning light ON
o Rapid decompression
o Emergency descent
O
o Precision approach
o Landing with 15° flaps
C

PART 2, Commander is PF
E D

o Normal take-off 5° flaps: Propeller over-speed / alternate feather

o Precision approach
LL

o Landing with 15° flaps: Unscheduled auto feather engine #1

o Radar vectors: #1 standby hydraulic pump HOT
O

o Precision approach
o Landing with 0° flaps
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 8

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D

Intentionally Left Blank

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 9

• Skill test

D
TE
ROUTE: ….. to ….

There is no defined sequence; as it is dependent on the check flight program.

The following items should be covered however:

IN
PR
PART 1, Commander is PF

IF
o Imminent over-temperature on start
- Starter light remains on
o Abnormal fuel temperature

PY
o Inverter failure
o Battery overheat
o Unscheduled Auto feather
O
o Loss of hydraulic fluid
o Engine fire
C
o Flap failure
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 10

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D

Intentionally Left Blank

LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 11

D
TE
EXCERCISE SEQUENCE INCLUDING BRIEFING ITEMS SIMULATOR OPTIONAL

IN
Session objectives:
• LOFT Session

PR
ROUTE: ….. to ….

There is no defined sequence; as it is dependent on the check flight program.

The following items should be covered however:

IF
PY
PART 1, Commander is PF O
o No light up on start
o ECU failure
C
o Engine Hydraulic pump failure
o Engine Oil press. Failure
D

o Loss of hydraulic fluid

o Battery Failure
E

o Fuel press. Caution light ON

LL

o Engine fire
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Dash 8 Type rating
OM Part D course
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 12

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
D

Intentionally Left Blank

E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 1

D
3. Recurrent :

TE
- The purpose of the RECURRENT Course is not only to refresh the knowledge
reached during the Type rating course, but to provide the rated crews with a deeper

IN
technical knowledge, non technical skills and the operational, commercial and
strategic company guide lines increasing their skills and experience in order to

PR
operate the aircraft at the highest levels of safety and efficiency according with PAS
operational policy.
- The normal interval between 2 Recurrent Training and Checking programs is 6 months.

IF
Before each Recurrent training a ground refresher must take place.

Ground refresher training:

PY
a) Airplane systems
b) Operational procedures and requirements including ground de-/anti-icing
and pilot incapacitation; and
O
c) Accident/incident and occurrence review
C
NOTE: Knowledge of the ground and refresher training shall be verified by a
questionnaire or other suitable methods.
D

- Crew resource management training

a) Elements of CRM shall be integrated into all appropriate phases of
E

recurrent training; and

LL

b) A specific modular CRM training program shall be established such that all
major topics of CRM training are covered over a period not exceeding three
years.
O

- All exercises are completed in a realistic environment.

TR

TRI/SFI run all sessions.

N

Each SIMULATOR Training Session consists of:

•
O

1 Preflight Briefings of 1: hr ……………………………………………01:30 hrs

• 1 Session of 4:00 hrs per crew...........…………………………………04:00 hrs
C

• 1 De-briefings of 1:00 hrs each……………………………………… 01:00 hrs

N

Checking Session ( Proficiency Check):

U

• 1 Preflight Briefings of 1: hr ……………………………………………01:30 hrs

• 1 Session of 4:00 hrs per crew…...........………………………………04:00 hrs
• 1 De-briefings of 1:00 hrs each……………………………………… 01:00 hrs
Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 2

RECURRENT GROUND TRAINING CYCLES

D
NAME.- CAP/FO

TE
ATA/SYSTEM PROCEDURES YEAR1 YEAR2 YEAR3
21-ECS SYSTEM /Warning & operating limitations

IN
Pack and temperature regulation
Pack Overheat. Duct Overheat
SYSTEM /Warning & Limitations
22-AUTOFLIGHT

PR
Abnormal/Emergency Operation
Warning & operating limitations
23-COMM Avionics, Lavatory and Bay vent
Abnormal operation
24-ELECTRICAL Peripheral interfaces . Flight envelope
FMS Reconfigurations

IF
Warnings
26-FIRE PROT SYSTEM /Warning
Cargo & Lavatory protections
27-FLIGHT SYSTEM / Warnings & Limitation

PY
CONTROLS
28-FUEL SYSTEM /Warning & limitations
Fuel leak
29-HYDRAULIC SYSTEM /Warning & limitations
O
Overheat / Dual HYD FAIL
30-ICE PROT SYSTEM /Warning & operating limitations
C

31- EICAS SYSTEM /Warning & operating limitations

31-EFIS SYSTEM /Warning & operating limitations
D

32-LDG GEAR AND SYSTEM /Warning & operating limitations

Brake/Antiskid Abnormals
BRAKES
E

33-LIGHTING Cockpit and Exterior

34- NAVIGATION SYSTEM /Warning & operating limitations
LL

Fault and Switching

35- OXYGEN SYSTEM
36-PNEUMATICS SYSTEM /Warning & operating limitations
O

Bleed faul / Wing Leak

38-WATER AND SYSTEM /Warning & operating limitations
WASTE
TR

49-APU SYSTEM /Warning & operating limitations

APU Fire
52-DOORS Operating ans Arming systems
70-POWER PLANT SYSTEM /Warning & operating limitations
N

Abnormal & Emergencies

PERFORMANCE Take Off Optimization
O

Required & Actual LDG DIST

CRM Once every three years with major CRM topics
C

EMERG&SAFETY Every year.- Emerg. Equipment (Locatio/Op/Use)

Every three year.- Doors/Slides/Fire/Rafts
DDGG Once every two years
N

UPRT Once every year

DATE: TEST CYCLE 1: %

U

DATE TEST CYCLE 2: %

DATE TEST CYCLE 3: %

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 3

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C

Intentionally Left Blank

ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 4

REC FFS 1 CYCLE I

D
PART 1, PILOT A IS PF

TE
FLIGHT: LEVC TO LEMD
Session Overview:

IN
• FFS First flight of the day
• APU Running

PR
• Notams: None
• Aircraft Deficiencies: Av Bay Door
Session Objectives:
-Start malfunctions

IF
-Windshear, Tcas and GPWS events
-Crosswind take off and landings

PY
- ECS,PNEUMATICS,ICE AND RAIN
-Navigation failures
-Communication failures
O
-Doors
C
Session Events:
• Engine Start Malfunctions
D

• Taxi procedures
• Failures during taxi
E

• Xwind take off

LL

• Tcas Event
• Transponder failure
• Rtu failure
O

• ACP failure
TR

• Pneumatic, ECS, ICE and Rain Failures

• Total loss of Communications
• Vectors ILS app GS failure
N

• Take off
O

• Windshear
• Fms map fail/Position information unreliable
C

• Vectors for ILS app Raw data

N

• Reposition for take off

• Engine failure severe damage
U

• Se app and landing

• Reposition for Take off and emergency evacuation.

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 5

PART 2: PILOT B IS PF

D
FLIGHT

TE
• Same secuence starting with engines Running

IN
• Vor app

PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

D
FFS 2- SESSION DATA

TE
FLT NUMBER:

IN
CRJ 810

PR
FLIGHT PLAN :
ORIGIN : LEVC
DESTINATION: LEMD

IF
ALTERNATE : LEAL

ROUTE :

PY
LEVC RWY12 CENTA 7A PRADO PRADO1D ILS 33L LEMD
O
FL 240
ALTN FL 150
C
D

WEATHER:
E

LEVC 130/27 1200mts BKN 800 T08/2 Q 995.

LEMD 100/10 KT 3000 HZ SCT 070 7/3 Q1000.
LL

WINDS ALOFT: CLB: 180/22 CRS: 200/27 DES: 170/ 19

O

ATMOSPHERE: ISA
TR

MASS AND BALANCE:

N

ZFM: 28000 KGS

O

TOTAL FUEL: 4000Kg

C

CENTER OF GRAVITY: 20%

N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 7

D
T.O DATA

TE
ARPT FLT NUMBER V1
FLAPSº

IN
RWY PTOW AZFW VR

PR
QNH ATOW TO CG V2 MSA 25NM

OAT T.O N1 FLEX ACC ALT TRANS ALT

Tº N1

IF
WIND CLB N1 F 20º F8º F1º

PY
TRAN ALT MCT N1 O VFTO

NOTES
C
D

T.O DATA
E

FLAPSº
ARPT FLT NUMBER V1
LL

RWY PTOW AZFW VR

O

QNH ATOW TO CG V2 MSA 25NM

TR

OAT T.O N1 FLEX ACC ALT TRANS ALT

Tº N1
N
O

WIND CLB N1 F 20º F8º F1º

C

TRAN ALT MCT N1 VFTO

N

NOTES
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 8

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C

Intentionally Left Blank

ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 9

REC FFS 1 CYCLE 2

D
PART 1, PILOT A IS PF
FLIGHT: LEMD TO LEVC

TE
Session Overview:
• FFS First flight of the day

IN
• APU Running
• Notams: None

PR
• Aircraft Deficiencies: None
Session Objectives:
-Start malfunctions

IF
-Windshear, Tcas, UPRT and GPWS events
-Electric failures

PY
-Powerplant failures( Double engine flame out)
-Fuel
-Fire protection failures
O
-Emergency descent
-Emergency evacuation
C

Session Events:
• Engine Start Malfunctions
D

• Taxi procedures
E

• Failures during taxi

• FON reviews
LL

• Apu fire
• Tcas Event
O

• Emergency power only

TR

• Return for landing ILs 33L

• Reposition for take off
• Fuel leak
N

• Return for landing

• Vectors for SE Vor app 33l
O

• Missed app procedures

C

• Vectors for ILS app full stop

• Reposition for take off
N

• Engine failure severe damage

U

• Se app and landing

• Reposition Fl 350 Double engine flame out.
• Reposition for take off and emergency evacuation.
Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02
Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 10

PART 2: PILOT B IS PF

D
FLIGHT

TE
Same secuence starting with engines Running

IN
•

PR
IF
PY
O
C
ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 11

FFS 2- SESSION DATA

D
TE
FLT NUMBER:
CRJ 800

IN
FLIGHT PLAN :

PR
ORIGIN : LEMD
DESTINATION: LEVC
ALTERNATE : LETO

IF
ROUTE :
LEMD 36R NANDO 7R NANDO UW107 CLS
LEVC RWY 30 STAR CLS 1A
PY
O
C

FL 240
ALTN FL 150
DE

WEATHER:
LL

LEMD 300/17 800mts BKN 800 –RA Ts T8/2 Q 995.

LEVC 080/7 KT 3000 HZ SCT 070 35/3 Q1021.
O

WINDS ALOFT: CLB: 180/22 CRS: 200/27 DES: 170/ 19

TR

ATMOSPHERE: ISA
N

MASS AND BALANCE:

O

ZFM: 27500 KGS

C

TOTAL FUEL: 4000Kg

N
U

CENTER OF GRAVITY: 23%

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 12

FLAPSº

D
T.O DATA

TE
ARPT FLT NUMBER V1

RWY PTOW AZFW VR

IN
QNH ATOW TO CG V2 MSA 25NM

PR
OAT T.O N1 FLEX ACC ALT TRANS ALT
Tº N1

IF
WIND CLB N1 F 20º F8º F1º

PY
TRAN ALT MCT N1 VFTO

NOTES
O
C
D

FLAPSº
E

T.O DATA
ARPT FLT NUMBER V1
LL

RWY PTOW AZFW VR

O

QNH ATOW TO CG V2 MSA 25NM

TR

OAT T.O N1 FLEX ACC ALT TRANS ALT

Tº N1
N
O

WIND CLB N1 F 20º F8º F1º

C

TRAN ALT MCT N1 VFTO

N

NOTES
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 13

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C

Intentionally Left Blank

ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 14

REC FFS 1 CYCLE 3

D
TE
PART 1, PILOT A IS PF

IN
FLIGHT: LEVC TO LEMD
Session Overview:

PR
• FFS First flight of the day
• APU Running
• Notams: None
• Aircraft Deficiencies: None

IF
Session Objectives:
-Start malfunctions

PY
-Windshear, Tcas and GPWS events
-Hydraulic failures, Flight control failures, Landing gear,EFIS
-Emergency descent
O
-Emergency evacuation
C
Session Events:
• Engine Start Malfunctions
D

• Taxi procedures
• Failures during taxi
E

• FON reviews
LL

• Tcas Event
• Double hyd faliure
• Return for landing ILs
O

• Reposition for take off

TR

• Flight control failures

• Instrument failures
• Return for landing
N

• Vectors for SE Vor app

O

• Missed app procedures

• Vectors for ILS app full stop
C

• Reposition for take off

N

• Engine failure severe damage

• Se app and landing
U

• Reposition Fl 350 Emergency descent

• Reposition for take off and emergency evacuation.

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 15

PART 2: PILOT B IS PF

D
FLIGHT

TE
• Same secuence starting with engines Running

IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 16

D
FFS 1- SESSION DATA

TE
FLT NUMBER:

IN
CRJ 800

PR
FLIGHT PLAN :
ORIGIN : LEVC
DESTINATION: LEMD

IF
ALTERNATE : LEAL

ROUTE :
LEVC RWY 30 SID CENTA 7A
PY
CENTA PRADO LEMD RWY 33R STAR PRADO 1D
O
C
CRZ ALTITUDE:
FL 280
D

ALTN FL 150
E
LL

WEATHER:
LEVC 250/17 800mts BKN 800 –RA Ts T8/2 Q 995.
O

LEMD 020/7 KT 3000 HZ SCT 070 7/3 Q100.

TR

WINDS ALOFT: CLB: 180/22 CRS: 200/27 DES: 170/ 19

ATMOSPHERE: ISA
N
O

MASS AND BALANCE:

ZFM: 27500 KGS
C
N

TOTAL FUEL: 4000Kg

U

CENTER OF GRAVITY: 23%

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 17

D
FLAPSº
T.O DATA

TE
ARPT FLT NUMBER V1

IN
RWY PTOW AZFW VR

PR
QNH ATOW TO CG V2 MSA 25NM

OAT T.O N1 FLEX ACC ALT TRANS ALT

Tº N1

IF
WIND CLB N1 F 20º F8º F1º

TRAN ALT MCT N1

PY VFTO
O
NOTES
C
D

FLAPSº
E

T.O DATA
LL

ARPT FLT NUMBER V1

RWY PTOW AZFW VR

O

MSA 25NM
TR

QNH ATOW TO CG V2

OAT T.O N1 FLEX ACC ALT TRANS ALT

N

Tº N1
O

WIND CLB N1 F 20º F8º F1º

C

TRAN ALT MCT N1 VFTO

N

NOTES
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D Recurrent ALL TYPES

Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 18

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C

Intentionally Left Blank

ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 1

D
4.Upgrade :

TE
- Instructors performing Upgrade Training must deliver the following notes to PIC candidates.
Your entire course follows a pre-determined schedule (Footprint) and you will be guided from
beginning to end.

IN
It should be stated right from the start that this course will demand much of your attention, focus and
commitment. It will train you towards being able to perform simple and more complex tasks and

PR
maneuvers at the controls of your aircraft, according to PAS Standard Operating Procedures
(SOP) while developing your management skills and leadership while maintaining good situational
awareness, Crew Resource Management (CRM) and in concert with your fellow pilot.
CRM remains an essential part of this course and you will be expected to apply it in the performance

IF
of your duties as Pilot Flying (PF) and Pilot Monitoring (PM) while acting as a Captain.
You will be required to learn by heart a number of procedures, profiles, responses to a Normal

PY
Checklist, a Take-off Briefing and if applicable certain Immediate Actions. All these are contained in
your Course Documentation or in your Aircraft Flight Manuals.
Make wise use of your time in studying and preparing for this course in every way you possibly can.
O
The objective of PAS Command course is to train cockpit crews to operate the aircraft safely,
efficiently, smoothly, and according to approved Manuals and Procedures acting as a Commander.
C
Completion ensures the standards set by PAS and by ECAA and OGP.
The central part in all successful training is efficient two-way communication between candidates and
D

instructors. Successful training is characterized by instructors giving support and encouragement to

ccandidates through a solution centered approach. Objectivity in evaluation is a core value and
E

fairness is maintained through PAS training committee when remedial training is neded.
LL

Philosophy of the Command Course

The Command course is based on four basic principles:
O

• Systematic approach
TR

• Integration training
• CRM integration
• Training to proficiency
N

CRM / TEM
O

Crew Resource Management and Threat and Error Management skills are integrated in the simulator
part of the training. CRM / TEM issues will be discussed during the briefings and other opportunities
C

depending on crew’s performance.

N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 2

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
D

Intentionally Left Blank

E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 3

D
TE
Course description
The curriculum of the Command course includes both ground and simulator training:

IN
Ground training
The ground training consists of 3 days of GS:

PR
Day 1

CRM SUI (Stand up Instruction) training which includes the following topics:

IF
• Human error and reliability, error chain, error prevention and detection
• Operator safety culture, standard operating procedures (SOPs), organizational factors

PY
• Stress, stress management, fatigue & vigilance
• Information acquisition and processing situation awareness, workload management
• Decision making
O
• Communication and coordination inside and outside the flight crew compartment
• Leadership and team behavior synergy
C
• Automation, philosophy of the use of automation (if relevant to the type)
• Specific type-related differences
•
D

Case studies ( Analysis of several Aviation Accidents)

• Advanced Leadership
E

• CFIT
LL
O

Day 2
TR

SUI (Stand up Instruction) training which includes the following topics:

• Regulatory Structure Review

• Command Responsibilities
N

• Dispatch considerations
•
O

Fuel, WX minima, Alternate Aerodromes and Operational considerations

• High altitude training
C

• Jet Upset & UPRT

N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 4

D
TE
Day 3

SUI (Stand up Instruction) which includes the following topics:

IN
• P.A.S Operations Manual

PR
• Normal, Abnormal, Emergency Procedures (Type Specific)
• Performance and Weight and Balance review (Type Specific)
• Flight Planning (Type Specific)
• 2 Hours of FBS/FTD/IPT to review the following items:

IF
 CM1 Flows
 Cockpit preparation
 Checklists

PY
 Start Malfunctions
 Briefings
 Emergency/ Abnormal Protocol
O
• TS Avoidance & adverse weather
C
• Volcanic Ash
• Windshear
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 5

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
D

Intentionally Left Blank

E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

D
TE
Training Standards

Theoretical Knowledge

IN
PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS STANDARDS

PR
1. System Knowledge

1. Be able to describe and In Classroom 1. Demonstrate good

explain the main parts knowledge of system

IF
and layout of the aircraft In Briefings layouts, component
structure, powerplant and location and
systems as well as limitations.

PY
limitations. 2. Demonstrate good
2. Identify system controls, understanding of
system indications and system operation,
O
annunciations. normal, abnormal and
3. Identify and understand emergency
C
normal, abnormal and procedures.
emergency procedures
associated with the
D

aircraft systems.
E

2. Attitude and Behavior

LL

1. Keeps track of events on In Classroom 1. Has an open mind – by

the ground, in own considering /accepting
O

aircraft, and in the air. In Briefings suggestions from other

2. Copes with rapidly crewmembers.
TR

changing situations or 2. Positive attitude towards

conditions. the job in hand.
3. Follow orders and carries 3. Showing no signs of
N

out all required steps in a complacency.

procedure in proper order. 4. Able to create a positive
O

4. Knows the limitation of atmosphere in training.

own mental capacity. 5. Involves and encourages
C

other crewmembers to
N

participate in problem
solving.
U

6. Shows a good example to

other crew members.

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 7

D
TE
Mass and Balance
PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS STANDARDS

IN
1. Mass and Balance
Knowledge

PR
1. Be able to use and in Classroom. 1. Demonstrate good
calculate Load and Trim understanding of use
sheets in regards to max of Load and Trim
masses for take-off and Sheets.

IF
landing. 2. Demonstrate good
2. Be able to understand knowledge of CG
and explain the CG limitations.

PY
limitations.
2. Attitude and Behavior
O
1. Follow orders and carries In Classroom. 1. Has an open mind –
out all required steps in a by considering
C
procedure in proper order. /accepting suggestions
2. Knows the limitation of from other
D

own mental capacity. crewmembers.

2. Positive attitude
E

towards the job in

hand.
LL

3. Showing no signs of
complacency.
O

4. Able to create a
positive atmosphere in
TR

training.
5. Involves and
encourages other
N

crewmembers to
participate in problem
O

solving.
6. Shows a good
C

example to other
crew members.
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 8

D
Performance, Flight Planning and Monitoring

TE
PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS STANDARDS
1. Performance Knowledge 1. Demonstrate a good

IN
knowledge of
1. Be able to explain and in Classroom. performance

PR
calculate, speeds, calculation.
masses in all conditions 2. Demonstrates good
for take-off, enroute, knowledge were to find
approach, landing and go- relevant information.

IF
around according to 3. Demonstrate good
documents available. knowledge of
2. Understand system understanding system

PY
malfunction and malfunction and
environmental condition environmental
influence on aircraft conditions effect on
performance. performance.
O
3. Understand the concepts 4. Understand and can
C
of Flight Planning and explain the concepts of
Monitoring. Computerized Flight
Plan.
D

3. Attitude and Behavior

E

1. Has an open mind – by

1. Follow orders and carries In Classroom. considering /accepting
LL

out all required steps in a suggestions from other

procedure in proper order. crewmembers.
O

2. Knows the limitation of 2. Positive attitude

own mental capacity. towards the job in
TR

hand.
3. Showing no signs of
complacency.
N

4. Able to create a
positive atmosphere in
O

training.
5. Involves and
C

encourages other
crewmembers to
N

participate in problem
solving.
U

6. Shows a good
example to other
crew members.

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 9

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C

Intentionally Left Blank

ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 10

D
TE
Simulator training - GENERAL.

A standard simulator training session consists of 4 hours of simulator training preceded by a

IN
1½ hour briefing and followed by a 1 hour de-briefing.

Standard Command course;

PR
Simulator training for the standard Command course consists of 3 sessions in total.

CMD 1

IF
Designed to accommodate and build up the candidate´s confidence flying from the left seat.
All technical, non-technical skills and procedures are worked on to develop the pilot´s ability to
fly in normal operation.

PY
All the normal operation is covered including Precision and Non Precision Approaches.
Raw data approaches and elements of the Upset Prevention and Recovery training are
introduced.
O
CMD 2
C

Designed to develop the candidate´s skills dealing with Abnormal and Emergency procedures
integrating the development of all CRM skills and TEM model emphasizing decision making,
D

communication, leadership, situational awareness, task sharing, risk assessment and stress
E

management.
LL

CMD 3

Designed as a LOFT scenario creating a real GATE to GATE operation in which the candidate
O

will be exposed to several Challenges and threats which will have to be managed in real time
using all the resources available and implementing all the Technical, Non-technical skills and
TR

procedures developed during the course.

Examination
N
O

Proficiency Check
A STD Operator proficiency check will be conducted by an authorized Examiner. The
C

knowledge of Technical, Non-technical and Operation according to the P.A.S Standard

Operating procedures will be assessed during the checking session.
N
U

NOTE: PAS Training Dept. have the right to extend one or more sessions to conduct
specific training like UPRT or RHS or ZFTT...etc.

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 11

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C

Intentionally Left Blank

ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 12

D
Simulator Training

TE
FFS CMD1 Session

1. Lesson Objective

IN
• Normal operations from Cockpit preparation through Terminating checks operating the

PR
aircraft from the left seat (Familiarization and accommodation to the left seat)
• Develop the Pilot´s confidence flying raw data approaches from the left seat
• Develop the Pilot´s soft skills including Leadership, situational awareness, task sharing
and decision making

IF
• Night flight operations
• Steep Turns Review

PY
• Stalls
• U P R T
• Raw data ILS procedure
O
• Non precision Approaches
• Missed approach procedures
C
• X wind Landings
D

2. Training Topics
E

a. Briefing
LL

• Selected start malfunctions

O

• Steep Turns Review

• Stalls Review
TR

• UPRT
• ILS approaches
• Non precision Approaches
N

• Missed approach procedures

• X wind landings
O

• Balked landing
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 13

D
b. Study Reference

TE
No Training item and Study reference (Refer to the Type Specific Operating Manuals)

IN
1 Performance calculations for the given conditions

PR
3 Start malfunctions

IF
10 Non Precision approaches with Autopilot

11 Go-around with flight director PY

O
C

12 ILS Manually with flight director

E D
LL

15 Balked Landing
O

18 Crosswind Landing
TR
N

19 Landing, after landing procedure

O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 14

D
3. Proficiency criteria

TE
• The pilot will have successfully completed the lesson by demonstrating through a

IN
knowledge test and practical flying ability, a working knowledge of the items listed above
operating the aircraft from the left seat
• Non precision approaches are introduced and both manual and A/P approaches will be

PR
flow showing good control of the aircraft handling
• Missed approach procedures are consistently well controlled
• All CRM skills should be addressed and reinforced

IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 15

D
4. Flight Data

TE
FLIGHT DATA

IN
ATIS: DEP RWY 24, WIND 15015 3000 OVC006 15/09 1005

PR
FLIGHT PLAN DATA PERFORMANCE

FLT NBR FROM TO ZFW

ID 102 EHAM EHAM

IF
CO RTE ALTN ALTN/CO RTE ZFW CG
- EHRD -

PY
CRZ FL CRZ TEMP CI FOB
60 STD 25
TROPO TRIP WIND TRIP DIST TOW
O
370 180/20 -
C
D

ATC Route:
E

Cruise altitude between FL150 and FL330

LL

EHAM (0.0nm) -SID-> EDUPO (44.3nm) -UZ738-> NAPRO (55.2nm) -Z739->

DEPAD (63.2nm) -T150-> AMOSU (74.9nm) -UZ738-> MISGO (95.9nm) -UZ738->
COL (142.0nm) -T150-> ROLIS (164.7nm) -STAR-> EDDF (202.2nm)
O

Departure rwy: 24
Approach rwy: ILS 27, NDB/ DME 27
TR

EOSID: Climb straight ahead 2000 expect R/V

N
O

PERFORMANCE
C

V1 VR V2 THR FLAPS T/O CG

N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 16

D
5. Lesson Plan

TE
Generic CMD1
Command Course Rev. 01
Lesson Plan Date: 15 DEC 2015

IN
Airport: Environment: Session Length:
AMS

PR
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

1 Performance calculation

2 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, First Flight of the day

IF
3 Engine and Propeller, Start malfunctions

PY
4 Taxiing

5 Before take-off checks

O
6 Y + Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off

7 Turns with and without spoilers

C

8 + Steep turns with 45 Dgr bank 180 Dgr to 360 Dgr left and right
D

Recovery from full stall or after activation of stall warning device, Stalls- Clean, Maneuvering,
9
Landing. UPRT
E

10 + Non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, Full procedure VOR / DME approach

LL

Missed approach procedures, After a non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, Vectors for Ils
11 Y +
App

12 ILS manually, without flight director, Down to DA, Landing full stop
O

13 + Crosswind take-off
TR

14 + ILS manually, with flight director, Night landing

Rejected landing at 50 FT above runway threshold and go-around, Reposition 6 nm final and
15 Y +
repeat the maneuver
N

16 ILS manually, without flight director

O

Normal landings also after an ILS approach with transition to visual flight on reaching DH,
17
Crosswind
C

18 Crosswind landings
N

19 Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

U

20 Landing, Shutdown Procedure

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 17

D
CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5
FLIGHT PREPARATION

TE
1 Performance Calculation
2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks
TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE

IN
3 Normal Take-Offs
4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

PR
5 Rejected Take-Off
6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction
EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures

IF
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures
CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5

PY
FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH
O
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director
C
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
D

15 Circling
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
E

17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

LL

MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
O

LANDING
20 Normal Landings
TR

21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls

22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
N

23 Use of Normal Checklist

24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
O

25 Basic Flying Skills

26 System Knowledge
C

27 Procedure Knowledge
N

28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
U

30 Communication

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 3 4 5

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 18

D
FFS CMD2 Session

TE
1. Lesson Objective

IN
• To Review the Abnormal/Emergency Operation including Abnormal Protocol and use of

PR
QRH acting as a Captain taking into account the development of all CRM skills
• To deal with ECS related failures including Manual Pressurization Procedure and Loss
of Cabin pressure at high altitude and emergency descent
• To perform Rejected take-offs

IF
• To deal with Se procedures including Flame out, Severe Damage, and Fire flying from
the left seat
• To Review Se Missed approach Procedures

PY
• NDB approach with circling
• Windshear
O
• Evacuation Procedures
C
2. Training Topics
D

a. Briefing
E

• CRM Soft Skills

LL

• Auto Press Fail. Manual press control procedure

• Loss of pressurization Emergency Descent
• Rejected take-off procedure
O

• Engine Failure. Single Engine Procedures

TR

• Relight Procedure Engine.

• Engine FIRE immediate actions
• Se app and landing procedures
N

• Identification of Engine Failure/Severe Damage/Engine Fire/Stall Surge

• Windshear
O

• NDB Approach
• Circling
C

• Evacuation Procedure
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 19

D
b. Study Reference

TE
No Training item and Study reference (Refer to the Type Specific Operating Manuals)

IN
1 MMEL ITEM L PACK INOP

PR
3 MANUAL PRSSSURIZATION PROCEDURE

IF
5 NDB Approach

PY
O
6 REJECTED TAKE-OFF
C
D

7-13 SE Procedures. Engine failure after V1, Restart Procedures and Se operations and
profiles
E
LL

14 WINDSHEAR
O
TR

15 ANTI-ICE FAILURE
N

16 CIRCLING PROCEDURES
O
C

19 EVACUATION
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 20

D
3. Proficiency criteria

TE
• The pilot will have successfully completed the lesson by demonstrating through a
knowledge test and practical flying ability, a working knowledge of the items listed above

IN
• Single engine procedures are introduced and the candidate should be able to control the
airplane showing proficiency dealing with engine failures during take-off and missed

PR
approach flying from the left seat
• The candidate must demonstrate good CRM Skills including Leadership,
communication, decision making and situational awareness
• Also the circling profile and procedures have to be known at the end of the session

IF
• Good Leadership, situational awareness, task sharing and decision making have to be
consistently well controlled and managed

PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 21

D
4. Flight Data

TE
FLIGHT DATA

IN
ATIS: RWY 24 270/10 400 –SN OVC010 -5/-7 Q 1003 B/A MEDIUM

PR
PERFORMANCE
FLIGHT PLAN DATA
DATA

FLT NBR FROM TO ZFW

IF
ID 104 EHAM EHAM
CO RTE ALTN ALTN/CO RTE ZFW CG

PY
- EHRD -

CRZ FL CRZ TEMP CI FOB

220 -
O
TROPO TRIP WIND TRIP DIST TOW
C
- - -
E D

ATC Route:
Cruise altitude between FL150 and FL330
LL

EHAM (0.0nm) -SID-> EDUPO (44.3nm) -UZ738-> NAPRO (55.2nm) -Z739->

DEPAD (63.2nm) -T150-> AMOSU (74.9nm) -UZ738-> MISGO (95.9nm) -UZ738->
COL (142.0nm) -T150-> ROLIS (164.7nm) -STAR-> EDDF (202.2nm)
O

Departure rwy: 24
TR

Approach rwy: ILS 27, NDB / Circling 18C / 36C

EOSID: Climb straight ahead to 2000 ft

N

PERFORMANCE
O

V1 VR V2 THR FLAPS T/O CG

C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 22

D
5. Lesson Plan

TE
Generic CMD2
Command Course Rev. 01
Lesson Plan Date: 15 DEC 2015

IN
Airport: Environment: Session Length:

PR
AMS
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

1 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures, L PACK INOP, MEL

2 Y + Instrument take-off, Low Visibility Operation, crosswind

IF
3 Y + Pressurisation and airconditioning, CPC 1+2 , MANUAL PRESS CONTROL

PY
4 Y + Simulated cabin pressure failure/Emergency descend

5 Y + Non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, NDB approach

O
6 + Rejected take-off, Min authorized RVR, Engine failure before V1
C
7 Y + Take-off with simulated engine failure between V1 and V2, Engine Flameout

8 Y + Engine failures, shut-down and restart at safe height

D

Fire drills e.g. Engine, APU, cabin, cargo, flight deck wing and electrical fires incl. Evacuation,
9 Y +
After engine Relight Engine FIRE
E

10 Y + ILS with autopilot, Down to DA, Landing SE

LL

Manual go-around with one engine simulated inoperative after an instrument approach on
11 Y +
reaching DH, MDH, MAPt, Follow missed approach procedure

12 ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, Down to DA

O

13 + Landing with critical engine simulated inoperative, Crosswind, Landing Se

TR

14 + Windshear, T/O

15 Y + Anti and de-icing system. Glare shield heating

N

16 Y + Circling approach, From ILS approach, Reduced visibiilty, Night time

O

17 + Landing
C

18 Rejected take-off, Engine Fire below V1, Unextinguishable

N

Fire drills e.g. Engine, APU, cabin, cargo, flight deck wing and electrical fires incl. Evacuation,
19
Evacuation
U

20 Landing, After landing and shutdown procedures

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 23

D
CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5
FLIGHT PREPARATION

TE
1 Performance Calculation
2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks
TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE

IN
3 Normal Take-Offs
4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

PR
5 Rejected Take-Off
6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction
EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures

IF
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures
CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5

PY
FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH
O
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director
C
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
D

15 Circling
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
E

17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

LL

MISSED APPROACH
18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating
19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
O

LANDING
20 Normal Landings
TR

21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls

22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
N

23 Use of Normal Checklist

24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
O

25 Basic Flying Skills

26 System Knowledge
C

27 Procedure Knowledge
N

28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
U

30 Communication

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 3 4 5

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 24

D
FFS CMD3 Session

TE
LOFT

IN
Line-Oriented Flight Training (LOFT) refers to the use of a training simulator and a well-
structured scenario to simulate the total line operational environment. It is of vital importance for

PR
the effectiveness of LOFT the creation of a strong illusion of reality in the simulated trips.
LOFT involves a complete crew, each member of which operates as an individual and as a
member of a team just as he does during line operations.

IF
The LOFT scenario is constructed so that it provides the highest degree of realism that is
technically, economically, and operationally feasible. The more realistic the situation, the faster
crews will start thinking and reacting as if they were conducting an actual line trip.

PY
Session detail is conducted in real time and is representative of line operations but includes
special emphasis on abnormal situations which involve communications, cockpit resource
management, crew coordination and leadership. The abnormalities which will be encountered
are not pre-briefed. LOFT is, first and foremost, a learning experience therefore problems
O
should not be made unnecessarily complex.
C
After completion of such a session, a thorough debriefing should be made of all aspects. This
may be accomplished by an initial self-debriefing by the crew, followed by the LOFT instructor's.
D

1. Lesson Objective
E
LL

• Build up candidates’ confidence for a safety operation of the aircraft in a demanding

environment
O

• Learn how to deal with high workload situations by having the opportunity to practice
efficient workload management
TR

Managing the workload needs good CRM and specially:

• Strict adherence to SOP's, Task sharing and Callouts for both, normal and
abnormal operations
N

• Appropriate use of automation

O

• Planning and establishing priorities

• Good work organization
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 25

D
2. Training Topics

TE
a. Briefing

IN
The briefing should provide a quick overview of the following aspects:
• Session´s Objectives

PR
• Explanation about how the session will be conducted
• Even though the LOFT is not a check, the instructor should explain the proficiency
criteria for the session
• Review the following Rules:

IF
• Fly, navigate and communicate: in this order and with appropriate task sharing
• Use the appropriate level of automation at all times

PY
• Understand the FMS at all times
• Take action if things do not go as expected

• Explain how and when to communicate with ATC, cabin crew, passengers, company…
O
• Explain what to consider when evaluating the different possible options: Safety, comfort
and economy.
C
D

To conduct the session

E

In order to achieve the highest degree of perceived realism, it is imperative that the instructor
neither intervene nor intrude in any way into the LOFT scenario. Rather than actively
LL

participating in a LOFT scenario, the instructor manages it.

The LOFT session should not be interrupted except in extreme and unusual circumstances.
O

Repositioning the simulator and repeating problems is inconsistent with the principles of LOFT.
Part of the benefit of LOFT is derived from an individual or crew being able to quickly appreciate
TR

the results, either positive or negative, of operational decisions.

Mistakes may well be made, just as they sometimes occur on the line, but the crew must carry
on. To some extent, LOFT is an exercise in "mistake management." Another words Threat and
N

error management.
O

There is frequently no book solution to a LOFT exercise. There may be no "right' solution. The
instructor's role is to manage the training situation, not to "teach" right solutions, nor to "test" the
C

trainees.
N

Instructors should make detailed notes of observations made during the LOFT session so that
they can guide the debriefing appropriately; these notes should be used only for the debriefing.
U

Simulator time left at the end of the LOFT sectors should be used to repeat unsatisfactory
maneuvers or to further practice handling in view of the skill test.

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 26

D
Debriefing

TE
A positive general statement should open the discussion.
Crewmembers should then be encouraged to discuss the operation both as a whole and in
parts.

IN
The role that the instructor plays during the debriefing session is primarily that of moderator.
It is important for the instructor to guide the debriefing session, so that the full range of potential

PR
approaches to the problem is explored, rather than to impose his or her ideas about how the
problems should have been handled.

Referring to his notes, instructor must assure coverage of all aspects of the flight; no single

IF
feature should be permitted to dominate the debriefing.

The instructor should mention possible alternatives, different ways of accomplishing the

PY
objectives.
The instructor should use the facilitation technique to develop discussion; "what if. . . “is a useful
technique for debriefing.
At the appropriate time, the instructor should summarize the debriefing.
O
C
3. Proficiency Criteria
D

• As a crew they must show:

E

• Safe and efficient aircraft operation in a high workload environment. Safety can
never be compromised
LL

• Correct handling of abnormal and/or emergency situations

• Good CRM under complicated situations
O

• As individual pilots they must show a solid knowledge of:

TR

• Standard Operating Procedures

• Task Sharing
N

• Standard callouts
• Aircraft systems
O

• Standard ATC phraseology

C

After session completion the candidate must be ready for the Proficiency Check.
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 27

D
4. Flight Data

TE
FLIGHT DATA

IN
ATIS: 220/5 0500 FG VV100 12/12 1035

PR
INIT PAGE INIT B PAGE

FLT NBR FROM TO ZFW

ID 108 EHAM EGLL TBD

IF
CO RTE ALTN ALTN/CO RTE ZFW CG
- EGKK -

PY
CRZ FL CRZ TEMP CI FOB
240 STD 35
TROPO TRIP WIND TRIP DIST TOW
O
- 220/20 205
C
D

ATC Route:
E

Cruise altitude between FL150 and FL330

EHAM (0.0nm) -SID-> GORLO (63.1nm) -L980-> REFSO (83.0nm) -UL980->
LL

XAMAN (99.5nm) -UL980-> LOGAN (122.4nm) -STAR-> EGLL (201.4nm)

Departure rwy: 24
O
TR

EOSID: Climb straight ahead to 3000 ft expect R/V

N

PERFORMANCE
O

V1 VR V2 THR FLAPS T/O CG

C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 28

D
5. Lesson Plan

TE
Generic CMD3
Command Course Rev. 01
Lesson Plan Date: 15 DEC 2015

IN
Airport: Environment: Session Length:
FRA

PR
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

1 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures

2 Before take-off checks, Engine Start Procedures

IF
3 Taxiing

4 Y + Instrument take-off

5 Y +

PY
Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow SID
O
6 Y + Climb to Cruise Level

7 Y + Aircraft systems
C

8 Y + Holding procedures
D

9 Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow ATC instructions
E

10 Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow STAR
LL

11 Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Precision/Non Precision APP

12 Y + Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

O

13 + Landing, Shutdown Procedure

TR

14 Terminating Procedure

15 PFC REVIEW
N

16 + Steep turns with 45 Dgr bank 180 Dgr to 360 Dgr left and right
O

17 Windshear, On take-off and final

C

18 Engine and Propeller, Engine Flame out, Engine Fire and Reverse Unklocked
N

19 ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, Down to DA, SE go arounds
U

20 Emergency procedures, Emergency Landing, EVACUATION

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 29

D
CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5
FLIGHT PREPARATION

TE
1 Performance Calculation
2 Cockpit Inspection and Before Take-Off Checks
TAKE-OFF / DEPARTURE

IN
3 Normal Take-Offs
4 Take-Off with Simulated Engine Failure

PR
5 Rejected Take-Off
6 Adherence to Departure and Arrival Routes and ATC Instruction
EVENTS
7 Aircraft Systems, Normal Procedures

IF
8 Aircraft Systems, Abnormal Procedures
9 Emergency Procedures
CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5

PY
FLIGHT
10 Holding Procedures
APPROACH
O
11 Precision Approach, Manually without Flight Director
12 Precision Approach, Manually with Flight Director
C
13 Precision Approach with Autopilot
14 Non-Precision Approach
D

15 Circling
16 Precision Approach, Man., w. Flight Director and One Eng. Inop.
E

17 Precision Approach with Autopilot and One Engine Inoperative

MISSED APPROACH
LL

18 Go-Around with All Engines Operating

19 Go-Around with One Engine Inoperative
O

LANDING
20 Normal Landings
TR

21 Landings with Malfunctions Affecting Flight Controls

22 Landing with One Engine Inoperative
GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION
N

23 Use of Normal Checklist

24 Use of Malfunction and Emergency Checklist / QRH
O

25 Basic Flying Skills

26 System Knowledge
C

27 Procedure Knowledge
N

28 CRM
29 Pilot Non-Flying / Pilot Monitoring Performance
U

30 Communication

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 3 4 5

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 OM Part D UPGRADE ALL
TYPES
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 30

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
O
C
D

Intentionally Left Blank

E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 1

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
Instructor Course
O
C
ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 2

D
TE
IN
Introduction to the Instructor Course

PR
You are about to begin one of the most important phases of your aeronautical career to be an
instructor for future pilots.

Your entire course follows a pre-determined schedule (footprint) and you will be guided

IF
from beginning to end by your instructors.

It should be stated right from the start that this course will demand much of your attention, focus
PY
and commitment. It will train you towards being able to teach complex tasks, maneuvers and
procedures according to Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) in an aeronautical Crew
Resource Management (CRM) environment.
O
CRM remains as one of the most important part of this course and you will be expected to
C

deliver training in classroom lectures, training devices and FFS under these concepts.

As an instructor, you may start training in Ground School; Computer-Based Training

D

(CBT), tutorials in classrooms and Mockup or Cockpit panels.

E
LL

We wish you an unforgettable learning experience and hope you will enjoy our Training Center
and all that it has to offer.
-o0o-
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 3

Course objective:

D
The course has been designed to give adequate training to the applicant for a SFI and TRI
certificate, in theoretical knowledge instruction, which includes teaching and learning

TE
instruction and technical training, and synthetic flight instruction.

The privileges of the holder of a TRI (Type Rating Instructor) certificate are to instruct license

IN
holders for the issue, revalidation or renewal of a multi-pilot airplane type rating, and the
instruction required for multi-crew co-operation.

PR
The privileges of the holder of a SFI (Synthetic Flight Instructor) certificate are to deliver
synthetic flight instruction for the issue, revalidation, and renewal of type rating for multi-pilot
aero planes and multi-crew co-operation.

IF
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 4

D
Philosophy of the SFI/TRI course
The SFI/TRI course is based on five principles:

TE
• Systematic approach
• Integration training in all phases

IN
• CRM/TEM integration
• Training to proficiency

PR
• Learn how to teach

CRM/TEM integration
Crew resource management and treat and error management skills are integrated in the

IF
simulator part of the training. CRM/TEM issues will be discussed during the briefings and other
opportunities depending on crew performance.
PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 5

Training to proficiency

D
Throughout the training the goal is to teach the trainees how to teach their future trainees in
a safely and efficiently in accordance with approved procedures.

TE
Learn how to teach

IN
During this course the trainee will learn how to teach different levels and profiles of trainees
for any type of course recognized in the certificate expired at the end of the course.

PR
Course description

IF
Part 1
Ground School Training PY
Teaching fundamentals and how to teach ( learning factors )
O
C

Part 2
D

Ground School training

E

Technical Theoretical Knowledge instruction (technical training) enable the TRI/SFI to instruct
LL

the technical theoretical knowledge syllabus.

Part 3
O

Simulator training
TR

The applicant for a TRI (A) / SFI (A) certificate should be taught and made familiar with the
device, its limitations, capabilities and safety features and the instructor station, including
N

emergency evacuation.
O

(Simulator checking) The applicant for a TRI (A) / SFI (A) certificate shall pass an Assessment
C

of Competence in the appropriate aircraft category to demonstrate to an examiner the ability

to instruct to a student pilot to the level required for the issue of the relevant license, rating or
N

certificate.
U

By the end of the course instructor trainees will be able:

• To recognize the need for adequate subject knowledge
• To learn how to make adequate preparation for the conduct of training
• To develop their confidence to use different training techniques

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 6

• To learn how to develop effective relationships with trainees

• To clearly define the objectives of a training session
• To understand trainees needs & how they want to be trained

D
• To transfer information and key messages effectively and efficiently

TE
• To manage a training session appropriately
• To understand the subject of human factors
• To learn how to manage CRM issues on training sessions

IN
• To be able to manage difficult situations and people effectively
• To assess a trainees performance against a defined standard

PR
• To recognize the importance of making adequate progress reports
• To know how to continuously develop their own training skills

IF
By the end of the course instructor trainees will have learnt how to teach at least the following
normal, abnormal and emergency topics:

•
•
Engine failure on take-off
Engine failure in cruise
PY
• Evacuation
O
• Go around at MDA
• Go around at high altitude
C

• Stabilized approach
• Emergency descent
D

• Diversion to alternate
• ACAS
E

• Windshear
•
LL

Fuel system
• Electrical system
• Hydraulic system
O

• Flight controls
• Navigation
TR

• Flight techniques
• Automatisms
• Landings techniques
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 7

Ground Training
Day 1, 2, 3 and 4 - Ground School sessions - Teaching and Learning.
( Transport Canada Flight Instructor Guide ) or Egyptian Leaders Preparation Course.

D
TE
25 hours of instructional techniques including learning process, teaching process, training
philosophies and techniques applied to instruction, student evaluation and testing,
training program development, human performance and limitations relevant to flight

IN
instruction and training administration.

PR
Days 4 and 5 - Ground School sessions - Technical theoretical knowledge instruction.

10 hours of technical training including revision of technical knowledge, preparation of

lesson plans and the development of classroom/simulator instructional skills to enable the

IF
TRI/SFI to instruct the technical theoretical knowledge syllabus.

PY
The type rating theoretical syllabus should be used to develop the TRI/SFI’s teaching skills in
relation to the type technical course syllabus. The course instructor should deliver example
lectures from the applicable type technical syllabus and the candidate instructor should
O
prepare and deliver lectures on topics selected by the course instructor from the type rating
course.
C

Instructional skills related on assessing threat and error management and CRM will be part
D

of the TRI/SFI course. Particular attention should be given to multi-crew cooperation in

E

order to develop the technical and non-technical components of the knowledge, skills and
attitudes required to operate a multi-crew aircraft.
LL

TEM, CRM and the appropriate use of behavioral markers should be integrated throughout the
O

course.
TR

Simulator Training
N

Days 6, 7 and 8 - Simulator Training sessions - Flight Instruction.

O

10 hours of flight instruction on the simulator representing the aircraft which includes right hand
C

seat familiarization, aero plane training techniques, abnormal and emergency procedures and
maneuvers.
N

The applicant for a TRI/SFI certificate should be taught and made familiar with giving
U

instruction from the instructor station. In addition, the applicant for a TRI/SFI should be taught
and made familiar with giving instruction from all operating positions, including demonstrations
of appropriate handling exercises.
Training courses should be developed to give the applicant experience in training a variety of
exercises, covering both normal and abnormal operations. The syllabus should be tailored

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 8

appropriate to the airplane type, using exercises considered more demanding for the student.
This should include engine-out handling and engine-out operations in addition to representative
exercises from the type transition course.

D
The applicant should be required to plan, brief, train and debrief sessions using all relevant

TE
training techniques.

Day 9 - Simulator checking session - Flight Instruction.

IN
The applicant for a TRI / SFI certificate will pass an assessment of competence under

PR
the supervision of a certified Examiner.

Flight Instruction

IF
Simulator Training
PY
Instructor will play the role of the CM1 or CM2 as a PF and PM according lesson description.
It is assumed that the instructor when playing as a crewmember will have different knowledge
of the plane according the role that he is supposed to perform in each part of the session.
O

The other crewmember seat will be occupy by another trainee, in case the course would be
C

composed by 2 trainees, if the course only has 1 trainee it would be necessary a Seat
Support.
D

In order to provide the best service for the trainee, it is really important to exercise
E

different situations during Simulator Training. It is clear that not every pilot is proficiently
LL

perfect. As humans, we are continuously making mistakes during the operation. The main
objective of every training is tending those errors to zero.
O

The instructor will simulate different crewmember behaviors, with some threats/errors, to
see how the trainee reacts and manages the situation. As trainee he will have to recognize
TR

the threats that could lead to situations out of the Normal Procedures.

The Instructor/Seat Support will perform some threats during the session, acting as
N

CM1/CM2/CABIN CREW/ATC with the purpose of seeing, detecting and correcting

the Trainee’s reaction and abilities.
O

The trainee will be expected to prepare the simulator briefing, during which the instructor will
C

examine selected topics relevant to the simulator session. The trainee will prepare the briefing
for each simulator session. He or she is expected to use all relevant manuals
N

(PRM/AFM/FCOM; QRH; Specific course document) and the briefing presentation as a guide.
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 9

The purpose of this exercise is to practice briefing technique and make any refinements prior
to the final briefing for FFS 1 to be given prior to the session.
Remember that each briefing topic should be short and concise and never more than 20

D
minutes.

TE
The instructor will analyze these briefings and provide feedback to the trainee prior to
the Simulator session.

IN
During the simulator session the instructor will display a range of abilities and behaviors,
consistent with the role adopted for the session. Errors, failures or deviations from the SOP
observed by the trainee should be analyzed, corrected and instructed. The trainee should

PR
concentrate on root error causes and deficiencies of technique and not simply offer advice to
correct the error symptom.

The instructor or the Seat Support under the order of the instructor will adopt some different

IF
Role Play in each trainee session, acting as a PF or PM.

During the sessions the trainee will be required to demonstrate procedures and maneuvers, to
PY
provide analysis/feedback and write a clear objective report. The instructor will provide
technique training and feedback for the trainee.
O
The trainee will plan the session and order of events as appropriate according the Lesson
C

Plan. On completion of the simulator exercise, the trainee will perform the debrief using his
D

writing handover notes. The instructor will then debrief the trainee.
E

The emphasis throughout will be on quality of instruction, the accuracy of analysis, and the
LL

relevance of any remedial action recommended by the trainee.

Simulator Operation
O

Remind the trainees that the simulator is the most powerful tool available to the instructor, and
TR

if used incorrectly has the ability to demoralize and destroy the trainee. Many trainees are
apprehensive of simulators, due to past experiences, and the trainee must do everything
possible to utilize the device in a positive manner so as to encourage and develop student
N

skills. Explain the value of simulator session guides, but point out that they must learn the
fundamentals of simulator operation first.
O

The trainee will learn to operate, use and manage the following:
C

• Approvals and Documentation

N

• Role
•
U

Design, including safety systems

• Limitations. No combinations of failures, respect Training Program IOS. The basic key
points, CONT LOADING / MOTION / SOUND / MAPs / COMMs and non-basic
functions
– key points. MASTER INDEX / INIT, REPOS / SPEED UP / RESETs / SNAPSHOT /
HARD COPY

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 10

• Safety Briefing:
o 1. How to stop the simulator (Hydraulics/Electrics)

D
o 2. Location of fire extinguisher
o 3. Location of emergency exits

TE
o 4. Escape routes
o 5. How to call maintenance

IN
• Setting up
o Cleaning headsets and masks

PR
o Initial IOS setup subject to session requirements
o Use of harnesses, headsets, sound, motion

• Session Conduct

IF
o Use of FREEZE functions, speed up functions, instructor responsibility during
REPOS, setting the scene after REPOS should be avoided as much as
possible in order to create a realistic flight session
o Appropriate commentary
o Need for breaks
PY
o Time management
O
o Ending the session
o Resets
C

o Journey Log

Simulator seating with 1 or 2 trainees

D

There can be several conditions depending on the number of TRI trainees presented for
E

the course:
LL

1) Two trainees. Standard and optimal crew

2) One trainee. This condition should be avoided. The use of a SEAT SUPPORT is needed
O

In FFS 1: Instructor will teach both trainees a brief use of the IOS before starting the session.
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 11

Simulator seating in FFS 1:

D
Case 1: Crew 2 trainees

TE
• Trainee A & B will attend for 30 minutes the explanations of the instructor related to
the IOS
• Trainee A will perform 01:30 hours flight from de right seat as pilot flying

IN
• Trainee B will operate the IOS
• Instructor will help trainee B with IOS and will play the role of a captain

PR
under supervision from the left seat
• The next 2 hours flight trainee A and B will interchange positions and roles

Case 2: Crew 1 trainee and 1 Seat Support

IF
• Trainee will attend for 30 minutes the explanations of the instructor related to the IOS
• Trainee will operate the IOS during this 01:30 hours flight
PY
• Instructor will help trainee with IOS and will act as a captain under supervision from
the left seat
• Seat Support will flight from de right seat as pilot flying
O
• Next 2 hours flight trainee will be the pilot flying from the right seat, Seat Support
will occupy the left seat as a captain under supervision and instructor will operate
C

the IOS
D

Simulator seat in FFS 2:

E

Case 1: Crew 2 trainees

LL

• Trainee B will perform this 2 hours flight from de left seat as pilot flying
• Trainee A will operate the IOS
O

• Instructor will help trainee A with IOS and will play the role of a F/O under
supervision from the right seat
TR

• Next 2 hours flight trainee A and B will interchange positions and roles

Case 2: Crew 1 trainee and 1 Seat Support

N

• Trainee will perform this 2 hours flight from de left seat as pilot flying
O

• Instructor will operate the IOS

• Seat Support will play the role of a F/O under supervision from the right seat
C

• Next two hours Trainee will operate the IOS, instructor will occupy the right seat as
N

a F/O under supervision and Seat Support will act as captain from the left seat as
pilot
U

flying

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 12

Simulator seat in FFS 3:

D
Case 1: Crew 2 trainees

TE
• Trainee B will operate the IOS
• Trainee A will perform this 1 hour flight from de right seat as pilot flying
• Instructor will help trainee B with IOS and will play the role of a captain

IN
under supervision from the left seat
• Next hour flight trainee A and B will interchange positions and roles

PR
Case 2: Crew 1 trainee and 1 Seat Support

• Trainee will perform this 1 hour flight from the IOS

IF
• Instructor will act as a captain from the left seat as a flying pilot
• Seat Support will play the role of a F/O under supervision from the right seat
• Next hour Instructor will operate the IOSPY
• Trainee will be the pilot flying from the right seat
• Seat Support will act as a captain under supervision from the left seat
O
Simulator seating with 3 trainees
C

This case will be explained by instructor in detail, adapting it to the profile of the trainees.
D

10. Examination
E

A 4 hours Assessment of Competence per trainee at the end of the course under the
supervision of a SFE or TRE senior will be the final exam.
LL

11. Grading
O

As per legal requirements, the training will be recorded with the fulfillment of the following
TR

documents:

1) PAS Training Records

N

2) ECAR required forms and documents

O

Once finalized the course satisfactorily, PAS will issue the corresponding certificate.
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 13

SFI / TRI Instructor Course

Total duration of the SFI/TRI course is (without breaks):

D
• 9 course days for 1 trainee

TE
• 10 course days for 2 trainees
• 12 course days for 3 trainees

IN
All above includes Assessment session(s).

Teaching and Learning

PR
The teaching and learning part of the SFI/TRI consists of the following:

Classroom lectures and workshops 25 hrs

IF
Technical Theoretical Knowledge Instruction
PY
The technical theoretical knowledge instruction part of the SFI/TRI Course consists of the following:

Classroom lectures and workshops 10

O
hrs
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 14

SFI/TRI Theoretical Knowledge Training Program

D
Time Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5

TE
Intro Learning Client Hazards
1 Process Evaluation During Technical

Learning and Flight Theoretical

IN
2 Process The Testing Knowledge
Teaching Training Training Instruction

PR
3 Process Program Administration
Development
4 Human

IF
Perf and Technical
5 Training Limitations Theoretical
Philosophies Threat and
PY Knowledge
6 Techniques Error Instruction
of Applied Management
O
7 Instruction
C
D

- Instructor led activities

E

Note: The table only indicates study days. During ground training weekend days are off days.
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 15

Simulator training program

Simulator training for the SFI/TRI Course with 1-2 trainees consists of;

D
3 Pre-flight briefings of 1:30 hrs each 4.5

TE
2 Sessions of 4:00 hrs each 8 hrs
1 Session of 2:00 hrs 2 hrs
3 De-briefings of 1:00 hrs each 3 hrs

IN
Simulator training program
Simulator training for the SFI/TRI Course with 3 trainees consists of;

PR
4 Pre-flight briefings of 1:30 hrs each 6
4 Sessions of 4:00 hrs each 16 hrs
4 De-briefings of 1:00 hrs each 4 hrs

IF
Assessment of Competence
Assessment of competence for the SFI/TRI Course consists of;

1 Pre-flight briefing of 1:30 hrs each

PY 1.5
1 Session of 4:00 hrs each 4 hrs
1 De-briefing of 1:00 hrs each 1 hrs
O
Note: The Assessment of Competence session of this course consists of 1 FFS session of 4 hours per trainee.
C

Important note: These sessions do not include the mandatory Proficiency Check for SFI’s (not part of this
D

course).
E
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 16

SFI/TRI Simulator Training Program for 1-2 trainees

D
Time Day 6 Day 7 Day 8

TE
BRIEFING BRIEFING BRIEFING
1

IN
2
INST 3

PR
3
INST 1 INST 2
4 DE BRIEF

IF
5

6 DE BRIEF DE BRIEF
PY
O
C

SFI/TRI Simulator Training Program for 3 trainees

Time Day 6 Day 7 Day 8 Day 9

D

BRIEFING BRIEFING BRIEFING BRIEFING

E

1
LL

2
O

3
TR

INST 1 INST 2 INST 3 INST 4

4
N

5
O
C

6 DE BRIEF DE BRIEF DE BRIEF DE BRIEF

N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 17

SFI/TRI Assessment of Competence

D
Time Day 7

TE
BRIEFING
1

IN
2

PR
3 Assessment
of
4 Competence

IF
5

6 DE BRIEF
PY
O
Note: The Assessment of Competence session of this course consists of 1 FFS session of 4 hours per trainee.
C

Important note: These sessions do not include the mandatory Proficiency Check for SFI’s (not part of this

course).
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 18

Teaching and Technical Simulator Assessment of

Courses
Learning Theoretical Sessions Competence

D
TE
SFI/TRI for 1 trainee 3.5 days 1.5 days 10 hours 1 session

IN
SFI/TRI for 2 trainees 3.5 days 1.5 days 10 hours 2 sessions

PR
SFI/TRI for 3 trainees 3.5 days 1.5 days 16 hours 3 sessions

IF
PY
O
C
DE
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 19

Technical Theoretical Knowledge instruction Syllabus:

D
• The technical theoretical knowledge instruction should comprise of not less than 10

TE
hours training to include the revision of technical knowledge, the preparation of
lesson plans and the development of classroom instructional skills to enable the TRI
(A) to instruct the technical theoretical knowledge syllabus

IN
• If a TRI (A) certificate for MP aeroplanes is sought, particular attention should be

PR
given to multi-crew cooperation. If a TRI (A) certificate for SP aeroplanes is sought,
particular attention should be given to the duty in SP operations

• The type rating theoretical syllabus should be used to develop the TRI (A)’s teaching

IF
skills in relation to the type technical course syllabus. The course instructor should
deliver example lectures from the applicable type technical syllabus and the candidate
instructor should prepare and deliver lectures on topics selected by the course
instructor from the type rating coursePY
General
O
The course has been designed to give adequate training to the applicant for a SFI and TRI
C

certificate, in theoretical knowledge instruction, which includes teaching and learning

instruction and technical training, and synthetic flight instruction in order to instruct for any
multi-pilot airplane type rating for which the applicant is qualified.
D

By the end of the course trainees will be able to:

E

• Recognize the need for adequate subject knowledge

LL

• Learn how to make adequate preparation for the conduct of training

• Develop their confidence to use different training techniques
• Learn how to develop effective relationships with trainees
O

• Clearly define the objectives of a training session

• Understand student’s needs & how they want to be trained
TR

• Transfer information and key messages effectively and efficiently

• Manage a training session appropriately
• Understand the subject of human factors
N

• Learn how to manage CRM issues on training sessions

O

• Be able to manage difficult situations and people effectively

• Assess a trainees performance against a defined standard
C

• Recognize the importance of making adequate progress reports

• Know how to continuously develop their own training skills
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 20

Structure

D
03:00 hours

TE
The trainee will learn the objectives, the structure and the study materials for this course. It is
one of the most important part and should be understood correctly by the trainee.

IN
The trainee will learn how to develop a class putting together all previous knowledge learned
during the teaching and learning process.

PR
The instructor will give a master class using any topic included in a Type Rating Course, focus
in detail in how to make the presentation and going deeper in content.

IF
At the end of the class the Instructor will assign different topics from those included in a Type
Rating Course to trainees in order to prepare them before starting the next part of the course.

07:00 hours PY
Trainee will prepare presentations using the systems of the aircraft type and from the topics
O
included in the briefing of the FFS sessions of a Type Rating Course.
C

Workshop (02:00 hours)

The instructor will teach the trainees how to prepare a presentation following these 7 steps:
D

1. Student knowledge level ( threshold knowledge )

E

2. Look for documentation

LL

3. Extract and summarize

4. Preparation of the presentation
5. Use of training aids
O

6. Application of learning and teaching technics

7. Time management
TR

Workshop (05:00 hours)

N

Trainees will develop presentations following the steps used by the instructor in the previous
Workshop.
O

Instructor will debrief the presentation.

C

NOTE: the number of presentations done by trainees will depend on the number of trainees.
N

The instructor will divide the 5 hours class among the trainees in order to get a proportional
U

workload

During the trainees presentation the instructor will assume some different role plays in order to
challenge the trainee as a bad student, disturbing the others, asking stupid questions, etc.

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 21

LESSON DESCRIPTION - OVERVIEW

D
TE
1. Lesson Objective

IN
• The lesson objectives contains the most essential parts of the session

PR
2. Training Topics

a. Briefing
• The Briefing sections contain information to the clients of which areas will be

IF
discussed during the briefing. Trainees should come prepared to the briefing and
be prepared to answer questions in the described areas.
PY
The sections provides more general subject than described in the study reference

b. Study Reference
O
• The Study Reference section provides references in the related manuals specific to
each individual Maneuver and Procedure. Clients should use these references to
C

find information in the manuals in preparation for the simulator session

• References to FCOM Normal procedures are only given when a new procedure is
D

introduced. Supplementary procedures are referred to whenever they are used

E

• Not all parts of a sim session have reference items, this can be because the item
has been covered extensively previously in the training or that no specific reference
LL

exists
• References are given to a specific chapter and /or named segment of a procedure,
O

checklist or maneuver. Clients are expected to actively look for information that
prepares them for the session and the references are guidelines and a good starting
TR

point but not a complete base for preparation. Reading the references provides a
minimum level of preparation for the session
• Only references to Aircraft manufacturer’s documents are provided. If the course is
N

conducted using airline specific procedures no references to those are provided and
O

clients must find the information on their own. The references will still provide good
reading but must be supplemented with the airline specific procedures and policies
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 22

3. Proficiency criteria

D
The proficiency criteria specify to what level of performance a Client is expected to
perform to in order to progress further in the course. Normally the reference throughout

TE
the simulator phase is to the Course Training Standards which are described separately.
Sometimes there will be plane text information to highlight specific performance criteria
such as on phase checks.

IN
4. Flight Data

PR
The Flight Data chapter contains basic weather, FMS input and performance calculations
(if applicable) specific to each simulator session. This enables the trainee to perform the
preflight procedure with little input from the instructor.

IF
Use of the Flight Data segment may vary depending on the Airlines use of performance tool.

PY
O
C
E D
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 23

INST 1 Session

D
1. Lesson Objective

TE
• Learn how to use:
o IOS handling

IN
• Practice how to teach:
o Briefing preparation

PR
o Preliminary Cockpit preparation
o Crew Coordination on ground
o FMS set-up
o Taxi technics

IF
o Policy of flaps setting
o Automatic flight
o Manual flight PY
o Non precision approach
o GA
o Visual circuit pattern
O
o Crosswind landing
C

2. Training Topics
D

a. Briefing
E

• FFS 1 overview
•
LL

Safety measures of the simulator

• Use of oxygen mask
• Pilot seat position, visual references, flight technics and seat belts
O

• Taxi CRM policies

• Fly, navigate and communicate
TR

• Visual circuit pattern

b. Study Reference
N
O

FCOM, QRH, PRM, OM,Training

Manual
C

3. Proficiency criteria
N
U

• According to ECAR grading requirements

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 24

4. Flight Data

D
FLIGHT DATA

TE
ATIS: EHAM 240/10 CAVOK 15/12 1015 RWY DRY

IN
FLIGHT PLAN DATA PERFORMANCE

PR
FLT NBR FROM TO ZFW
ID 401 EHAM EDDF -

CO RTE ALTN ALTN/CO-RTE ZFW CG

IF
- EDDL - -

CRZ FL CRZ TEMP PY CI FOB

190 ISA +20 100 -

TROPO TRIP WIND TRIP DIST TOW

O
350 HD 010 205 -
C

ATC Route:
D

Forecasted:
EHAM 24 Arnem 2S departure. Arnem DCT Soneb DCT Rolis. EDDF Rolis 1R arrival.
E
LL

Conditions:
AIR COND ON.
O

EOSID: Climb straight ahead to 2000 ft.

TR

PERFORMANCE
N

V1 VR V2 THR FLAPS T/O-CG

O

- - - - - -
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 25

5. Lesson Plan

D
Generic INST1
SFI/TRI Instructor Course Rev. 02

TE
Lesson Plan Date: 26 MAY 2015

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

IN
EHAM Day time 02:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

PR
1 Cockpit inspection, Preflight Procedures

2 Cockpit inspection, Before Start Procedures

IF
3 Performance calculation

4 Use of checklist

5 Taxiing, Before taxi procedures

PY
6 Taxiing, Procedures
O
7 Taxiing, Taxi checklist
C

8 Before take-off checks

D

9 Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off

E

10 Y Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow SID
LL

11 + Autopilot/Flight director, AP and ATHR OFF

Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow ATC instructions, Return
12 +
O

to EHAM

13 + Non-precision-approach down to MDH/A, Full procedure NDB / DME approach

TR

14 + Missed approach procedures, After a non-precision-approach down to MDH/A

N

15 -O- Flight Manoeuvres, Visual circuit´s

O

16 Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

C

17
N

18
U

19

20

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 26

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5

BRIEFING PREPARATION
1 Preparation

D
2 Explanation

TE
3 Attitude
4 Time management
5 Teaching techniques

IN
6 Tools used
7 Body language

PR
8 Leaving the briefing room
SIMULATOR PREPARATION
9 Safety briefing

IF
10 Preparation
11 Use of IOS
INSTRUCTING FROM CM1 PSN PY
12 Aircraft Systems in Normal Procedures
13 Aircraft Systems in Abnormal Procedures
14 Emergency Procedures
O
INSTRUCTING FROM CM2 PSN
C

15 Aircraft Systems in Normal Procedures

16 Aircraft Systems in Abnormal Procedures
D

17 Emergency Procedures
INSTRUCTING FROM IOS PSN
E

18 Realism
LL

19 Time management
20 Notes
21
O

Teaching techniques
DE-BRIEFING PREPARATION
TR

22 Preparation
23 Use of notes
24 Structure
N

25 Time management
O

26 Teaching techniques
27 Paper work
C

GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION

28 Co-operation
N

29 Situational awareness
U

30 Objectives

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 3 4 5

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 27

INST 2 Session

D
1. Lesson Objective

TE
• Learn how to use:
o IOS handling

IN
• Practice how to teach in abnormal and emergency operation:
o Briefing preparation

PR
o Taxi under low visibility
o Rejected take-off at low speed
o Rejected take-off ay high speed
o Evacuation

IF
o Engine failure on take-off
o Flight path to be selected with one engine out
o Fuel problems PY
o Policy of engine re-start
o ILS approach
o GA at low altitude
O
2. Training Topics
C

a. Briefing
D

• FFS 2 overview
E

• LVP take-off
LL

• Rejected take-off low and high speed

• Evacuation
• Engine failure on take-off criteria and procedure
O

• ILS approach
• GA
TR

b. Study Reference
N

FCOM, QRH, PRM, OM, Training

O

Manual
C

3. Proficiency criteria
N

• According to ECAR grading requirements

U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 28

4. Flight Data

D
FLIGHT DATA

TE
ATIS: EDDF 050/05 RVR 200 FOG 02/01 1003 RWY WET

IN
FLIGHT PLAN DATA PERFORMANCE

PR
FLT NBR FROM TO ZFW
ID 402 EDDF EHAM -

CO RTE ALTN ALTN/CO-RTE ZFW CG

IF
- EDDL - -

CRZ FL CRZ TEMP PY CI FOB

180 ISA -20 20 -

TROPO TRIP WIND TRIP DIST TOW

O
350 HD 010 205 -
C

ATC Route:
D

Forecasted:
EDDF 07R BIBTI 2R departure to EHAM 18L REKKEN 2A arrival.
E
LL

Conditions:
AIR COND ON.
O

EOSID: Climb straight ahead to 2000 ft.

TR

PERFORMANCE
N

V1 VR V2 THR FLAPS T/O-CG

O

- - - - - -
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 29

5. Lesson Plan

D
Generic INST2
SFI/TRI Instructor Course Rev. 02

TE
Lesson Plan Date: 26 MAY 2015

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

IN
EDDF Night time 02:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

PR
1 Before take-off checks

2 Y Rejected take-off, Low Visibility Operation

Fire drills e.g. Engine, APU, cabin, cargo, flight deck wing and electrical fires incl. Evacuation,

IF
3
Fire in landing gear due to high temperatures when braking
Take-off with simulated engine failure between V1 and V2, Engine Flameout, Due to fuel
4 Y +
contamination

5 Y Y +
PY
Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow ATC instructions

6 Y Y + Engine failures, shut-down and restart at safe height, Engine re-start

O
7 Y Y + Engine failures, shut-down and restart at safe height, Engine flameout due to fuel contamination
C

8 Y Y + ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative

D

Manual go-around with one engine simulated inoperative after an instrument approach on
9 Y +
reaching DH, MDH, MAPt, Follow ATC instructions, GA due to an airplane on runway
E

10 Y + ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, Down to DA

LL

11 Y + Landing with critical engine simulated inoperative, Crosswind

12 Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

O

13
TR

14
N

15
O

16
C

17
N

18
U

19

20

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 30

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5

BRIEFING PREPARATION
1 Preparation

D
2 Explanation

TE
3 Attitude
4 Time management
5 Teaching techniques

IN
6 Tools used
7 Body language

PR
8 Leaving the briefing room
SIMULATOR PREPARATION
9 Safety briefing

IF
10 Preparation
11 Use of IOS
INSTRUCTING FROM CM1 PSN PY
12 Aircraft Systems in Normal Procedures
13 Aircraft Systems in Abnormal Procedures
14 Emergency Procedures
O
INSTRUCTING FROM CM2 PSN
C

15 Aircraft Systems in Normal Procedures

16 Aircraft Systems in Abnormal Procedures
D

17 Emergency Procedures
INSTRUCTING FROM IOS PSN
E

18 Realism
LL

19 Time management
20 Notes
21
O

Teaching techniques
DE-BRIEFING PREPARATION
TR

22 Preparation
23 Use of notes
24 Structure
N

25 Time management
O

26 Teaching techniques
27 Paper work
C

GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION

28 Co-operation
N

29 Situational awareness
U

30 Objectives

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 3 4 5

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 31

INST 3 Session

D
1. Lesson Objective

TE
• Learn how to use:
o IOS handling

IN
• Learn how to use:
o IOS handling

PR
• Prepare and deliver a FFS session with some of the following unexpected events:
o Briefing preparation
o Passenger heart attack
o Crewmember incapacitation

IF
o Cockpit organization
o Communications
o ACAS PY
o Circling from ILS

2. Training Topics
O
a. Briefing
C

• FFS 3 overview
D

• Crewmember incapacitation
• CRM:
E

o Select at least two CRM situations caused by unexpected events

LL

• ACAS
• Circling
O

b. Study Reference
TR

FCOM, QRH, Training Manual Part

4.9
N

3. Proficiency criteria
O

•
C

According to ECAR grading requirements

N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 32

4. Flight Data

D
FLIGHT DATA

TE
ATIS: EDDF 300/25 CAVOK 20/2 1020 RWY WET

IN
FLIGHT PLAN DATA PERFORMANCE

PR
FLT NBR FROM TO ZFW
ID 403 EDDF EHAM -

CO RTE ALTN ALTN/CO-RTE ZFW CG

IF
- EDDL - -

CRZ FL CRZ TEMP PY CI FOB

200 ISA -10 50 -

TROPO TRIP WIND TRIP DIST TOW

O
370 HD 030 205 -
C
D

ATC Route:
Forecasted: EDDF 25L BIBTI 2M departure to EHAM 18L REKKEN 2A arrival.
E
LL

Conditions:
AIR COND ON.
O

EOSID: Climb straight ahead to 2000 ft.

TR

PERFORMANCE
N

V1 VR V2 THR FLAPS T/O-CG

O

- - - - - -
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 33

5. Lesson Plan

D
Generic INST3
SFI/TRI Instructor Course Rev. 02

TE
Lesson Plan Date: 26 MAY 2015

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

IN
EDDF Day time 02:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

PR
1 Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off, Expedite take-off

2 Y Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow SID, Sterile cockpit

IF
3 Y + ACAS event

4 Y Y + Passenger heart attack

5 Y Y +
briefing
PY
Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Radar vectoring, Approach

6 Y + Circling approach, From ILS approach

O
7 Y Y + Landing, Wait for an ambulace
C

8 Y Y + Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

D

9 +
E

10
LL

11

12
O

13
TR

14
N

15
O

16
C

17
N

18
U

19

20

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 34

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5

BRIEFING PREPARATION
1 Preparation

D
2 Explanation

TE
3 Attitude
4 Time management
5 Teaching techniques

IN
6 Tools used
7 Body language

PR
8 Leaving the briefing room
SIMULATOR PREPARATION
9 Safety briefing

IF
10 Preparation
11 Use of IOS
INSTRUCTING FROM CM1 PSN PY
12 Aircraft Systems in Normal Procedures
13 Aircraft Systems in Abnormal Procedures
14 Emergency Procedures
O
INSTRUCTING FROM CM2 PSN
C

15 Aircraft Systems in Normal Procedures

16 Aircraft Systems in Abnormal Procedures
D

17 Emergency Procedures
INSTRUCTING FROM IOS PSN
E

18 Realism
LL

19 Time management
20 Notes
O

21 Teaching techniques
DE-BRIEFING PREPARATION
TR

22 Preparation
23 Use of notes
24 Structure
N

25 Time management
O

26 Teaching techniques
27 Paper work
C

GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION

N

28 Co-operation
29 Situational awareness
U

30 Objectives

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 3 4 5

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 35

INST 4 Session – Loft flight –

D
(Use as a help for creating or preparing the Assessment of Competence)

TE
1. Lesson Objective

IN
Demonstrate you as a future instructor are able to manage the IOS, documentation
and deliver a FFS session in a LOFT Flight with normal, abnormal and emergency
topics, for example:

PR
o Normal
operation o Use
of checklists o
Call-outs

IF
o Engine fire/failure after
V1
o Fuel PY
leak
o Engine fail in
cruise
O
o Diversion to
alternate
C

2. Training Topics
D

a. Briefing
E
LL

• FFS 4 overview
• Engine out during take-off
• Engine fail in cruise
O

• Fuel leak
TR

b. Study Reference
N

FCOM, QRH, Training Manual Part

4.9
O

3. Proficiency criteria
C
N

• According to ECAR grading requirements

U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 36

4. Flight Data Example 1

D
FLIGHT DATA

TE
ATIS: EHAM 330/20 CAVOK 12/9 1018

IN
FLIGHT PLAN DATA PERFORMANCE

PR
FLT NBR FROM TO ZFW
ID 404 EHAM EGLL -

CO RTE ALTN ALTN/CO-RTE ZFW CG

IF
- EBBR - -

CRZ FL CRZ TEMP PY CI FOB

160 ISA -10 1200 -

TROPO TRIP WIND TRIP DIST TOW

O
370 HD 050 205 -
C
D

ATC Route:
Forecasted: EHAM 36L GORLO 3V departure. GORLO UL980 LOGAN UL608 BIG.
E

EGLL OCK 1G arrival.

LL

Conditions:
AIR COND ON.
O

EOSID: Climb straight ahead to 2000 ft.

TR

PERFORMANCE
N

V1 VR V2 THR FLAPS T/O-CG

O

- - - - - -
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 37

5. Flight Data Example 2

D
FLIGHT DATA

TE
ATIS: EGLL 120/10 CAVOK 18/4 1019

IN
FLIGHT PLAN DATA PERFORMANCE

PR
FLT NBR FROM TO ZFW
ID 405 EGLL EHAM -

CO RTE ALTN ALTN/CO-RTE ZFW CG

IF
- EBBR - -

CRZ FL CRZ TEMP PY CI FOB

170 ISA -10 10 -

TROPO TRIP WIND TRIP DIST TOW

O
320 TL 040 205 -
C
D

ATC Route:
Forecasted: EGLL 09R DVR 6J departure. UL607 FERDI UN873 HELEN.
E

EHAM 06 HELEN 1A arrival.

LL

Conditions:
AIR COND ON.
O

EOSID: Climb straight ahead to 2000 ft.

TR

PERFORMANCE
N

V1 VR V2 THR FLAPS T/O-CG

O

- - - - - -
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 38

6. Lesson Plan

D
Generic INST4
SFI/TRI Instructor Course Rev. 02

TE
Lesson Plan Date: 26 MAY 2015

Airport: Environment: Session Length:

IN
EHAM - EGLL & EGLL - Day time 02:00
No AP AT FG EVENTS LST

PR
1 Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off, First flight

2 Y Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow SID

IF
3 Y Y + Fuel system, Fuel leak

4 Y Y + Engine failures, shut-down and restart at safe height, Engine flameout in cuise

5 Y +
PY
ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, Down to DA

6 Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

O
7
C

8
D

9 Y Normal take-offs, different flap setting incl. expedited take-off, Second flight
E

10 Y + Take-off with simulated engine failure between V1 and V2, Engine Fire
LL

11 Y Y + Adherence to departure and arrival route and ATC instruction, Follow ATC instructions

12 Y + ILS manually with one engine simulated inoperative, Down to DA

O

13 Landing, After landing and taxi-in procedures

TR

14
N

15
O

16
C

17
N

18
U

19

20

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 39

CTS Ref Nr EVENTS COMMENTS 0 1 2 3 4 5

BRIEFING PREPARATION
1 Preparation

D
2 Explanation

TE
3 Attitude
4 Time management
5 Teaching techniques

IN
6 Tools used
7 Body language

PR
8 Leaving the briefing room
SIMULATOR PREPARATION
9 Safety briefing

IF
10 Preparation
11 Use of IOS
INSTRUCTING FROM CM1 PSN PY
12 Aircraft Systems in Normal Procedures
13 Aircraft Systems in Abnormal Procedures
14 Emergency Procedures
O
INSTRUCTING FROM CM2 PSN
C

15 Aircraft Systems in Normal Procedures

16 Aircraft Systems in Abnormal Procedures
D

17 Emergency Procedures
INSTRUCTING FROM IOS PSN
E

18 Realism
LL

19 Time management
20 Notes
21
O

Teaching techniques
DE-BRIEFING PREPARATION
TR

22 Preparation
23 Use of notes
24 Structure
N

25 Time management
O

26 Teaching techniques
27 Paper work
C

GENERAL THROUGHOUT THE WHOLE SESSION

N

28 Co-operation
29 Situational awareness
U

30 Objectives

OVERALL GRADE
0 1 2 3 4 5

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01
 Instructor Course
OM Part D
Training Manual
APPENDIX D Page 40

D
TE
IN
PR
IF
PY
This Page Is Intentionally Left Blank
O
C
ED
LL
O
TR
N
O
C
N
U

Issue Date :Mar. 2017 Issue 02

Rev. Date : Jul. 2017 Rev. 01